Texas Instruments TI 73 EXPLORER User Manual

ti  
TI-73 Explorer™  
Graphing Calculator Guidebook  
In this guidebook, TI-73 refers to both the TI-73 and  
TI-73 Explorer. All functions, instructions, and examples in  
this guidebook work identically for both the TI-73 and the  
TI-73 Explorer.  
Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.  
© 1998, 2001–2003 Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Table of Contents  
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73  
1
Preparing to Use Your TIN73.........................................3  
The Home Screen...........................................................5  
Entering Numbers and Other Characters.....................6  
Functions and Instructions ..........................................12  
Entering Expressions....................................................15  
Retrieving Previous Entries - £......................17  
Recalling and Storing the Last Answer - ¢......18  
Mode Settings..............................................................22  
Chapter 2: Math Operations  
25  
Keyboard Math Operations ........................................27  
The 1 MATH Menu ................................................34  
The 1 NUM Menu ..................................................44  
The 1 PRB Menu ....................................................49  
The 1 LOG Menu....................................................54  
Chapter 3: Fractions  
57  
Entering Fractions........................................................58  
Using Fractions in Calculations ...................................59  
Fraction Modes ............................................................60  
Converting between Fractions and Decimals.............64  
Converting between Mixed Numbers and  
Simple Fractions......................................................65  
Chapter 4: Measurement Conversions and  
Constant Calculations  
67  
The - ‚ CONVERSIONS Menu.......................68  
Constants......................................................................71  
Chapter 5: Lists  
77  
Steps for Creating a List ..............................................78  
The List Editor 3 ....................................................79  
Naming a List ...............................................................79  
Entering List Elements.................................................81  
Editing Lists in the List Editor......................................87  
The - v Ls Menu .................................................91  
The - v OPS Menu..............................................92  
List Commands from the Home Screen ....................102  
iv TIN73 Table of Contents  
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots  
107  
Steps for Defining a Stat Plot ................................... 108  
Defining Statistical Data in Lists ............................... 109  
Deselecting Yn Functions .......................................... 109  
Defining a Stat Plot................................................... 109  
Selecting Stat Plot Types........................................... 111  
Defining Stat Plot Options........................................ 112  
Adjusting Window Values and Format.................... 114  
Displaying the Stat Plot............................................. 114  
Stat Plot Examples..................................................... 114  
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses  
127  
The - v MATH Menu........................................ 128  
The - v CALC Menu.......................................... 133  
Chapter 8: Tables  
149  
What Is a Table? ........................................................ 150  
Steps for Creating a Table ........................................ 151  
Defining and Selecting Functions in the  
Y= Editor &........................................................ 152  
Setting Up the Table - f ............................ 153  
Displaying the Table - i............................... 154  
Table Setup from the Home Screen ......................... 161  
Chapter 9: Function Graphing  
163  
Steps for Graphing a Function.................................. 164  
Example of Function Graphing................................. 165  
Defining Functions in the Y= Editor & ................. 167  
Selecting a Graph Style ............................................. 169  
Setting the Window Format - g................ 171  
Defining Window Values.......................................... 173  
Displaying a Graph *....................................... 177  
Adjusting Window Values with  
the ( ZOOM Menu ........................................ 181  
The ( MEMORY Menu........................................ 185  
Chapter 10: Drawing  
187  
The 2 DRAW Menu............................................. 188  
The 2 POINTS Menu............................................ 201  
The 2 STO Menu ................................................. 206  
TIN73 Table of Contents v  
Chapter 11: Trigonometry  
209  
The - u TRIG Menu...........................................210  
Graphing Trig Functions............................................214  
The - u ANGLE Menu .......................................215  
Chapter 12: Programming  
221  
What Is a Program? ...................................................223  
Steps for Creating a Program....................................223  
Creating and Naming a New Program .....................224  
Entering Program Commands...................................226  
The 8 CTL Menu ..................................................227  
The 8 I/O Menu....................................................241  
Editing Program Commands .....................................248  
Executing a Program .................................................251  
Debugging a Program...............................................252  
Chapter 13: Communication Link and the  
CBLàCBR Application  
253  
TIN73 Link Capabilities...............................................254  
The Link SEND Menu 9 1...................................255  
The Link RECEIVE Menu 9 1 "..........................257  
Transmitting Data Items............................................258  
Backing Up Memory ..................................................261  
Upgrading your TIN73 Graph Explorer Software.....262  
The APPLICATIONS Menu 9...............................263  
Steps for Running the CBLàCBR Application ..........264  
Selecting the CBL/CBR Application...........................265  
Specifying the Data Collection Method ...................265  
Specifiying Data Collection Options.........................266  
Collecting the Data....................................................273  
Stopping Data Collection..........................................274  
Chapter 14: Memory Management  
275  
The - Ÿ MEMORY Menu...................................276  
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 283  
 
vi TI-73 Table of Contents  
Appendix B: Reference Information  
319  
The TIN73 Menu Map................................................ 320  
The VARS Menu - }....................................... 329  
Equation Operating System (EOS é)........................ 330  
In Case of Difficulty................................................... 330  
Correcting an Error.................................................... 331  
Error Messages........................................................... 332  
Appendix C: BatteryàService and  
Warranty Information  
339  
Battery Information .................................................. 340  
Texas Instruments (TI) Support and Service ............. 342  
Warranty Information............................................... 343  
Index  
345  
Operating the TIN73  
1
Preparing to Use Your TIN73.................................................3  
Installing the AAA Batteries...........................................3  
Turning the TIN73 On and Off .......................................3  
Adjusting the Display Contrast ......................................4  
Resetting Memory and All Defaults...............................4  
The Home Screen...................................................................5  
Entering Numbers and Other Characters.............................6  
Entering a Negative Number a...................................6  
Entering a Number in Scientific Notation - {.......7  
Entering Secondary Functions -...............................7  
Entering Text - t.................................................7  
Common Display Cursors..............................................10  
Editing Numbers and Characters .................................11  
Functions and Instructions ..................................................12  
Accessing Functions and Instructions from Menus .....12  
Accessing FunctionsàInstructions from the CATALOG...14  
Entering Expressions............................................................15  
Grouping Parts of Expressions with Parentheses........16  
Using Implied Multiplication in Expressions................16  
Entering Multiple Expressions on One Line ................16  
Retrieving Previous Entries - £..............................17  
Recalling and Storing the Last Answer - ¢..............18  
Continuing a Calculation with Ans..............................18  
Using Ans as a Variable in an Expression ....................19  
Storing Values to a Variable X .............................20  
Recalling Variable Values - P.............................21  
 
2
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73  
Mode Settings ..................................................................... 22  
Numeric Notation Mode .............................................. 23  
Decimal Notation Mode............................................... 24  
Angle Mode .................................................................. 24  
Display Format Mode ................................................... 24  
Simplification Mode ..................................................... 24  
 
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73 3  
Preparing to Use Your TIN73  
Before using your TIN73, you must install the batteries, turn on  
the calculator, and adjust the contrast. You may reset (clear)  
the calculator memory and defaults, if desired.  
Installing the AAA Batteries  
Install four AAA batteries in the battery compartment on the  
back of the calculator. Arrange the batteries according to the  
polarity (+ and -) diagram in the battery compartment. For  
more information about installing batteries, see Appendix C:  
BatteryàService and Warranty Information.  
Turning the TIN73 On and Off  
To turn on the TIN73, press ^.  
To turn off the TIN73 manually,  
press the yellow - key and  
then press ^ (indicated in this  
book as - ž).  
When you press - ž, all settings and memory contents are  
retained by Constant Memoryè. Any error condition is  
cleared. To prolong battery life, the APDè (Automatic Power  
Down) feature turns the TIN73 off automatically after a few  
minutes without any activity.  
When you turn on the calculator:  
The Home screen is displayed if you previously turned off  
the calculator by pressing - ž. It appears as it did  
when you last used it; all errors are cleared.  
– or –  
The calculator displays the last screen (including the  
display, cursor, and any errors) that was displayed before  
Automatic Power Down turned off the calculator.  
 
4
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73  
Adjusting the Display Contrast  
The brightness and contrast of the display can depend on  
room lighting, battery freshness, and viewing angle.  
To adjust the contrast:  
1. Press and release the yellow - key.  
2. Press and hold $ (to darken the screen) or # (to lighten  
the screen).  
As you change the contrast setting, a number from 0 (lightest)  
to 9 (darkest) in the top-right corner indicates the current  
setting. You may not be able to see the number if the contrast  
is too light or too dark.  
Resetting Memory and All Defaults  
Follow these steps to reset the TIN73 to its factory settings  
and clear all memory:  
1. Turn on the calculator.  
^
The ^ key  
2. Display the MEMORY menu.  
- Ÿ (above _ )  
3. Display the RESET menu.  
7
4. Display the RESET RAM  
menu.  
1
 
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73 5  
5. Select 2:Reset.  
2
All memory is cleared, and the calculator is reset to the factory  
settings.  
When you reset the TIN73, the display contrast is reset. To  
adjust the contrast, follow the directions in the previous  
section.  
The Home Screen  
The Home screen is the primary  
screen of the TIN73. To go to the  
Home screen from any other  
screen or menu, press - l.  
On the Home screen, you can enter instructions, functions,  
and expressions. The answers are displayed on the Home  
screen. The TIN73 screen can display a maximum of eight lines  
with a maximum of 16 characters per line.  
When you calculate an entry on  
the Home screen, depending  
upon space, the answer is  
displayed either directly to the  
right of the entry or on the right  
side of the next line.  
If an entry is longer than one line  
on the Home screen, it wraps to  
the beginning of the next line.  
 
6
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73  
If all lines of the display are full,  
text scrolls off the top of the  
display. The TIN73 stores the  
previous entries as memory  
permits. See the section entitled,  
“Retrieving Previous Entries” on  
page 17.  
Scroll up  
You can scroll up with $ to see  
previously entered entries. If you  
press b while a previous  
entry is highlighted (for  
with $.  
example, 2+2+2+2+2+2+2+2),  
the calculator copies it to a new  
line below all entries (after  
4+4+4ꢀ and its result, 52).  
To clear the Home screen, see the section entitled “Editing  
Numbers and Characters” on page 11.  
Entering Numbers and Other  
Characters  
A symbol or abbreviation of each key’s primary function is  
printed in white on the key. When you press that key, the  
function name is inserted at the cursor location.  
Entering a Negative Number a  
You enter a negative number with the negation key, a. You  
can use negation to modify a number, expression, or each  
element in a list. Notice that this is different from the  
subtraction key, T, which CANNOT be used for negation.  
Subtract M14 N 68.  
³
- l :  
a 1 4 T 6 8 b  
 
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73 7  
Entering a Number in Scientific Notation - {  
Using - {, you can enter a number in scientific notation.  
The notation used to display the result of a calculation  
depends upon the . setting (Normal or Sci). For more  
information on selecting modes, see the section in this chapter  
entitled “Mode Settings.”  
Add 30 © 4 + 8600.  
³
- l : 3 0  
If in Normal  
- { \ 8 6 0 0  
b
mode  
If in Sci mode  
Entering Secondary Functions -  
The - key  
The secondary function of each key is printed in yellow above  
the key. When you press the yellow - key, the yellow  
character, abbreviation, or word above a key, becomes active  
for the next keystroke.  
- t, which is the same as pressing - and  
TEXT  
then 1, displays the Text editor.  
MATH  
1 displays four math menus.  
Entering Text - t  
Many examples in this manual require you to enter alphabetic  
characters, braces, a quotation mark, a space, or test  
operators. You can access all of these from the Text editor.  
To exit the Text editor without saving the contents on the  
entry line, press - l, and the calculator returns you to  
the Home screen.  
 
8
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73  
In all guidebook examples, when a character in the Text editor  
needs to be selected, the keystroke sequence shows the  
character followed by b. Moving the Selection Cursor as  
necessary to highlight the character is implied. To exit the  
Text editor and display the contents on the entry line on the  
previous screen, select Done.  
- t  
The entry line  
Selection Cursor Highlights the character you want to  
select. Use the cursor keys (", !, $, and  
#) to move the cursor. A is highlighted  
with the selection cursor in the - t  
example screen.  
Letters  
Lists letters A-Z in alphabetical order.  
(A-Z)  
List Braces  
Surround a set of numbers separated by  
commas to create a list (outside of the List  
editor). For example, {1,2,3} on the Home  
screen is interpreted as a list.  
{ }  
Quotation Mark (") Surrounds the first text element in a  
categorical list or surrounds an attached  
list formula. (See Chapter 5: Lists for more  
information.)  
Space ( _ )  
Places a space between characters. It is  
frequently used in programs.  
Test Operators  
Used to compare two values.  
=, ƒ, >, , <,   
Logic (Boolean)  
Operators  
and, or  
Used to interpret values as zero (false) or  
nonzero (true).  
 
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73 9  
Done  
Exits the Text editor when selected and  
pastes all contents on the entry line to the  
cursor location on the previous screen.  
Entry Line  
Displays all currently selected characters.  
All edit keys, except the cursor keys, edit  
characters on the entry line.  
Insert R on the Home screen.  
³
1. Go to the Home screen and  
clear it, if desired.  
- l :  
Use $, #, ", and  
2. Use the Text editor to  
select R.  
! to highlight R.  
- t R b  
R is pasted to  
the entry line.  
3. Exit the Text editor.  
Done b  
The Home  
screen  
Test and Logic (Boolean) Operators  
You select test and logic operators exactly as you would a  
letter. Both types of operators are explained in detail in  
Chapter 2: Math Operations.  
 
10 Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73  
Entry Line  
The entry line displays all characters selected in the Text  
editor. The entry line also accepts all number keys (Y, Z,  
[, ꢀ) and many keyboard operations (6, I, \, C, etc.).  
Enter these between Text editor characters, as necessary,  
without leaving the Text editor.  
If you press a key that isn’t accepted in the Text editor, the  
calculator does not return an error. You must select Done to  
exit and then continue your entry on the previous screen.  
You can enter up to 16 characters on the entry line. If you need  
to enter more than 16 characters, select Done to save your  
entry. Then reenter the Text editor, and continue entering  
additional characters.  
Common Display Cursors  
In most cases, the appearance of the cursor indicates what  
happens when you press the next key or select the next menu  
item.  
If you press - while the Insert Cursor (Û) is displayed, the  
underline cursor becomes an underlined #.  
Cursor  
Appearance  
Effect of Next Keystroke  
Entry  
Solid Rectangle A character is entered at the  
cursor; any existing character is  
overwritten.  
Ù
Insert  
Underline  
Ú
A character is inserted in front  
of the cursor location.  
Second  
Reverse Arrow A 2nd character (yellow on the  
Û
keyboard) is entered, or a 2nd  
operation is executed.  
Full  
Checkerboard No entry; the maximum  
Rectangle  
characters are entered at a  
prompt, or memory is full.  
Ø
 
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73 11  
Editing Numbers and Characters  
Using the edit keys, you can edit an entry on the Home screen  
or Y= editor, programming commands in the Program editor,  
the entry lines of the Text editor and List editor, and constants  
in the Set Constant editor.  
Keystrokes Result  
! or "  
Moves the cursor to the left or right. Moves the  
Selection cursor in the Text editor.  
$ or #  
- !  
- "  
:
Moves/scrolls the cursor up or down.  
Moves the cursor to the beginning of an entry.  
Moves the cursor to the end of an entry.  
Within a line on the Home screen, it  
clears all characters to the right of the  
cursor.  
At the beginning or end of a line on the  
Home screen, it clears the current line.  
On a blank line on the Home screen, it  
clears everything on the Home screen.  
In an editor, it clears the expression or  
value where the cursor is located.  
/
Deletes the character at the cursor.  
- m  
Inserts characters in front of a character; to  
end insertion, press - m or press !, ", $  
or #.  
<
I
Inserts a character before a fraction on the  
Home screen. (- m inserts a character  
before a fraction on any other screen.)  
Inserts the variable X at the cursor location.  
 
12 Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73  
Functions and Instructions  
A function returns a value. Generally, the first letter of each  
function is lowercase on the TIN73. For example, pxl-Test( is a  
function because it returns a value, 0 or 1.  
An instruction initiates an action. Generally, the first letter of  
each instruction name is uppercase. For example, Pxl-On( is an  
instruction that draws a pixel on the graph screen.  
Most functions and some instructions take at least one  
argument. An open parenthesis (() at the end of the function or  
instruction name prompts you to enter an argument. Complete  
the function with an end parenthesis, E.  
Note: Do not use the Text editor to enter names of functions  
or instructions. For example, you cannot enter L, then O, then  
G to calculate the log of a value. If you did this, the calculator  
would interpret the entry as implied multiplication of the  
variables L, O, and G.  
When this guidebook describes the syntax of a function or  
instruction, each argument is in italics. Optional arguments for  
a function are signified by brackets [ ]. Do not enter the  
brackets.  
Accessing Functions and Instructions from Menus  
You can find most functions and instructions on menus (in  
other words, not directly from the keyboard).  
Displaying a Menu  
To display a menu, press the key associated with the menu. Up  
to four separate menus are displayed from which you choose  
the menu item you want.  
1
 
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73 13  
To move from menu to menu on a menu screen, press " or !  
until the menu name is highlighted.  
When a menu item ends in an ellipsis (ꢀ), the item displays a  
secondary menu or editor when you select it.  
- ‚  
Accessing and Selecting Menu Items  
To scroll up or down the menu items, press $ or #. To wrap  
to the last menu item directly from the first menu item, press  
$. To wrap to the first menu item directly from the last menu  
item, press #.  
When the menu continues beyond the displayed items, a $  
replaces the colon next to the last displayed item.  
Select a menu item in one of two ways:  
Press # or $ to move the cursor to the number or letter  
of the item, and then press b.  
Press the number key for the number next to the item. If  
a letter is next to the item, access letters from the Text  
editor (- t).  
After you select an item from a menu, you usually are returned  
to the initial screen where you were working.  
Exiting a Menu without Making a Selection  
Exit a menu without making a selection in one of three ways:  
Press : to return to the screen where you were.  
Press - l to return to the Home screen.  
Press a key or key sequence for another menu or for  
another screen (except - t, which is not accessible  
from all screens).  
 
14 Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73  
Accessing FunctionsàInstructions from the  
CATALOG  
- | displays the CATALOG, which is an alphabetical  
list of all functions, instructions, programming commands,  
variables, and symbols on the TIN73. If, for example, you  
cannot remember where a particular menu item is located, you  
can find it in the CATALOG.  
Items that begin with a number are in alphabetical order  
according to the first letter after the number. For example,  
1-Var Stats is among the items that begin with V.  
Items that are symbols follow the last item that begins with Z.  
You can access the symbols quickly by pressing $ from the  
first catalog item, A§b/c. The cursor moves to the bottom of the  
list.  
Selection Cursor  
- |  
To select an item from the CATALOG:  
1. Press - | to display the CATALOG. The Selection  
Cursor always points to the first item.  
2. Press $ or # to scroll the CATALOG until the Selection  
Cursor points to the item you want.  
To jump to the first item beginning with a particular letter,  
select that letter from the Text editor. Press - t  
while in the CATALOG, use the cursor keys to highlight the  
letter you want, and then press b. You are  
automatically returned to the CATALOG, and the Selection  
Cursor has now moved to the new section. Scroll to the  
item you want.  
3. Press b to paste the CATALOG item to the current  
screen.  
 
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73 15  
Enter the CATALOG and go directly to the section starting with  
L.  
³
1. Go to the CATALOG.  
- |  
2. Select L from Text editor.  
- t L b  
Selecting ¨ by pressing b pastes it to the previous screen,  
just as if you had selected it from a menu.  
Entering Expressions  
An expression is a group of numbers, variables, functions and  
their arguments, or a combination of these elements that  
evaluates to a single answer. Instructions cannot be used in  
expressions. An expression is completed when you press  
b, regardless of the cursor location.  
On the TIN73, you enter an expression in the same order as  
you would write it on paper. The entire expression is  
evaluated according to the Equation Operating System (EOS )  
rules (which is explained in detail in Appendix B: Reference  
Information), and the answer is displayed.  
Calculate the area (A) of a circle whose radius (R)=3 using the  
formula A=pR2. Then use the area to calculate the volume (V)  
³
of a cylinder whose height (H)=4. Use the formula V=AQH.  
- l :  
- „ 3 6 b  
 
16 Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73  
M 4 b  
Ans is the previous  
answer, 28.27433388.  
Grouping Parts of Expressions with Parentheses  
The calculator calculates an expression within parentheses  
first.  
Calculate 4(1+2).  
³
- l :  
4 D 1 \ 2 E b  
4(1+2)=4(3)=12  
Using Implied Multiplication in Expressions  
The calculator understands that two numbers separated by  
parentheses are multiplied together.  
Calculate 4Q3 using parentheses.  
³
- l :  
4 D 3 E b  
Entering Multiple Expressions on One Line  
To store more than one expression on a line, separate two or  
more expressions or instructions on a line with a colon  
(- | $ $ $ b).  
Define the variable, R=5, and then calculate pR2 on the same  
line.  
³
1. Store 5 to R.  
- l :  
5 X - t  
R b Done b  
- |  
$ $ $ b  
 
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73 17  
2. Enter the second  
expression, pR2, and  
calculate the result.  
- „ - t  
R b Done b  
6 b  
Retrieving Previous Entries - £  
When you press b on the Home screen to evaluate an  
expression or execute an instruction, the expression or  
instruction is placed in a storage area called Entry (last entry).  
When you turn off the TIN73, Entry is retained in memory.  
You can retrieve the last entry to the current cursor location,  
where you can edit it, if desired, and then execute it. On the  
Home screen or in an editor, press - £; the current line  
is cleared and the last entry is pasted to the line.  
The TIN73 retains as many previous entries as memory  
permits. To cycle through these entries, press - £  
repeatedly. To view stored entries, use $ to scroll up the  
Home screen.  
Store 1 to variable A, 1 to variable B, and then 3 to variable A  
using - £.  
³
1. Store 1 to A.  
- l :  
1 X - t  
A b Done b  
b
2. Recall the last entry.  
- £  
 
18 Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73  
3. Edit and enter the new  
expression.  
! - t  
B b Done b  
b
4. Cycle back two entries.  
- £ - £  
5. Edit and enter the new  
expression.  
! ! ! 3 b  
Recalling and Storing the Last Answer  
- ¢  
When an expression is evaluated successfully from the Home  
screen or from a program, the TIN73 stores the answer to a  
system variable called Ans (last answer). Recall Ans by  
pressing - ¢. Ans can be a real number or a list. When you  
turn off the TIN73, the value in Ans is retained in memory.  
You can use the variable Ans in any place that is appropriate  
for the type of answer Ans represents. For example, if Ans is a  
real number, you can use it anywhere where real numbers are  
accepted (Y= editor, WINDOW, List editor, etc.).  
Continuing a Calculation with Ans  
You can recall Ans as the first entry in the next expression  
without entering the value again or pressing - ¢. After  
completing a calculation, press an operation or function key  
(excluding <, =, or @) and the calculator displays Ans  
and uses the value in the next calculation.  
 
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73 19  
1. Calculate 34 using the Ans  
feature.  
- l :  
³
3 M 3 b  
M 3 b  
M 3 b  
2. Check your answer, if  
desired.  
3 7 4 b  
Using Ans as a Variable in an Expression  
Since Ans is a variable, you can use it in expressions just as  
you would any other variable. When the expression is  
evaluated, the TIN73 uses the value of Ans in the calculation.  
For more information about variables, see the next two  
sections in this chapter entitled, “Storing Values to a Variable”  
and “Recalling Variable Values.”  
Calculate the area of a garden plot 1.7 meters by 4.2 meters.  
Then calculate the yield per square meter if the plot produces  
a total of 147 tomatoes.  
³
1. Calculate the area.  
- l :  
1 . 7 M 4 . 2 b  
2. Divide 147 by Ans, which  
was calculated in the first  
step.  
Ans=7.14  
1 4 7 F - ¢ b  
 
20 Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73  
Storing Values to a Variable X  
You can store values or expressions that result in one value or  
lists to a one-letter variable or a system variable (types are  
listed below) to save for later use. Also, you can save a result  
for later use by storing Ans to a variable before you evaluate  
another expression.  
When an expression containing the name of a variable is  
evaluated, the value of the variable at that time is used. You  
can enter and use several types of data for variables, including  
real numbers, lists, functions, statistical plots, and graph  
pictures.  
Variable names cannot be the same as a name that is  
preassigned by the TIN73. These include built-in functions  
such as abs( , instructions such as Line( , and system variables  
such as Xmin.  
Variable Type  
Names  
Real Numbers  
A, B, ꢀ, Z (- t)  
Lists—Numerical  
and Categorical  
L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6, and any user-defined  
list names (- v Ls)  
Functions  
Stat Plots  
Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4 (- } 2:Y-Vars)  
Plot1, Plot2, Plot3 (- e from the  
Program editor)  
Graph Pictures  
Pic1, Pic2, Pic3 (- } 4:Picture)  
System Variables  
Xmin, Xmax, ꢀ (- } 1:Window)  
Store a value to either a system variable or a letter variable  
from the Home screen or a program using the X key. Begin  
on a blank line and follow these steps.  
 
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73 21  
1. Enter the numeric value. It can be an expression that  
results in a numeric value.  
2. Press X. " is copied to the cursor location.  
3. Select the type of variable to which you want to store the  
value. Use the Text editor (- t) to enter a letter  
variable, the VARS (- }) menu to enter a system  
variable, or the - v Ls menu to enter a list name.  
4. Press b. If you entered an expression, it is evaluated.  
The value is stored to the variable.  
Store 10 to R, and then calculate pR2.  
³
1. On the Home screen, store  
10 to R.  
- l :  
1 0 X - t  
R b Done b  
b
2. Calculate pR2.  
- „ - t  
R b Done b  
6 b  
Recalling Variable Values - P  
To recall a variable’s value to the current cursor location,  
follow these steps. To leave Rcl, press :.  
1. Press - P. Rcl and the edit cursor are displayed on  
the bottom line of the screen.  
2. Enter the name of the variable in any of four ways:  
Enter letters using the Text editor (- t).  
Press - v, and then select the name of the list  
from the Ls menu.  
 
22 Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73  
Press - } to display the VARS menu; next select  
the type and then the name of the variable or  
function.  
Press 8 (from the Program editor only), and then  
select the name of the program to call a program as a  
subroutine within another program.  
3. The variable name you selected is displayed on the  
bottom line and the cursor disappears.  
4. Press b. The variable contents are inserted where the  
cursor was located before you began these steps.  
Calculate 100+R using the Rcl function. (R was defined in the  
previous section, “Storing Variable Values.”)  
³
1. On the Home screen, enter  
the first part of the  
calculation.  
- l : 1 0 0 \  
2. Recall R.  
- P - t  
R b Done b  
R=10  
3. Finish the calculation.  
b
b
Mode Settings  
Mode settings control how the TIN73 interprets and displays  
numbers. Mode settings are retained by the Constant Memory  
feature when the TIN73 is turned off. All numbers, including  
elements of lists, are displayed according to the current mode  
settings, as applicable. To display the mode settings, press  
.. The default settings are highlighted on the following  
screen.  
 
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73 23  
To select a mode setting, highlight the one you want by using  
the cursor keys, and then press b.  
Default  
Settings  
.
Normal Sci  
Numeric Notation mode  
Decimal Notation mode  
Angle mode  
Float 0123456789  
Degree Radian  
A§b/c b/c  
Display Format mode (fractions only)  
Autosimp Mansimp Simplification mode (fractions only)  
Numeric Notation Mode  
The Numeric Notation mode settings affect the way an answer  
is displayed on the TIN73. Numeric answers can be displayed  
with up to 10 digits and a two-digit exponent. Answers  
(excluding fractional ones) on the Home screen, list elements  
in the List editor, and table elements on the Table screen are  
displayed according to the Numeric Notation mode selected.  
The Normal setting displays results with digits to the left and  
right of the decimal, as in 123456.78.  
The Sci (scientific) setting expresses numbers with one digit to  
the left of the decimal and the appropriate power of 10 to the  
right of ©, as in 1.2345678 © 5, (which is the same as 123456.78).  
Note: Answers that have more than 10 digits and whose  
absolute value is greater than .001 are displayed in scientific  
notation.  
 
24 Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73  
Decimal Notation Mode  
The Decimal Notation mode has two settings, Float and  
0123456789, which only affect the way an answer is displayed  
on the TIN73.  
The Float (floating decimal point) setting displays up to 10  
digits, plus the sign and decimal.  
The 0123456789 (fixed decimal point) setting specifies the  
number of digits (0 through 9) to display to the right of the  
decimal. Place the cursor on the desired number of decimal  
digits, and then press b.  
The decimal setting applies to answers (excluding fractional  
ones) on the Home screen, X- and Y-coordinates on a graph  
display, list elements in the List editor, table elements on the  
Table screen, and regression model results.  
Angle Mode  
The Angle mode has two settings, Degree and Radian, which  
control how the TIN73 interprets angle values in trigonometric  
functions. See Chapter 11: Trigonometry for a detailed  
explanation.  
Display Format Mode  
The Display Format mode has two settings, A§b/c and b/c,  
which determine if a fraction is displayed as a mixed or simple  
fraction. See Chapter 3: Fractions for a detailed explanation.  
Simplification Mode  
The Simplification mode has two settings, Autosimp and  
Mansimp, which determine if the calculator automatically  
simplifies a fractional result completely or if you must simplify  
the results manually step-by-step. See Chapter 3: Fractions for  
detailed information.  
 
Math Operations  
2
Keyboard Math Operations ................................................27  
Basic Operations \, T, M, F.....................................27  
Integer Division - Œ............................................28  
p - „........................................................................28  
Percent C....................................................................29  
Inverse Function - ƒ .............................................30  
Square 6 ....................................................................30  
Power 7 ......................................................................31  
Square Root - z ....................................................31  
Test Operations - t...........................................32  
The 1 MATH Menu........................................................34  
lcm( 1 1..................................................................35  
gcd( 1 2..................................................................36  
3 (Cube) 1 3...........................................................37  
3
( 1 4....................................................................38  
x
1 5 .....................................................................38  
Solver 1 6...............................................................38  
The 1 NUM Menu..........................................................44  
abs( 1 " 1..............................................................44  
round( 1 " 2.........................................................45  
iPart( and fPart( 1 " 3 and 4 ...............................46  
min( and max( 1 " 5 and 6..................................47  
remainder( 1 " 7..................................................48  
The 1 PRB Menu ............................................................49  
rand 1 " " 1........................................................49  
randInt( 1 " " 2 ..................................................50  
nPr 1 " " 3 ..........................................................51  
nCr 1 " " 4..........................................................51  
! 1 " " 5 ..............................................................52  
coin( 1 " " 6........................................................53  
dice( 1 " " 7........................................................53  
 
26 Chapter 2: Math Operations  
The 1 LOG Menu........................................................... 54  
log( 1 " " " 1 .................................................... 54  
10^( 1 " " " 2.................................................... 55  
ln( 1 " " " 3 ...................................................... 55  
e^( 1 " " " 4...................................................... 56  
Chapter 2: Math Operations 27  
Keyboard Math Operations  
The following sections explain how to use the math functions,  
including - functions, found on the TIN73 keyboard. All of  
the examples in these sections assume that you are on the  
Home screen and that defaults are selected (unless specified  
otherwise).  
Real numbers include fractions unless specified otherwise.  
Basic Operations \, T, M, F  
Returns the sum (\), difference (T), product (M), or quotient  
(F) of valueA and valueB, which can be real numbers,  
expressions, or lists.  
If both values are lists, they must have the same number of  
elements. If one value is a list and the other is a non-list, the  
non-list is paired with each element of the list, and a list is  
returned.  
valueA + valueB  
valueA N valueB  
valueA ¦ valueB  
valueA P valueB  
Add M456 + 123.  
³
: a 4 5 6 \ 1 2 3  
b
³
³
Divide 45.68 P 123.  
4 5 . 6 8 F 1 2 3 b  
Multiply log(20) Q cos(60).  
1 " " " 1  
2 0 E M - u 3  
6 0 E b  
In Degree mode  
 
28 Chapter 2: Math Operations  
Integer Division - Œ  
- Œ divides two positive integers and displays the  
quotient and the remainder, r.  
posintegerA Intà posintegerB  
quotient=5  
5
5r1  
11  
The result includes  
the quotient and the  
remainder, r.  
2
2
11  
10  
1
10  
1
remainder=1  
You can include integer division in an expression, but the  
remainder may not be displayed as part of the final answer.  
After a calculation with - Œ is completed, only the  
quotient from the result is stored in Ans (last answer).  
Therefore, if you use the result in another calculation, the  
remainder is ignored.  
Calculate 11 P 2 using integer  
division.  
³
: 1 1 - Œ 2  
b
p - „  
Represents the value for the constant, p, in calculations. The  
calculator uses p=3.1415926535898, although it only displays  
3.141592654 on the screen. p acts as a real number in any  
calculation.  
³
Multiply 4 Q p.  
: 4 M -  
„ b  
 
Chapter 2: Math Operations 29  
³
Calculate sin(p).  
: - u 1 -  
„ E b  
If in Radian  
mode  
If in Degree mode  
Percent C  
Changes a real_number to percent. Results display according  
to the Decimal Notation mode setting.  
real_number%  
Convert M30.6% to a decimal.  
³
1. Select Float Decimal  
setting.  
. # b  
- l  
2. Convert M30.6% to a  
decimal.  
: a 3 0 . 6 C  
b
³
³
Calculate 20% of 30.  
2 0 C M 3 0 b  
Calculate 30 + 20% of 30.  
3 0 \ 2 0 C M 3 0 b  
 
30 Chapter 2: Math Operations  
Inverse Function - ƒ  
Returns the inverse, x-1, of value, which is the equivalent of the  
1
reciprocal, / , of a real number, expression, or each element  
x
in a list.  
value -1  
Important: To ensure that results are displayed as simple  
fractions instead of mixed numbers, select b/c Display Format  
mode.  
-1  
5
Calculate /  
.
³
³
8
: 5 = 8 " - ƒ  
b
Calculate M2.5-1.  
a 2 . 5 - ƒ b  
Square 6  
Finds the square of a real number, an expression, or each  
element in a list. Note: Using parentheses with 6 ensures  
that you get the correct answer. Refer to Appendix B:  
Reference Information for Equation Operating System (EOS)  
calculation rules.  
value2  
Calculate 52.  
³
³
: 5 6 b  
Compare the results of M52 and (M5)2..  
1. Calculate M52.  
a 5 6 b  
 
Chapter 2: Math Operations 31  
2. Calculate (M5)2..  
D a 5 E 6 b  
Power 7  
Raises value to any power. value and power can be real  
numbers, expression, or lists. If both are lists, they must have  
the same number of elements. If one argument is a list and the  
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each element of the  
list, and a list is returned.  
value^power  
value is limited by mathematical rules. For example, (M4)^.5  
results in an error because this is the equivalent of (M4)^1/2,  
‡M4, a complex number.  
which is  
Calculate 25.  
³
: 2 7 5 b  
Square Root - z  
Calculates the square root of value, which can be a positive  
real number, an expression that results in a positive real  
number, or a list of positive numbers.  
(value)  
Calculate 256.  
³
: - z 2 5 6 E  
b
 
32 Chapter 2: Math Operations  
Test Operations - t  
The two types of test operations included in the Text editor  
are relational operators (=, ƒ, >, , <, and ) and logic (Boolean)  
operators (and and or).  
Both relational and logic operators often are used in programs  
to control program flow and in graphing to control the graph  
as a function over specific values.  
Relational Operators  
Relational operators compare conditionA and conditionB and  
return 1 if the conditional statement is true. They return 0 if  
the conditional statement is false. conditionA and conditionB  
can be real numbers, expressions, or lists.  
If both conditions are lists, they must have the same number  
of elements. If one condition is a list and the other a non-list,  
the non-list is compared with each element of the list, and a  
list is returned.  
Test operations are frequently used in programs.  
conditionA relational_operator conditionB  
Relational operators are evaluated after mathematical  
functions according to EOS rules (Appendix B: Reference  
Information). Therefore, for 2+2=2+3, the TI-73 returns 0. It  
compares 4 with 5 and returns 0, because the operation is  
false. For 2+(2=2)+3, the TI-73 returns 6. The relational test in  
parentheses returns 1, because the operation is true. Then it  
adds 2+(1)+3.  
 
Chapter 2: Math Operations 33  
Operator:  
Returns true (1) if:  
= (equal)  
Two conditions are equal.  
ƒ (not equal to)  
> (greater than)  
Two conditions are not equal.  
conditionA is greater than conditionB.  
(greater than or  
equal to)  
conditionA is greater than or equal to  
conditionB.  
< (less than)  
conditionA is less than conditionB.  
 (less than or  
equal to)  
conditionA is less than or equal to  
conditionB.  
Logic (Boolean) Operators  
Logic (Boolean) operators compare conditionA and  
conditionB and return 1 if the conditional statement is true.  
They return 0 if the conditional statement is false. conditionA  
and conditionB can be real numbers, expressions, or lists.  
If both conditions are lists, they must have the same number  
of elements. If one condition is a list and the other a non-list,  
the non-list is compared with each element of the list, and a  
list is returned.  
conditionA and conditionB  
conditionA or conditionB  
Operator:  
Returns true (1) if:  
and  
or  
Both conditions are nonzero.  
At least one condition is nonzero.  
1
Test / =  
16  
/
32  
.
2
³
- l  
: 1 = 2 "  
- t = b Done  
b 1 6 = 3 2 b  
1=true  
 
34 Chapter 2: Math Operations  
For L1={1,2,3}, test L1>log(30).  
³
1. Define L1.  
: - t  
{ b 1 ¡ 2 ¡ 3 }  
b Done b  
X - v 1 b  
2. Test L1 > log(30).  
- v 1 - t  
> b Done b  
1 ! 1 3 0 E b  
1>log(30) is false;  
2>log(30) is true;  
3>log(30) is true.  
Test cos(90) and sin(0).  
³
: - u 3  
9 0 E - t and  
b Done b  
- u 1 0 E b  
The 1 MATH Menu  
The 1 MATH menu includes various math functions.  
1
 
Chapter 2: Math Operations 35  
1:lcm(  
2:gcd(  
Finds the least common multiple, which is the  
smallest number that two integers can divide into  
evenly.  
Finds the greatest common divisor, which is the  
largest number that divides into two integers  
evenly.  
3:3  
Calculates the cube.  
4:3(  
Calculates the cube root.  
Calculates the xth root.  
Displays the Equation Solver.  
5:x‡  
6:Solver…  
lcm( 1 1  
The least common multiple (LCM) function returns the  
smallest number that two positive whole numbers can divide  
into evenly, of two positive whole numbers or lists of positive  
whole numbers. If both arguments are lists, they must have the  
same number of elements. If one argument is a list and the  
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each element of the  
list, and a list is returned.  
lcm( is frequently used with fractions to find a common  
denominator. See Chapter 3: Fractions for more information  
on entering fractions.  
lcm(valueA,valueB)  
Find the LCM of 6 and 9.  
³
: 1 1  
6 ¡ 9 E b  
 
36 Chapter 2: Math Operations  
1
5
Add / + / (using LCM).  
³
4
6
1. Find the LCM of the  
denominators.  
Therefore, 12 is  
the common  
1 1  
denominator.  
4 ¡ 6 E b  
1
2. Use the LCM to convert /  
4
1 3 3  
Q =  
4 3 12  
5
and / to fractions where  
6
12 is the common  
LCM=12  
denominator (without using  
the calculator).  
5 2 10  
Q =  
6 2 12  
3. Add the newly converted  
fractions (without using the  
calculator).  
3 10 13  
+
12 12 12  
=
4. Verify your answer by  
adding the original fractions  
on the calculator. Select the  
b/c Display Format mode  
setting and clear the Home  
screen, if desired.  
. # # # " b  
- l :  
1 = 4 " \ 5 = 6  
b
gcd( 1 2  
The greatest common divisor (GCD) function returns the  
largest number that divides into two positive whole numbers  
or lists of positive whole numbers evenly. If both arguments  
are lists, they must have the same number of elements. If one  
argument is a list and the other a non-list, the non-list is paired  
with each element of the list, and a list is returned.  
This is frequently used with fractions to reduce them to lowest  
terms. See Chapter 2: Fractions for more information on  
entering fractions.  
 
Chapter 2: Math Operations 37  
gcd(valueA,valueB)  
27  
Find the greatest common divisor for the fraction,  
27  
/
36  
³
.
1. Find the GCD of  
/
36  
.
1 2  
2 7 ¡ 3 6 E b  
GCD=9  
2. Simplify the fraction  
completely using the GCD 27 9 3  
P =  
36 9 4  
(without using the  
calculator).  
3. Verify your answer by  
27  
by 9 on the  
36  
simplifying  
/
calculator. You must be in  
Mansimp mode setting.  
. # # # # "  
b - l  
2 7 = 3 6 " B 9  
b
3
1 3  
Calculates the cube of n, which is equivalent to n Q n Q n of  
any real number, expression, or each element in a list.  
n3  
Calculate 53.  
³
5 1 3  
b
53 = 5 Q 5 Q 5 = 125  
 
38 Chapter 2: Math Operations  
3
( 1 4  
Calculates the cube root of value, which is equivalent to n  
where n3=value. value can be a real number, expression, or  
list.  
3
3
For n =value, value=n  
3
(value)  
Calculate 3(125).  
³
1 4 1 2 5 E b  
3
(125) = 5  
because 53=125  
x
1 5  
Calculates the xth root of value, which is equivalent to n where  
nx=value. value can be a real number, expression, or list. x  
can be any real number.  
x
x
For n =value, value=n  
x
x
(value)  
Calculate 664.  
: 6 1 5  
6 4 b  
³
x
6 64 = 2  
because 26=64  
Solver 1 6  
The Equation Solver allows you to solve for one unknown  
one-letter variable in an equation containing up to 5 one-letter  
variables. By default, the equation is assumed to be equal to 0;  
however, you can set the equation equal to any real number  
(or an expression that results in a real number).  
The screen you see when you select Solver depends on  
whether an equation has been defined previously.  
To exit Solver and return to the Home screen, press - l.  
 
Chapter 2: Math Operations 39  
The EQUATION SOLVER Screen  
If no equation is currently defined, pressing 1 6 takes you  
to the EQUATION SOLVER screen. Enter the equation at the  
cursor, using the Text editor (- t) to enter the variable  
names.  
1 6  
You can have more than one variable on each side of the  
equation. For example, A + B = B + D + E.  
If you do not set the equation equal to a value, the calculator  
automatically sets it equal to 0. For example, to enter A+B=0,  
just enter A+B and press b. You are limited to 5 variables  
per equation.  
The Equation Variables Screen  
If an equation has been defined previously, pressing 1 6  
takes you to the Equation Variables screen.  
Your screen  
may vary.  
1 6  
40 Chapter 2: Math Operations  
Equation  
Displays the currently defined  
equation.  
Equation Variables  
Displays all equation variables and  
their values.  
bound  
Displays the bound limits that apply to  
Default={M1©99,1©99} the unknown variable value for which  
you are solving.  
Solve  
You select one variable, the one you  
want to solve for, from this list.  
Equation  
The first line of the Equation Variables screen displays the  
equation you defined on the EQUATION SOLVER screen.  
If you would like to edit a defined equation, press $ until the  
EQUATION SOLVER screen is displayed. Edit the equation with  
:, /, or - m, as necessary. Then press b to  
return to the Equation Variables screen.  
Equation Variables  
All variables included in the defined equation are displayed. If  
those variables have never been assigned a value, they are set  
equal to 0. If a variable has been defined previously (for  
example, from the Home screen), that value appears.  
If a value extends beyond the screen, press " to scroll to the  
end of the number. This is especially important if a number is  
in scientific notation and you need to see whether it has a  
negative or positive exponent.  
For an equation with more than one variable, you must define  
all variables except the unknown variable for which you want  
to solve.  
Chapter 2: Math Operations 41  
bound  
bound limits apply to the unknown variable value for which  
you are solving. Default bounds are {M1©99,1©99}. Use these  
limits to narrow the unknown value solution to a specific  
range of numbers, especially if more than one answer exists.  
Hint: For answers with many solutions (for example, trig  
functions), consider graphing the function first to get an idea  
of the most ideal (or specific) bound limits.  
Solve  
Specify the unknown variable from the Solve line. This  
prompts the calculator to solve for it.  
To select a variable on the Solve line, highlight the unknown  
variable with the cursor, and then press b. After you press  
b, a solid black square appears next to the solved  
(previously unknown) variable displayed in the Equation  
Variables section.  
Hint: The Solver allows for a small tolerance when solving a  
result, which is noticeable especially when solving complex  
equations or those with multiple solutions. For example, a  
result of 3.99999999999999 (instead of 4) for the equation 16=x2  
is considered a correct answer.  
Solving Equations with Only One Possible Answer  
For 2(L+M)=N, solve for L when N=268, and M=40, M14, and  
307.  
³
1. Define the equation on the  
EQUATION SOLVER screen.  
1 6  
$ : (if necessary)  
 
42 Chapter 2: Math Operations  
2. Enter the equation.  
Your variable  
values may vary.  
- t  
2 D L b \ M b  
E = b N b  
Done b b  
3. Enter the first value for M,  
40, and N, 268.  
# 4 0 # 2 6 8  
4. Solve for L.  
# # b  
5. Solve for L when M=M14.  
# a 1 4 # # # b  
6. Solve for L when M=307.  
# 3 0 7 # # # b  
Solving Equations with More Than One Answer  
The calculator only returns one solution even if more than one  
possible solution exists. When this is the case, you can first  
enter a guess by assigning a value to that variable and then  
asking the calculator to solve your equation. The TI-73 always  
chooses the solution closest to that guess. However, the guess  
must be within the bound limits; otherwise, you get an error.  
Chapter 2: Math Operations 43  
Find the negative solution to the equation, 16=X2.  
³
1. Define the equation on the  
EQUATION SOLVER screen.  
1 6  
$ : (if necessary)  
Your X value  
2. Enter the equation.  
may vary.  
- t  
1 6 = b I 6 Done  
b b  
3. Use bound to limit your  
answer to a negative one  
(between M16 and 0).  
# " a 16 / / " 0  
/ / /  
4. Solve for X.  
# b  
5. The guess, X=10, is not  
between the limit bounds.  
You must clear or change it.  
(This step uses a different  
guess, M6.)  
L6 is between  
the bounds.  
2 : a 6  
6. Solve for X.  
# # b  
44 Chapter 2: Math Operations  
The 1 NUM Menu  
The 1 NUM (number) menu includes seven different math  
functions.  
1 "  
1:abs(  
Calculates the absolute value of a real number,  
list, or expression.  
2:round(  
3:iPart(  
4:fPart(  
5:min(  
Rounds a real number, list, or expression.  
Returns only the integer part of a result.  
Returns only the fractional part of a result.  
Returns the minimum of two real numbers, lists,  
or expressions.  
6:max(  
Returns the maximum of two real numbers, lists,  
or expressions.  
7:remainder( Returns the remainder resulting from the division  
of two real numbers or lists.  
abs( 1 " 1  
Returns the absolute value of a real number, expression, or  
each element in a list. For an expression, the expression is  
calculated and the absolute value of that result is returned.  
abs(value)  
Find the absolute value of M35.2.  
³
1 " 1 a 3 5 . 2 E  
b
 
Chapter 2: Math Operations 45  
round( 1 " 2  
Returns a number, expression, or each element in a list  
rounded to 10 digits or #decimal_places (9), if specified. The  
final result is always displayed according to the Decimal  
Notation mode (.) unless #decimal_places is specified,  
which overrides the current setting. Notice that the Decimal  
Notation mode settings do change the display but not the value  
of the result. Therefore, the entire result is stored in the  
calculator ready to use for future calculations, as applicable.  
round(value[,#decimal_places])  
Round p to different numbers of decimal places using different  
Decimal Notation mode settings.  
³
1. Set Decimal Notation mode  
to Float, if necessary.  
. # b  
- l :  
2. Round p to 3 decimal  
places.  
1 " 2 - „  
¡ 3 E b  
3. Set Decimal Notation mode  
to 4.  
. # " " " " "  
b - l  
4. Round p to 3 decimal  
places.  
- £ b  
 
46 Chapter 2: Math Operations  
5. Leave the Decimal Notation  
mode at 4 and round p to 5  
digits.  
- £ ! ! 5  
b
iPart( and fPart( 1 " 3 and 4  
iPart( returns the integer part of a real number, expression, or  
each element in a list. For an expression, the expression is  
calculated and the integer part of the result is displayed.  
iPart(value)  
fPart( returns the fractional part of a real number, expression,  
or each element in a list. For an expression, the expression is  
calculated and the fractional part of the result is displayed.  
If value is a mixed number, the fractional part is returned and  
displayed according to the current Simplification mode  
setting.  
fPart(value)  
Find the integer and fractional part of 23.45.  
³
1. Set Decimal Notation mode  
to Float.  
. # b  
- l  
2. Find the integer part.  
: 1 " 3  
2 3 . 4 5 E b  
3. Find the fractional part.  
1 " 4  
2 3 . 4 5 E b  
 
Chapter 2: Math Operations 47  
1
Find the fractional part of 1 /  
2.  
³
1 " 4 1 <  
1 = 2 " E b  
min( and max( 1 " 5 and 6  
These are identical to the min( and max( commands found on  
the - v MATH menu.  
min( (minimum) returns the smaller of two values or the  
smallest element in one list. value can be a real number,  
expression, or a list.  
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same number  
of elements. If one argument is a list and the other a non-list,  
the non-list is compared with each element of the list, and a  
list is returned.  
min(valueA,valueB)  
min(list)  
max( (maximum) functions exactly like min(, but it always  
returns the larger of two values or the largest element in a list.  
max(valueA,valueB)  
max(list)  
For this example, the Decimal mode settings are set to Float.  
Compare L1 and L2 to find the min( and max(. L1={1,2,3}, and  
³
L2={3,2,1}.  
1. Define L1 and L2 in the List  
editor.  
3
For more information on entering lists,  
see Chapter 5: Lists.  
 
48 Chapter 2: Math Operations  
2. Find the list minimums.  
-l:  
1"5  
- v 1 ¡  
- v 2 E b  
3. Find the list maximums.  
1"6  
- v 1 ¡  
- v 2 E b  
remainder( 1 " 7  
Returns the remainder resulting from the division of two  
positive whole numbers, dividend and divisor, each of which  
can be a list of positive whole numbers. They also are subject  
to mathematical rules. For example, divisorƒ0.  
remainder(dividend,divisor)  
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same number  
of elements. If one argument is a list and the other a non-list,  
the non-list is paired with each element of the list, and a list of  
remainders is returned.  
remainder(list,divisor)  
remainder(dividend,list)  
remainder(list,list)  
Calculate 10P6 and return  
the remainder only.  
1
³
divisor=6  
dividend=10  
remainder=4  
6
10  
8
4
: 1 " 7  
1 0 ¡ 6 E b  
 
Chapter 2: Math Operations 49  
The 1 PRB Menu  
The 1 PRB (probability) menu lets you select functions  
that are often used to calculate probabilities.  
1 " "  
1:rand  
Generates a random number between 0 and 1.  
2:randInt( Generates a random integer between two values.  
3:nPr  
4:nCr  
Calculates the number of permutations for a group  
of items.  
Calculates the number of combinations for a group  
of items.  
5:!  
Calculates the factorial of a positive integer.  
Simulates one or more coin tosses.  
Simulates one or more dice rolls.  
6:coin(  
7:dice(  
rand 1 " " 1  
Generates a random real number between 0 and 1  
(0<number<1). rand takes no arguments.  
rand  
If you want to control a sequence of random numbers, first  
store an integer “seed value” to rand. The calculator generates  
a specific sequence of random numbers from each seed value.  
To get a different sequence, use a different seed value. The  
default seed value is 0.  
seed Xrand  
 
50 Chapter 2: Math Operations  
Generate a sequence of random numbers using whatever value  
happens to be the current seed.  
³
: 1 " " 1  
b b b  
Your results  
may vary.  
Generate a sequence of random numbers using seed=1.  
³
: 1 X 1 "  
" 1 b 1 " " 1  
b b  
randInt( 1 " " 2  
Generates a random integer between lower and upper (both  
integers) boundaries.  
The random integer returned may be one of the boundaries.  
For example, randInt(1,5) may return 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5.  
To generate more than one random integer, specify  
#ofIntegers, a positive whole number >0.  
randInt(lower,upper[,#ofIntegers])  
Your result  
Find a random integer from 2 through 10.  
³
may vary.  
: 1 " " 2  
2 ¡ 1 0 E b  
Find 4 random integers from 2  
through 10. (Recall and edit the  
last entry.)  
³
Your result may  
vary.  
- £ ! ¡ 4 E  
b
 
Chapter 2: Math Operations 51  
nPr 1 " " 3  
Returns the number of permutations of n items taken  
r number at a time. The order in which you select the items  
DOES matter. items and number can be nonnegative integers  
or lists of nonnegative integers.  
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same number  
of elements. If one argument is a list and the other a non-list,  
the non-list is paired with each element in the list, and a list of  
permutations is returned.  
items nPr number  
From a group of 4 items (ABCD), how many ways can you  
select 2 of the items if the order does matter?  
³
Find 4 nPr 2.  
: 4 1 " " 3  
2 b  
AB and BA count  
as two  
AB  
BA  
CA  
DA  
AC  
BC  
CB  
DB  
AD  
BD  
CD  
DC  
permutations.  
permutations of  
4 items taken  
ABCD  
2 at a time  
nCr 1 " " 4  
Returns the number of combinations of n items taken  
r number at a time. In combinations, the order in which you  
select the items DOES NOT matter. items and number can be  
nonnegative integers or lists of nonnegative integers.  
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same number  
of elements. If one argument is a list and the other a non-list,  
the non-list is paired with each element in the list, and a list of  
combinations is returned.  
items nCr number  
 
52 Chapter 2: Math Operations  
From a group of 4 items (ABCD), how many ways can you  
select 2 of the items if the order does not matter?  
³
Find 4 nCr 2.  
: 4 1 " " 4  
2 b  
AB and BA count  
as only one  
AB  
BA  
CA  
DA  
AC  
BC  
CB  
DB  
AD  
BD  
CD  
DC  
combinations of  
combination.  
ABCD  
4 items taken  
2 at a time  
! 1 " " 5  
Returns the factorial of value. value can be an integer or list of  
integers between 0 and 69. By definition, 0! = 1.  
Factorials are similar to permutations because the order  
DOES matter. You can think of 4! as the total number of ways  
that 4 items can be arranged.  
value!  
4! = 4Q3Q2Q1  
Find 4!  
³
: 4 1 " " 5  
b
24 possible arrangements  
ABCD ABDC ACBD ACDB ADBC ADCB  
BACD BADC BCAD BCDA BDCA BDAC  
4!  
ABCD  
CABD CADB CBAD CBDA CDAB CDBA  
DABC DACB DBAC DBCA DCAB DCBA  
 
Chapter 2: Math Operations 53  
coin( 1 " " 6  
Returns a random list of 0s and 1s that represents heads and  
tails for one or more coin tosses. tosses is a positive whole  
number.  
coin(tosses)  
Simulate tossing a coin 7 times.  
³
: 1 " " 6  
7 E b  
4 heads and 3 tails  
(or 3 heads and 4 tails).  
Your result may vary.  
dice( 1 " " 7  
Returns a random list of numbers (between 1 and 6) that  
represents dice rolls. dice( takes one optional argument,  
#ofdice, a positive whole number>1. If #ofdice is specified,  
each list element is the total sum of one roll’s results.  
dice(rolls[,#ofDice])  
Simulate 5 dice rolls for one die.  
³
: 1 " " 7  
5 E b  
Your result may  
vary.  
Simulate 5 rolls of 3 dice.  
³
: - £  
! ¡ 3 E b  
The three dice totaled 11 on  
the first roll, 10 on the  
second roll, etc. Your result  
may vary.  
 
54 Chapter 2: Math Operations  
The 1 LOG Menu  
The 1 LOG (logarithm) menu lets you select functions that  
are used to calculate base-10 and base-e logarithms and  
powers.  
1 " " "  
NorN  
1 !  
1:log(  
2:10^(  
3:ln(  
Returns the base-10 logarithm of a value.  
Raises 10 to a power.  
Calculates the natural logarithm of a value.  
Raises e to a power (e = 2.71828182846).  
4:e^(  
log( 1 " " " 1  
The logarithm is the exponent, x, indicating the power which a  
fixed number (using base 10) must be raised to in order to  
produce a given number, a.  
x
For 10 =a, log10a=x  
log( returns the logarithm of a positive real number, an  
expression that results in a positive real number, or a list of  
positive real numbers.  
log(value)  
log(list)  
Calculate log(30).  
³
: 1 " " " 1  
3 0 E b  
 
Chapter 2: Math Operations 55  
10^( 1 " " " 2  
Raises 10 to a power of x, where x is an integer, an expression  
that results in an integer, or a list of integers. If x10M4 or 1010,  
the result is displayed in scientific notation.  
10^(integer)  
10^(x)  
Calculate 10^(6), which is often written as 106.  
³
³
: 1 " " " 2  
6 E b  
Calculate 10^(M4).  
1 " " " 2  
a 4 E b  
ln( 1 " " " 3  
The natural logarithm is the exponent, x, indicating the power  
which the base, e, must be raised to in order to produce a  
given number, a.  
x
For e =a, ln(a)=x  
The calculator uses e=2.718281828459, although it only  
displays 2.718281828 on the screen.  
ln( returns the natural logarithm of a positive real number, an  
expression that results in a positive real number, or a list of  
positive real numbers.  
ln(value)  
ln(list)  
 
56 Chapter 2: Math Operations  
1
Calculate ln( / ).  
³
2
: 1 " " " 3  
1 = 2 " E b  
e^( 1 " " " 4  
Raises e to a power of x, where x is a real number, an  
expression that results in an real number, or a list of real  
numbers.  
The calculator uses e=2.718281828459, although it only  
displays 2.718281828 on the screen.  
e^(x)  
e^(list)  
Calculate e^5, which is often written as e5.  
³
: 1 " " " 4  
5 E b  
 
Fractions  
3
Entering Fractions................................................................58  
Using Fractions in Calculations ...........................................59  
Fraction Modes....................................................................60  
Display Format Mode Settings .....................................60  
Simplification Mode Settings .......................................60  
Autosimp Setting ..........................................................61  
Mansimp Setting...........................................................62  
Converting Between Fractions and Decimals ....................64  
Converting Between Mixed Numbers  
and Simple Fractions ..............................................65  
 
58 Chapter 3: Fractions  
Entering Fractions  
Simple fractions consist of a numerator and denominator.  
Mixed numbers combine a whole number with a fraction.  
Note: The numerator and denominator cannot be a fraction.  
Simple Fractions  
numerator = denominator "  
2
=
3
2
³
Enter / .  
3
2
3
1. Enter the numerator, 2.  
2 =  
"
2. Enter the denominator, 3.  
3
Continue the calculation  
at the cursor.  
3. End the fraction.  
"
Mixed Numbers  
whole_number < numerator = denominator "  
1 <  
2
Enter 1 / .  
3
2
=
3
³
2
3
1
1. Enter the whole number, 1.  
1 <  
"
2. Enter the numerator, 2.  
2 =  
3. Enter the denominator, 3.  
3
Continue the calculation  
at the cursor.  
4. End the mixed number.  
"
 
Chapter 3: Fractions 59  
Using Fractions in Calculations  
The type of calculation and the input values determine  
whether the results of a calculation are shown as a fraction or  
a decimal. You can enter fractions with all operation keys (\,  
M, F, etc.), most function keys (6, C, ƒ, etc.), and many  
menu items (abs(, fPart(, sin(, etc.).  
Fractional calculations return fractional results, if possible,  
except for those that:  
Use - „, C, log(, ln(, e^(  
– or –  
Calculate to a result  
1000  
1
1
or <  
1000  
– or –  
Include both a fraction and a  
decimal  
– or –  
Use items from the following  
menus: - ‚;  
- v MATH and CALC;  
- u TRIG and ANGLE  
 
60 Chapter 3: Fractions  
Fraction Modes  
Two fraction modes exist on the calculator: Display Format  
mode and Simplification mode.  
Display Format Mode Settings  
The Display Format mode settings, A§bàc and bàc, determine  
whether or not a fractional result is displayed as a mixed  
number or a simple fraction. To select a mode setting, press  
., highlight the setting with the cursor keys, and then  
press b.  
.
A§b/c  
Displays result as a mixed number, if applicable.  
Displays result as a simple fraction.  
b/c  
In A§b/c  
4
8
Add / + / .  
³
5
5
mode  
4 = 5 " \ 8 = 5  
b
In b/c mode  
Simplification Mode Settings  
The Simplification mode settings, Autosimp and Mansimp,  
determine whether or not a fractional result is simplified  
automatically.  
.
 
Chapter 3: Fractions 61  
Autosimp  
Mansimp  
The calculator automatically simplifies  
fractional results.  
The user simplifies fractions manually step-by-  
step. $ next to the result signifies that it can be  
simplified at least one more time.  
In Autosimp  
1
Add / + /  
5
mode  
.
9
9
³
1 = 9 " \ 5 = 9  
b
In Mansimp  
mode  
6
9
$
The total shaded area in the first  
diagram is equal to the total  
shaded area in the second one.  
2
3
Autosimp Setting  
In this example, Display Format mode settings do not affect  
the display of the result because the result is a simple fraction.  
1
Add / + / .  
1
4
4
³
1. Select Autosimp mode, if  
necessary, and return to the  
Home screen.  
. # # # # b  
- l  
1
2. Add / + / .  
1
4
4
1 = 4 " \ 1 = 4 b  
 
62 Chapter 3: Fractions  
Mansimp Setting  
When the Mansimp setting is selected, the result of a  
calculation is not simplified automatically. $ next to a result  
means that it is unsimplified and can be simplified at least one  
more time. You then can decide if you want the calculator to  
simplify the result step-by-step using simplification factors it  
chooses or if you want the calculator to simplify the result  
using the simplification factors that you choose.  
Letting the Calculator Choose the Simplification Factor  
After getting an unsimplified result (one with $ next to it) from  
any fractional calculation, press B b. The simplified  
result and simplification factor which the calculator chose are  
displayed. For example, Fac=3 means simplification factor=3.  
The Display Format mode settings affect whether a result is  
displayed as a mixed number or a simple fraction.  
1. Select Mansimp mode setting,  
³
if necessary, and return to  
the Home screen.  
. # # # # "  
b - l  
3
2. Add 1 / + 2 /  
4
In A§b/c  
.
8
4
mode  
: 1 < 3 = 4 " \  
2 < 4 = 8 b  
In b/c  
mode  
3. Let the calculator simplify  
the result.  
In A§b/c  
mode  
B b  
In b/c  
mode  
 
Chapter 3: Fractions 63  
Choosing the Simplification Factor  
After getting an unsimplified result from any fractional  
calculation, press B simplification_factor b, where  
simplification_factor is a positive integer that you choose.  
The Display Format mode settings affect whether a result is  
displayed as a mixed number or as a simple fraction.  
4
8
Add / + / and choose the simplification factor to reduce  
16 16  
the sum to lowest terms.  
³
4
8
1. Enter / + /  
16 16  
.
- l :  
4 = 1 6 " \ 8 =  
1 6 b  
2. Simplify by 2.  
B 2 b  
3. Simplify by 3.  
B 3 b  
The result did not  
change. Try again  
with another factor.  
4. Simplify by 2.  
B 2 b  
Simplification is  
complete.  
Recalling the Factor - } 6:Factor  
If you execute a fractional calculation in Mansimp mode and  
then the user or the calculator simplifies the result, you can  
recall the simplification factor at a later time by selecting  
- } 6:Factor.  
Since Factor is a variable, you can use Factor in expressions or  
on any screen that accepts whole numbers (Y= editor, List  
editor, Home screen, etc.).  
 
64 Chapter 3: Fractions  
Only one simplification factor (the last one calculated) is  
stored in memory. Also, you can store a positive whole  
number to Factor using the X key, just as you would store a  
number to any variable. For more information about storing  
values to variables, see Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73.  
6
From the Home screen, simplify / by a factor of 2, and then  
8
recall the factor.  
³
1. Select Mansimp mode, if  
necessary.  
. # # # # "  
b - l  
2. Enter the fraction and  
simplify.  
: 6 = 8 B 2  
b
3. Recall the simplification  
factor, 2.  
- } 6 b  
Converting Between Fractions and  
Decimals  
To convert a fraction to a decimal or a decimal to a fraction,  
use >. If a fractional equivalent of a decimal does not exist,  
the calculator returns the same decimal number. Also, the  
calculator only recognizes and converts (if possible) the first  
ten digits of any decimal number.  
You must follow > with b; otherwise, you get an error.  
The current Decimal Notation mode determines the display of  
the result. In the following example, the calculator is set to  
Float Decimal Notation mode.  
 
Chapter 3: Fractions 65  
3
Convert / to a decimal and back to a fraction.  
4
³
3
1. Convert / to a decimal.  
4
- l :  
3 = 4 > b  
2. Convert .75 back to a  
fraction.  
In Autosimp  
mode  
> b  
In Mansimp  
mode  
1
Add 2 plus the decimal equivalent of / .  
4
³
1
/ =.25  
4
2 \ 1 = 4 > b  
Converting Between Mixed Numbers  
and Simple Fractions  
To convert a mixed number to a simple fraction or a simple  
fraction to a mixed number use ?. The Display Format  
mode settings do not affect the results when using ?.  
You must follow ? with b; otherwise, you get an  
error.  
1
Convert 3 / to a simple fraction and back to a mixed number.  
3
³
1
1. Convert 3 / to a simple  
3
fraction.  
- l :  
3 < 1 = 3 ?  
b
10  
2. Convert / back to a  
3
mixed number.  
? b  
 
66 Chapter 3: Fractions  
Measurement  
Conversions and  
Constant  
4
Calculations  
The - ‚ CONVERSIONS Menu...............................68  
Length - ‚ 1 .................................................68  
Area - ‚ 2 .....................................................68  
Volume - ‚ 3 ................................................69  
Time - ‚ 4.....................................................69  
Temp (Temperature) - ‚ 5...........................69  
MassàWeight - ‚ 6.......................................69  
Speed - ‚ 7...................................................69  
Converting a Unit of Measure......................................70  
Constants .............................................................................71  
Single Mode ..................................................................72  
Multiple Mode ..............................................................75  
 
68 Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants  
The - ‚ CONVERSIONS Menu  
Use this menu to access all conversion categories.  
- ‚  
1:Length  
2:Area  
Displays the LENGTH menu.  
Displays the AREA menu.  
3:Volume  
4:Time  
Displays the VOLUME menu.  
Displays the TIME menu.  
5:Temp  
Displays the TEMPERATURE menu.  
Displays the MASS/WT. menu.  
Displays the SPEED menu.  
6:MassàWeight  
7:Speed  
Length - ‚ 1  
mm........... millimeters  
cm ............ centimeters  
m.............. meters  
ft .................... feet  
yard................ yards  
km.................. kilometers  
mile................ miles  
inch .......... inches  
Area - ‚ 2  
ft2 ............. square feet  
m2 ............ square meters  
mi2............ square miles  
in2 .................. square inches  
cm2................. square centimeters  
yd2 ................. square yards  
km2 .......... square kilometers ha................... hectares  
acre .......... acres  
 
Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants 69  
Volume - ‚ 3  
liter ........... liters  
in3...................cubic inches  
ft3 ...................cubic feet  
m3...................cubic meters  
galUK .............UK gallons  
ozUK ..............UK ounces  
gal ............ gallons  
qt.............. quarts  
pt.............. pints  
oz ............. ounces  
cm3 ........... cubic centimeters  
Time - ‚ 4  
sec............ seconds  
min ........... minutes  
hr.............. hours  
day .................days  
week...............weeks  
year ................years  
Temp (Temperature) - ‚ 5  
degC......... degrees Celsius  
degF ......... degrees Fahrenheit  
degK......... degrees Kelvin  
MassàWeight - ‚ 6  
g............... grams  
kg ............. kilograms  
lb .............. pounds  
ton (US) ..........tons  
mton (US) .......metric tons  
Speed - ‚ 7  
ftàs ........... feet per second  
kmàhr......... kilometers per hour  
màs .......... meters per second knot............ knots  
miàhr ........ miles per hour  
 
70 Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants  
Converting a Unit of Measure  
To convert a measurement value, enter the measurement  
value, select the category from the CONVERSIONS menu, select  
the unit you are converting from, and then the unit you are  
converting to. To know which category to select, look at the  
units of the original value. You can only convert within one  
category.  
measurement_value current_unit 4 new_unit  
Convert 50 meters to inches.  
³
1. Clear the Home screen, if  
desired. Enter the value, 50.  
- l : 5 0  
2. Display the CONVERSIONS  
menu.  
- ‚  
3. Select the applicable  
category, 1:LENGTH.  
1
4. Select the current unit,  
meters.  
The current unit  
is displayed.  
3
5. Select the unit which you  
want to convert to, inches.  
m8 inch is pasted  
to the Home screen.  
4
6. Calculate the result.  
b
 
Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants 71  
EOS operating rules (Appendix B: Reference Information)  
apply when converting negative measurements as shown in  
the next example.  
Compare the results of M5¡F4¡ C and (M5)¡F4¡ C.  
³
1. From the Home screen,  
calculate M5¡F4¡ C.  
- l :  
a 5 - ‚ 5  
2 1 b  
The calculator converts 5¡F to ¡C  
and then returns the negative of the  
result.  
2. Calculate (M5)¡F4¡ C..  
- £ - !  
- m D " "  
- m E b  
The calculator converts (M5)¡F to ¡C.  
Constants  
To save time re-entering long or complicated expressions and  
to help prevent entry errors, you can enter numbers,  
expressions, lists, commands, or functions into the  
calculator’s memory by defining them as constants in the Set  
Constant editor. As constants, they then can be recalled at any  
time.  
You can define up to four constants in the Set Constant editor  
and choose from one of two different modes: Single or Multiple.  
The mode you select determines how many of the constants  
you can recall at a time. To enter a constant in the editor,  
select the mode from the Set Constant editor (- †), move  
the cursor to one of the four constants, and define it.  
- †  
 
72 Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants  
To use a constant:  
1. Define the constant in the Set Constant editor (- †).  
2. Recall the constant with the @ key.  
Single Mode  
By selecting Single mode, you tell the calculator that you only  
want to access one constant from the list, even if more than  
one is defined.  
To select the one constant (C1, C2, C3, or C4) you want to use,  
highlight the = next to it, and then press b. This  
automatically deselects any other defined constants.  
Defining Constants in Single Mode  
Enter the constants in the Set Constant editor as shown in the  
following example. At any time you can enter this editor and  
edit, delete, or add constants.  
1
Define C1 = + / and C3 = ¦ / .  
1
2
2
³
1. Enter the Set Constant  
editor.  
- †  
2. Highlight Single with the  
cursor, if necessary.  
$ b  
1
3. Define C1 as + / .  
2
# \ 1 = 2  
 
Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants 73  
1
4. Define C3 as ¦ / .  
2
# #  
M 1 = 2  
The most recently entered  
5. Exit the Set Constant editor.  
constant (C3) remains  
selected.  
- l  
Single Mode Constant Calculations  
After a constant is defined and selected, return to the screen  
where you want to use it in a calculation. Pressing @  
pastes it to the cursor location. In Single mode, only one  
defined constant is available for use in calculations, and an  
expression using a constant is automatically solved after  
pressing @ (without pressing b).  
1
You recognize that C1=+ / .  
2
1
³
Calculate 40+ / .  
2
1. Select Single mode, if  
necessary.  
- † $ b  
2. Select C1 (which deselects  
C3), and exit the Set  
Constant editor.  
# ! b - l  
3. Clear the Home screen, if  
desired. Solve the problem  
using C1.  
Count=1.  
: 4 0 @  
Recalling a Constant in a Series of Calculations  
When pressing @ more than once in a series of  
calculations, the calculator automatically keeps count for you  
(shown in the following example) unless the defined constant  
includes a list. The counter starts over any time a new entry  
precedes @, including Ans.  
 
74 Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants  
Find the multiple of 2 so that 5 ¦ 2n=40.  
³
The calculator’s constant counter  
automatically computes n.  
Constant mode = Single  
Set Cn = ¦ 2  
n
5¦2 =40  
1. Select Single mode, if  
necessary.  
- † $ b  
2. Enter C2 = ¦ 2.  
# # M 2  
Other defined constants are  
deselected automatically.  
3. Return to the Home screen  
and clear, if desired.  
- l :  
5 Q 2 is calculated automatically.  
4. Count the number of times  
you have to multiply 5 by 2  
to get 40 (so that 5 Q 2n=40).  
Count=1  
5 @  
@
Pressing @ a second time  
acts like - ¢ @.  
@
n=3 because you  
multiplied by 2 three  
times in a row.  
5¦2¦2¦2=40, or  
3
Solution  
5¦2 =40  
n=3  
Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants 75  
Multiple Mode  
In Multiple mode, all defined constants are available to use at  
any time. To define Multiple mode, highlight Multiple using the  
cursor keys, and then press b.  
Defining Constants in Multiple Mode  
You define constants in Multiple mode exactly the same way  
you define them in Single mode. All constants are always  
selected, even if they are not defined.  
Select Multiple mode and use the constants defined in the  
previous examples.  
³
1. Enter the Set Constant  
editor.  
- †  
2. Select Multiple mode.  
$ " b  
All constants are  
now selected.  
Recalling Constants in Multiple Mode  
When you press @ from the Home screen and the Set  
Constant editor is in Multiple mode, the first six characters of  
every defined constant is displayed. Undefined constants are  
marked as Empty.  
@
 
76 Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants  
To select a constant, press the number associated with the  
constant (1, 2, 3, or 4). You may choose another constant (or  
the same one) by pressing @ again. In Multiple mode  
(unlike in Single mode), your constant expression is not  
evaluated until you press b.  
Define C3=+3¦2 and C4=¦2+3 in Multiple mode.  
³
- † $ " b  
# # # :  
\ 3 M 2 # :  
M 2 \ 3  
You recognize that C3=+3¦2.  
Calculate 4+3¦2.  
³
1. Go to the Home screen and  
clear it, if desired.  
- l :  
2. Find the result.  
4 @ 3 b  
Press b to evaluate  
the expression.  
You recognize that C4=¦2+3.  
Calculate 4¦2+3.  
³
4 @ 4 b  
Lists  
5
Steps for Creating a List ......................................................78  
The List Editor 3 ............................................................79  
Naming a List.......................................................................79  
Entering List Elements.........................................................81  
Editing Lists in the List Editor .............................................87  
Inserting or Deleting a New List ..................................87  
Deleting Lists from Calculator Memory.......................88  
Inserting or Deleting One Element in a List................89  
Editing an Existing Element .........................................89  
Clearing All Elements in a List......................................90  
Clearing All Elements in All Lists..................................90  
Editing a List Formula...................................................90  
The - v Ls Menu .........................................................91  
The - v OPS Menu......................................................92  
SortA( and SortD( - v " 1 and 2 ......................93  
ClrList - v " 3 ....................................................95  
dim( - v " 4.......................................................95  
@List( - v " 5 .....................................................97  
Select( - v " 6 ...................................................98  
seq( - v " 7........................................................99  
augment( - v " 8............................................100  
¨ (List Signifier) - v " 9.................................101  
List Commands from the Home Screen............................102  
Creating a List .............................................................102  
Copying One List to Another .....................................103  
Displaying One List Element.......................................103  
Inserting or Changing a List Element ........................104  
Using Math Functions with Lists ................................105  
 
78 Chapter 5: Lists  
Steps for Creating a List  
On the TIN73, a set of numerical or text information is called a  
list. Follow these basic steps when defining a list.  
3
Display the List editor.  
- t  
(to name a list)  
Name the list you want to define, or  
use a prenamed list (L1-L6).  
Prenamed lists, ¨5 and  
¨6, and one user-named  
list, ¨PET.  
number keys  
or  
- t  
Enter list elements  
(numerical or text).  
Note: Surround text elements  
with quotation marks.  
- m,  
:,  
or /  
Edit list as necessary.  
 
Chapter 5: Lists 79  
The List Editor 3  
You can enter up to 20 lists in the List editor. Each list can  
have up to 999 elements. You can only display three lists at the  
same time; use " or ! to scroll to see all other defined lists.  
List notation looks like this: L5={1,2,3,4,5,6}. Read it as “elements  
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are stored in the list named L5.”  
Entries in each column display the  
List name across top  
first 6 characters of the element.  
List counter  
(cursor is in  
3
the 1st list).  
Entry line  
L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6, and one empty, unnamed list initially are  
included in the List editor.  
Numeric Notation, Decimal Notation, and Angle modes affect  
the display of an element (except fractional elements).  
Fractions are unaffected by  
Numeric Notation mode.  
Calculator is in  
Sci Numeric  
3
Notation mode.  
Highlighted element  
is displayed on entry  
Naming a List  
line in its entirety.  
When you are ready to define your list, you can move to one of  
the columns labeled L1- L6 and begin entering your list  
elements.  
 
80 Chapter 5: Lists  
If you do not want to use L1-L6 (you cannot rename them), you  
can create a new list and name it anything you want. A list  
name can be one to five characters long. The first character  
must be a letter from A to Z. The second through fifth  
characters can be any combination of letters and numbers.  
Access letters from the Text editor (- t). A list accepts  
elements only after it is named.  
Note: You cannot rename a user-named list, but you can copy  
its elements to a list with a different name. See the section  
entitled, “Copying One List to Another” on page 103.  
In this guidebook, when a list name is referred to, its name is  
always preceded by the ¨ symbol; however, you don’t type the  
¨ when naming a list in the List editor.  
If a defined list name is highlighted, the list elements or the  
attached formula are displayed on the entry line.  
Create a list named NUM.  
³
1. Display the List editor.  
Or, insert a blank list. Highlight  
a list name and press - m.  
3
2. Scroll to the blank,  
unnamed list to the far right  
of the List editor.  
" or !  
3. Use the Text editor to name  
the list NUM.  
- t  
N b U b  
M b Done b  
NUM appears on  
the entry line.  
4. Move NUM” from the entry  
line to the list name line.  
¨NUM now  
accepts  
b
elements.  
 
Chapter 5: Lists 81  
Entering List Elements  
A named list accepts two types of elements: numerical and  
text.  
Lists that contain numerical elements not enclosed in  
quotation marks are called numerical lists.  
Lists that contain text elements or numerical elements  
whose numerical values are ignored (because they are  
enclosed in quotation marks) are called categorical lists.  
To enter an element, highlight the space in the column under  
the list name where you want the element to be entered (you  
can’t skip any spaces) and type in the element (it is displayed  
on the entry line). Press b or # to move the element into  
the list. Pressing # or b also moves the cursor to the next  
element space.  
Access the quotation marks (for categorical lists) from the  
Text editor (- t).  
Numerical Lists  
Numerical lists contain real numbers, fractions, or expressions  
that evaluate to real numbers or fractions. If you enter an  
expression like sin(30), the calculator displays the decimal  
equivalent in the list element space. The Numeric Notation,  
Decimal Notation, and Angle modes determine how the  
calculator displays all elements, except fractions.  
Define ¨NUM={18,25,45}.  
³
1. Go to the first element  
space of the numerical list  
¨NUM.  
3
" (as necessary)  
# (if necessary)  
 
82 Chapter 5: Lists  
2. Enter the list elements.  
1 8 # 2 5 # 4 5 #  
Entering Fractional Elements  
When entering fractions from the Home screen, parentheses  
are optional around the numerator and denominator.  
When entering fractions in the List editor (and any other  
editor), parentheses are mandatory around the numerator and  
denominator ONLY when operators are included:  
3 1 \ 2 = 3 \ 4  
b
Interpreted as  
1+(2/3)+4  
D 1 \ 2 E =  
D 3 \ 4 E b  
Using parentheses  
 
Chapter 5: Lists 83  
Dependent Numerical Lists  
The numerical list described in the previous section (¨NUM) is  
an independent list. You also can create dependent lists,  
which are dependent (or based) upon the contents of another  
defined numerical list.  
You create a dependent list by attaching a formula to it. For  
example, "2 + L1," where L1 is already defined, is a formula. The  
formula always contains at least one other list. In addition, for  
a formula like L3="2+L1+ L2," L1 and L2 must have the same  
number of elements. Then, each element in L3 is the result of  
the attached formula.  
When a formula is attached to a list, a small signifier (2)  
appears next to the list name. You cannot edit a dependent list  
by simply typing over an element as with independent lists.  
You must highlight the element you want to change, press  
b, and then edit it. However, this changes the entire list  
back to an independent list, and the formula and the formula  
signifier disappear.  
Also, it is possible to have multiple dependent lists all based  
on the same list (for example, L2="2+ L1," L3="3+L1," and  
L4="4+L1").  
An attached formula can be enclosed in quotation marks  
(located in the Text editor). A list whose formula:  
Is not enclosed in quotation marks is not automatically  
updated if the independent list changes.  
Is enclosed in quotation marks is automatically updated if  
the independent list changes.  
Convert the following six Celsius temperatures  
{M40,M15,M5,30,58,140} to Fahrenheit and display both lists in the  
List editor.  
³
¨CEL={M40,M15,M5,30,58,140}  
¨FRHT="¨CEL degC8degF"  
Independent List  
Dependent List  
 
84 Chapter 5: Lists  
1. Create the independent list,  
¨CEL.  
3
" or " (as necessary  
to move to the blank  
list)  
- t C b E  
b L b Done  
b b  
2. Enter the elements.  
# a 4 0 # a 1 5 # a 5  
# 3 0 # 5 8 # 1 4 0 #  
3. Create the dependent list,  
¨FRHT.  
" - t  
F b R bH b  
T bDone b  
b
4. Attach the formula "¨CEL  
degC8degF" to ¨FRHT.  
b - t  
" b D o n e b  
- vCEL b  
- ‚ 5  
1
2
- t " b  
A small formula  
Done b  
signifier appears.  
5. Display the elements of  
¨FRHT.  
b
Chapter 5: Lists 85  
6. Change M5 in ¨CEL to M8.  
! # # b a 8  
b
Note: Since the formula is enclosed  
in quotation marks, element 3 in  
¨FRHT is automatically updated.  
Categorical Lists  
Categorical lists usually contain words or letters (text  
elements). If they contain numerical elements, the numerical  
values of those elements are ignored. Categorical lists are  
usually used in statistical plotting, but they can allow you to  
label elements as explained in the following example. See  
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots for details about using categorical  
lists in stat plots.  
To define a categorical list, enclose the first element in  
quotation marks (found in the Text editor). Quotation marks  
are optional on the remaining text elements. A categorical list  
signifier, c, appears next to the list name.  
A math class has 4 test scores: 2 tests, 1 midterm test, and 1  
final exam. Ivan earned test scores of 85, 80, 74, and 82. Karen  
earned test scores of 90, 85, 92, and 79. Reflect this  
information in the List editor.  
³
1 Categorical  
2 Numerical  
¨TEST={TEST1,TEST2,MDTRM,FINAL}  
¨IVAN={85,80,74,82}  
¨KAREN={90,85,92,79}  
 
86 Chapter 5: Lists  
1. Display the List editor and  
create a list named TEST.  
3 " or ! (as  
necessary to move to  
the blank list)  
- t  
T b E b  
S b T b  
Done b b  
2. Enter the element TEST1.  
# - t " b  
T b E b  
S b T b 1  
" b Done  
The categorical  
list signifier, c.  
b b  
3. Repeat for the elements  
TEST2, MDTRM, and FINAL  
(quotation marks are  
optional after the first  
element).  
4. Create a list named IVAN.  
" - t  
I b V b  
A b N b  
Done b b  
5. Enter 85, 80, 74, and 82.  
# 8 5 # 8 0 # 7 4 #  
8 2 #  
Chapter 5: Lists 87  
6. Create a list named KAREN.  
" - t  
K b A b  
R b E b  
N b Done b  
b
7. Enter 90, 85, 92, and 79.  
# 9 0 # 8 5 # 9 2 #  
7 9 #  
Once you have these lists entered, you can display this data in  
various ways using related features on the calculator. For  
example, Chapter 6: Statistical Plots explains how you could  
easily convert this data into a bar chart. Chapter 7: Statistical  
Analyses explains ways to find each student’s averages as well  
as doing other statistical analyses of their test scores.  
Editing Lists in the List Editor  
From the List editor, you can display, edit, insert, temporarily  
delete (not from memory), and move from view all lists stored  
in the calculator. You also can edit, insert, move, or delete list  
elements and attached formulas.  
To see all list names that are stored into the calculator’s  
memory (but not necessarily the List editor), display the  
- v Ls menu and use $ and # to scroll the menu.  
Inserting or Deleting a New List  
Inserting a list into the List editor saves it in the calculator’s  
memory. However, deleting a list from the List editor does not  
delete it from the calculator’s memory. A deleted list’s name  
still appears in the - v Ls menu.  
Therefore, if you would like to insert the deleted list back into  
the List editor, go to a blank list, select the list name from  
- v Ls menu and press b b.  
 
88 Chapter 5: Lists  
Insert L1 between L4 and L5.  
³
1. Move the cursor so that it  
highlights L5.  
3 $  
" or ! (as necessary)  
2. Insert a blank list.  
- m  
3. Identify it as L1.  
If elements exist  
in L1, then those  
appear also.  
- v 1 b  
³
Delete L1.  
/
Deleting Lists from Calculator Memory  
To delete a list from the calculator’s memory, use the  
- Ÿ 4:Delete menu. If you delete L1L6 from the  
calculator’s memory, the names still appear in the - v Ls  
menu. If you delete a user-named list, its name is deleted from  
this menu.  
 
Chapter 5: Lists 89  
Delete L2 from the calculator’s  
memory.  
³
- Ÿ 4 3 # b  
- l (to return to  
the Home screen)  
Inserting or Deleting One Element in a List  
To insert one element in a list:  
1. Use the cursor keys as necessary to highlight the element  
space where you want to insert the element.  
2. Press - m to insert the element space. All following  
elements move down one space.  
3. Type the element, and press b.  
To delete one element from a list:  
1. Use the cursor keys as necessary to highlight the element  
that you want to delete.  
2. Press / to delete the element. All following elements  
move up one space.  
Editing an Existing Element  
You can edit any particular element in a list without having to  
reenter the entire list.  
1. Use the cursor keys as necessary to highlight the element  
that you want to edit.  
2. Press b to move the element to the entry line.  
3. Edit the element with - m, :, or /, as  
necessary.  
4. Press b to replace the existing element with the  
edited element.  
 
90 Chapter 5: Lists  
Clearing All Elements in a List  
To clear all of the elements in a list when the List editor is  
displayed:  
1. Use the cursor keys as necessary to highlight the list  
name. The list elements (or formula) are displayed on the  
entry line.  
2. Press : b to clear the list elements.  
You also can clear elements from the Home screen using the  
- v OPS 3:ClrList menu item.  
Clearing All Elements in All Lists  
You clear all elements in all lists using the - Ÿ 6:ClrAllLists  
instruction from the Home screen. When you press b, all  
elements in all lists are cleared from the calculator’s memory,  
even for those lists not displayed in the List editor.  
- l  
- Ÿ 6 b  
Editing a List Formula  
To edit an attached formula:  
1. Use the cursor keys as necessary to highlight the name of  
the list name that you want to edit.  
2. Press b to move the formula to the entry line.  
3. Edit the formula with - m, :, or /, as  
necessary.  
4. Press b to replace the existing formula with the  
edited formula. The list elements are updated  
automatically according to the new formula.  
 
Chapter 5: Lists 91  
Deleting a List Formula  
You can delete an attached formula in one of two ways. You  
can:  
Follow the preceding directions for editing a formula, but  
press : b in place of step 3.  
Edit one of the elements in the dependent list as directed  
in the steps for editing an element. When you are  
finished, the formula signifier disappears, and the list  
becomes independent.  
The - v Ls Menu  
Use the - v Ls (lists) menu to access all list names  
stored in the calculator’s memory. L1-L6 are listed first  
followed by all user-named lists in alphabetical order. In this  
menu, the user-named lists appear as they do in the List editor  
(the List signifier, ¨, does not precede the name). However, if  
you select a list to display it anywhere else on the calculator,  
such as the on Home screen, the ¨ automatically appears  
before the name.  
- v  
User-named lists follow  
¨1-¨6 in alphabetical order.  
From the Home screen, you can type in a new list name  
directly using the Text editor (except for L1- L6); however, you  
must precede the list name with the list signifier, ¨. Notice that  
the list signifier, ¨, is smaller than the L in the Text editor. You  
can access ¨ by itself from - | or under the  
- v OPS menu.  
If you try to use the L from the Text editor, the calculator  
reads that L plus any following characters as variables  
(representing numerical values), not as a list.  
 
92 Chapter 5: Lists  
The - v OPS Menu  
Use the - v OPS (options) menu to change defined lists  
from the Home screen.  
- v "  
1:SortA(  
Sorts list elements from lowest to highest  
in numerical order or in alphabetical order.  
(Ascending)  
2:SortD(  
Sorts list elements from highest to lowest  
(Descending) in numerical order or in reverse  
alphabetical order.  
3:ClrList  
4:dim(  
Clears all elements in specified list(s).  
Recalls, sets, or changes the dimension  
(number of elements) in a list.  
5:@List(  
Returns the differences between  
consecutive elements in a list.  
6:Select(  
Selects one or more specific data points  
from a Scatter or xyLine stat plot, and then  
updates the list(s) in memory. (Requires  
you to set up a statistical plot. See Chapter  
6: Statistical Plots for more information.)  
7:seq(  
Returns a list that fulfills the requirements  
of 5 arguments (expression, variable,  
begin, end, and increment) which you  
specify.  
8:augment(  
Combines two lists to make a new list.  
9:¨  
List signifier; all text characters or numbers  
following it are interpreted as a list name.  
 
Chapter 5: Lists 93  
SortA( and SortD( - v " 1 and 2  
SortA( (sort ascending) sorts numerical list elements from  
lowest to highest value and categorical list elements  
alphabetically. SortD( (sort descending) sorts the list elements  
from highest to lowest value or in reverse alphabetical order.  
Enter the SortA( or SortD( instruction on the Home screen; and  
then enter all list names that you want to sort (separated by a  
comma), and press b.  
Sorting One List  
SortA(list)  
SortD(list)  
Define L2={4,7,3,9} in the List editor, and sort in ascending  
order.  
³
1. Define L2 in the List editor.  
3
2. From the Home screen, sort  
L2 in ascending order.  
- l :  
- v " 1  
- v 2 E b  
3. If desired, display L2 on the  
Home screen or in the List  
editor to see the new order.  
On the Home screen  
- v 2 b  
– or –  
3
" (as necessary)  
In the List editor  
 
94 Chapter 5: Lists  
Sorting Multiple Lists  
You can specify more than one list when using SortA( and  
SortD(. In this case, the first list specified is the independent  
one; any following lists are dependent.  
The calculator sorts the independent list first, and then sorts  
all the dependent lists by placing their elements in the same  
order as their corresponding elements in the independent list.  
This allows you to keep sets of related data in the same order  
when you sort lists.  
SortA(indpntlist,dependlist1,dependlist2)  
SortD(indpntlist,dependlist1,dependlist2)  
Define L2={3,4,7,9} (independent), L3={1,2,3,4} (dependent), and  
³
L4={14,13,12,11} (dependent), and sort all three in descending  
order.  
1. Define L2, L3, and L4 in the  
List editor.  
3
2. From the Home screen,  
sort the lists in descending  
order.  
- l :  
- v " 2  
- v 2 ¡  
¨2{9} still corresponds  
- v 3 ¡  
- v 4 E b  
to L3{4} and L4{11}  
and so on.  
3. If desired, display the  
elements in the List editor  
to see the new order.  
3
" (as necessary)  
 
Chapter 5: Lists 95  
ClrList - v " 3  
Clears all items in specified list(s) from the Home screen.  
ClrList list1[,list2,list3,...]  
From the Home screen, clear L1  
³
and L2.  
- l :  
- v " 3  
- v 1 ¡ - v 2  
b
dim( - v " 4  
Use dim( from the Home screen to return the dimension  
(number of elements) of a defined list, to create a new list  
with a specified number of elements, or to change the  
dimension of a defined list.  
When creating a new list with a specified dimension, you  
can assign a length from 1 to 999. The elements are set to  
zeros.  
When changing the dimension of a defined list, all existing  
elements in the defined list within the new dimension are not  
changed.  
If you are increasing the number of elements, extra list  
elements are filled by 0.  
If you are decreasing the number of elements, all existing  
elements in the defined list outside the new dimension  
are deleted.  
To return the dimension of a list:  
dim(list)  
 
96 Chapter 5: Lists  
To create a new list with a specific dimension:  
dimension#Xdim(newList)  
To change the dimension of an existing list:  
newDimension#Xdim(list)  
Define L5={1,2,3,4} in the List  
³
editor.  
3
From the Home screen, return  
the dimension of L5.  
³
- l :  
- v " 4  
- v 5 E b  
There are 4  
elements in L5.  
Create a new list, ¨NEW, with 4  
elements.  
³
1. Define the list on the Home  
screen.  
4 X - v " 4  
- v " 9  
- t  
N b E b  
W b Done b E  
b
2. Display the elements in  
¨NEW on the Home screen, if  
desired.  
- v NEW b  
b
Chapter 5: Lists 97  
³
1. Change the dimension of  
¨NEW to 3 elements.  
3 X - v " 4  
- v NEW b  
E b  
2. Display the elements in  
¨NEW, if desired.  
- v N E W b  
b
@List( - v " 5  
@List( (delta list) returns a list containing the differences  
between consecutive elements in a list. It subtracts the first  
element in the list from the second element, subtracts the  
second element from the third, and so on. The resulting list is  
always one element shorter than the original list.  
@List(list)  
Define L6={9,7,4,3} and calculate  
³
its @List.  
1. Enter the elements in the  
List editor.  
3
7-9=M2  
4-7=M3  
2. From the Home screen,  
calculate @List for L6.  
3-4=M1  
- l :  
- v " 5  
- v 6 E b  
 
98 Chapter 5: Lists  
Select( - v " 6  
This instruction is used to select a certain portion of an  
existing Scatter or xyLine stat plot, both of which contain an  
XList and a YList. Before you can use Select(, you must define  
and select (turn on) the statistical plot you want to use;  
otherwise, you get an error message. For a detailed  
explanation on setting up Scatter and xyLine plots, see  
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots.  
From the Home screen, enter Select( followed by two list  
names, XList and YList. These list names are where you want  
to store the selected data points. All X-values are stored in the  
first list and all Y-values are stored in the second list.  
XList and YList can be the same two lists as the ones which  
set up the stat plot, or you can enter new list names. If you  
choose to enter new list names, entering the list signifier (¨)  
(found under the - v OPS menu) is optional. Enter the  
new list names using the Text editor (- t).  
Select(XList,YList)  
The calculator displays the stat plot and prompts you to select  
the left and the right bounds. The calculator then plots the  
selected points on the Graph screen for you to see. If desired,  
you can enter the List editor to see the lists with the selected  
data points.  
The following example shows the steps you would follow  
when selecting a statistical plot. The data is acquired from a  
sample statistical xyLine plot. ¨TIME contains 94 X-values; ¨DIST  
contains 94 Y-values.  
The example selects the first portion of the graph before  
Distance=0 and stores the selected X-values in ¨NEWT and the  
selected Y-values in ¨NEWD.  
1. Display the graph or stat  
plot and determine the data  
points you want to select.  
*
 
Chapter 5: Lists 99  
2. The Select( command and  
two new list names are  
entered from the Home  
screen.  
- v " 9 accesses the list  
signifier. - t accesses the  
Text editor.  
3. The left bound is chosen.  
Left bound  
b
4. The right bound is chosen.  
Right bound  
" (as necessary)  
b
5. The plot is regraphed to  
include only the selected  
data points.  
¨NEWT and ¨NEWD now exist in the calculator’s memory. To  
display newly selected lists in the List editor, insert them as  
you would insert any other list.  
seq( - v " 7  
seq( returns a list in which each element is the result of the  
evaluation of expression with regard to the variable. You also  
must specify a value range from begin to end. You can specify  
one optional argument, increment, which specifies the  
interval between each variable value used to solve expression.  
variable need not be defined in memory. increment can be  
negative. The default value for increment is 1. seq( is not valid  
within expressions.  
seq(expression,variable,begin,end[,increment])  
 
100 Chapter 5: Lists  
Solve expression, A2, with regard to variable, A. Use variable  
values ranging from 1 (begin) to 11 (end), and specify  
increment as 3.  
³
1. Return to the Home screen,  
and clear it, if desired.  
- l :  
2. Enter the seq( expression.  
- v " 7  
- t A b 6 ¡  
A b Done b ¡  
1 ¡ 1 1 ¡ 3 E b  
{12,42,72,102}  
augment( - v " 8  
augment( combines the elements of two lists from the Home  
screen to create a new list. An augmented list is not saved in  
the calculator’s memory unless you name it or store it to an  
existing list name. This is shown in the following example.  
augment(list1,list2)  
Define L4={1,2,3} and L5={3,4,5,6} in the List editor, augment L4  
³
with L5 and store the augmented list to L6.  
1. Define L4 and L5.  
3
2. Return to the Home screen,  
and augment L4 and L5.  
- l :  
- v " 8  
- v 4 ¡  
- v 5 E b  
 
Chapter 5: Lists 101  
3. Store the augmented list to  
L6.  
- ¢ X - v  
6 b  
Press 3 to view L6  
in the List editor.  
¨ (List Signifier) - v " 9  
The list signifier, ¨, which is not the same as the L from the  
Text editor, is especially useful in programming when you  
want to specify a group of numbers or text characters as a list  
name.  
¨listname  
The list signifier does not appear in front of a list name in the  
List editor or in the - v Ls menu because it is obvious  
which groups of text characters or numbers are list names.  
Also, the list signifier is optional when entering commands  
that take only list names for arguments. For example,  
Select(XList,YList)  
Although XList and YList are not preceded by the list  
signifier, the calculator interprets them as list names since no  
other types of arguments are accepted.  
Also, when defining lists from the Home screen, the list  
signifier is optional.  
{1,2,3}XABC  
Since this command structure is only used with list names, the  
calculator interprets ABC as ¨ABC.  
 
102 Chapter 5: Lists  
List Commands from the Home Screen  
You can create, copy, display, and edit lists directly from the  
Home screen. You also can perform mathematical functions  
on lists from the Home screen.  
Creating a List  
To create a list on the Home screen, you must enter the list  
elements surrounded by braces and store them to the list  
name. You can access the braces from the Text editor  
(- t) or from the CATALOG (- |).  
If you create a list on the Home screen, it is stored in the  
calculator’s memory, but it won’t show up in the List editor  
unless you specifically insert it there.  
{element1,element2,ꢀ}Xlist  
Define ¨ABC={1,2,3} on the Home screen.  
³
1. Enter the elements.  
- l :  
- t  
{ b 1 ¡ 2 ¡ 3 }  
b Done b  
List braces { }  
2. Store to the list name.  
X - t  
A b B b  
C b Done b  
b
 
Chapter 5: Lists 103  
Copying One List to Another  
To copy a list on the Home screen, store it to another list  
name.  
It is easiest to store the elements in the List editor. You then  
can review the results in the List editor. Otherwise, any lists  
you create on the Home screen are stored in memory, but they  
don’t appear in the List editor unless you insert them there.  
listXnewList  
Define L1={1,2,3} and L2={4,5,6} and copy L1 to L2.  
³
1. Enter the new elements.  
3
2. Return to the Home screen  
and copy L1 to L2.  
- l :  
- v 1 X  
- v 2 b  
3. Display the copied list in  
the List editor.  
3
Displaying One List Element  
From the Home screen, you can display one list element from  
a defined list.  
list(element#)  
 
104 Chapter 5: Lists  
Define L2={1,2,3} in the List editor  
and display the second element  
from the Home screen.  
³
1. Define L2.  
3
2. Display the 2nd element  
only.  
- l :  
- v 2 D 2 E b  
Inserting or Changing a List Element  
From the Home screen, you can insert or change elements in a  
defined list. You can only insert elements in order. For  
example, you can’t insert a 3rd element if the 2nd and 1st  
elements are not defined.  
Define L1={1,2,3} and insert a fourth element, 6. Then change  
the 4th element from 6 to 8.  
³
1. Define L1 in the List editor.  
3 .  
2. Return to the Home screen,  
and insert a 4th element, 6.  
- l :  
6 X - v 1  
D 4 E b  
3. Display results in the List  
editor, if desired.  
3
 
Chapter 5: Lists 105  
4. Change the 4th element, 6,  
to 8.  
- l 8 X  
- v 1 D 4 E b  
5. Display results in the List  
editor, if desired.  
3
Using Math Functions with Lists  
When a math function (see Chapter 2: Math Operations) is  
applied to a list, it is calculated for every element in the list.  
Therefore, the function must be valid for every element in the  
list.  
You cannot perform a mathematical function on two lists of  
different sizes. For example, {1,2,3}+{4,5,6,7} results in an error.  
Mathematical rules always apply; for example, 1P{0,1,2} results  
in an error because 1 cannot be divided by 0.  
Perform mathematical functions with L5 and L6 on the Home  
screen.  
³
1. Define L5={4,5,6} and  
L6={7,8,9}.  
3
2. Return to the Home screen,  
and calculate L5+ L6.  
{4,5,6}+{7,8,9}=  
- l :  
- v 5 \  
{4+7, 5+8, 6+9}=  
{11,13,15}  
- v 6 b  
 
106 Chapter 5: Lists  
2
3. Calculate L5 .  
- v 5 6 b  
L52=  
{42, 52, 62}=  
{16,25,36}  
4. Select Radian mode setting  
and calculate cos(L6).  
. # # " b  
- l :  
- u 3  
Use " to scroll to  
see the entire  
answers.  
- v 6 E b  
For more information, see Chapter 11:  
Trigonometry.  
6
Statistical Plots  
Steps for Defining a Stat Plot ...........................................108  
Defining Statistical Data in Lists .......................................109  
Deselecting Y Functions..................................................109  
n
Defining a Stat Plot...........................................................109  
Selecting Stat Plot Types ...................................................111  
Defining Stat Plot Options................................................112  
Adjusting Window Values and Format ............................114  
Displaying the Stat Plot.....................................................114  
Stat Plot Examples .............................................................114  
Scatter Plot Ô and xyLine Plot Ó........................114  
Pictograph Î............................................................117  
Bar Graph Ð .............................................................118  
Pie Chart Ï ................................................................120  
Histogram Ò ...........................................................121  
Box Plot Ö...............................................................123  
Modified Box Plot Õ ..............................................124  
 
108 Chapter 6: Statistical Plots  
Steps for Defining a Stat Plot  
Follow these basic steps when defining a statistical plot. You  
may not have to do all of them each time you graph the  
designated lists.  
3
Define numerical and categorical  
lists in the List editor.  
- } 2 6  
Deselect Yn functions, if desired.  
- e  
1, 2, or 3  
Define the stat plot by entering the  
STAT PLOTS menu and selecting  
Plot1, Plot2, or Plot3.  
" b  
'
Turn on the stat plot,  
select the Plot Type and define  
all corresponding options.  
Adjust the WINDOW values and  
format, if necessary.  
Graph the stat plot. Trace the plot  
*
( 7  
or )  
with ), if desired.  
Using ZoomStat  
WINDOW values.  
 
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots 109  
Defining Statistical Data in Lists  
Statistical plots (stat plots) are graphical representations of  
data that has been stored in lists. Therefore, since you need to  
create your lists before you can define stat plots, review  
Chapter 5: Lists for information on naming and creating both  
numerical and categorical lists.  
Note: All examples in this chapter assume that you know how  
to enter lists in the List editor.  
Deselecting Yn Functions  
When you press * or a ( command, the calculator  
graphs all selected Yn functions (defined in the Y= editor) and  
graphs all stat plots that are defined and turned on. If you have  
defined and selected functions in the Y= editor and you don’t  
want them displayed with your stat plots, deselect all defined  
functions with - } 2:Y-Vars 6:FnOff.  
For more information on defining and selecting functions in  
the Y= editor, see Chapter 9: Function Graphing.  
Defining a Stat Plot  
Once you have data lists stored in the calculator, you need to  
define the stat plot. This requires two steps:  
1. Press - e to display the STAT PLOTS menu screen.  
2. Select 1, 2, or 3 to enter the Stat Plot editor for Plot1, Plot2,  
or Plot3. Selecting 4 or 5 turns all stat plots off or on when  
you graph.  
 
110 Chapter 6: Statistical Plots  
The Stat Plot Menu Screen  
- e  
PlotsOff and PlotsOn - e 4 and 5  
From the STAT PLOTS menu, you can choose to turn all stat  
plots off or on. This determines whether or not they are  
displayed on the Graph screen when you press * or select  
a ( command. The TIN73 can graph all three stat plots at  
the same time, if desired. If you select either of these  
commands, the calculator returns you to the Home screen.  
PlotsOff and PlotsOn accept three optional arguments, 1, 2 or 3,  
which represent their corresponding stat plot. If you do not  
include any arguments, the calculator automatically deselects  
(turns off) or selects (turns on) all three.  
PlotsOff [1,2,3]  
PlotsOn [1,2,3]  
³
Turn off Plot1 and Plot2.  
- e 4  
1 ¡ 2 b  
 
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots 111  
The Stat Plot Editor  
- e 1 , 2 or 3  
If the plot has been defined previously, that information is  
displayed when you select a plot number.  
From the Stat Plot editor, you select (turn on) or deselect  
(turn off) the stat plot, and you can select one of eight plot  
types (represented as icons) as well as any options that go  
with the type.  
Selecting Stat Plot Types  
To select a stat plot type, display the Stat Plot editor. Use $  
and # to move to the Type line, and use " and ! to highlight  
the individual Type icons. Once you have highlighted the Type  
icon that you want, press b to select it. The options for  
the plot type then are displayed automatically.  
Icon  
Ô
Plot Type  
Scatter plot  
xyLine plot  
Pictograph  
Bar graph  
Icon  
Ï
Plot Type  
Pie chart  
Ó
Ò
Ö
Õ
Histogram  
Box plot  
Î
Ð
Modified Box plot  
 
112 Chapter 6: Statistical Plots  
Defining Stat Plot Options  
The plot type you select determines which options you can  
select. Therefore, when you select a different type, the options  
adjust automatically, if necessary.  
To specify a list name, use the - v Ls menu.  
Highlight the list name you want with the cursor keys,  
and then press b. The TIN73 inserts the name at the  
cursor location.  
To select an option, highlight the one you want with the  
cursor keys, and then press b.  
To enter a numerical value, use the number keys, and  
then press b.  
Remember that when entering elements in a categorical list,  
you must surround the first element by quotation marks; they  
are optional for the remaining elements.  
The following table includes a list of all possible options for all  
stat plot types. You only need to specify or select the options  
which apply to the stat plot type you are defining.  
For option:  
Xlist  
Do the following:  
Specify a defined numerical list.  
Ylist  
Specify a defined numerical list. Ylist  
must be the same length as Xlist and  
can be the same as Xlist. Plots which  
require you to specify both the Xlist  
and Ylist plot points from those lists as  
coordinate pairs.  
Mark  
Select one type (, +, or ¦) to specify  
appearance of data points or an  
outlier (Modified Box plot) on the  
graph screen.  
 
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots 113  
For option:  
Do the following:  
CategList  
Specify a defined categorical list. List  
dimension must be from 1 to 7 and  
must be the same length as all  
corresponding Data Lists.  
Data List or  
DataList#  
Specify a defined numerical list. All  
Data Lists must be the same length as  
the corresponding CategList.  
Scale  
Specify a number which represents  
the quantity of each Pictograph icon.  
1Scale99999. Scale must be big  
enough so that it cannot be broken up  
into more than 7 icons. Using (  
7:ZoomStat to display the stat plot  
automatically adjusts Scale for you.  
VertàHor  
Select vertical or horizontal  
orientation for Pictograph icons or  
Bar graph bars.  
Icons  
1 2 3  
Select one of 7 Icons to represent your  
Pictograph: Æ, Ç, È, É, Ê, Ë, Ì.  
Select number of bars you want  
graphed per category in a Bar graph.  
You must specify a corresponding Data  
List for each bar included in the graph.  
NumberàPercent  
Select whether you want the values in  
DataList to be displayed as numbers or  
converted and displayed as  
percentages in a Pie chart.  
Freq (optional)  
Default=1  
Specify a frequency list that tells the  
calculator how many times each data  
point in Xlist occurs. Freq must have  
the same number of elements as Xlist.  
 
114 Chapter 6: Statistical Plots  
Adjusting Window Values and Format  
If you press * to display all selected stat plots, sometimes  
you see a blank screen. Try adjusting your viewing window.  
The easiest way to do this is with the ( 7:ZoomStat  
command. This adjusts the viewing window automatically so  
that all points of all turned on stat plots are visible. To adjust  
window values manually, press '.  
In addition, the calculator automatically selects the AxesOff  
option (- g) for Pictograph, Bar graph, Pie chart stat  
plots. However, any other selected options on the - g  
screen still apply to stat plots (as they do with function  
graphs).  
For more information on adjusting WINDOW values and  
formatting the Graph screen, see Chapter 9: Function  
Graphing.  
Displaying the Stat Plot  
Press * to display a stat plot. (Pressing * also  
displays any Yn functions that are defined and selected.) Once  
you have a plot displayed, you can press ) and use " and  
! to move from point to point.  
If you have more than one plot turned on at the same time, you  
can trace all the points of each plot. Use $ and # to move  
from plot to plot.  
Stat Plot Examples  
The following examples assume that all Yn functions are  
deselected (turned off) (- } 2:Y-Vars 6:FnOff).  
Scatter Plot Ô and xyLine Plot Ó  
Scatter plots (Ô) and xyLine plots (Ó) are especially useful  
for plotting data over a period of time to indicate trends. An  
xyLine plot (Ó) functions exactly like the Scatter plot, except  
that it connects the data points with a line.  
 
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots 115  
For the years 1978 -1984, determine in which baseball league,  
North or South, the homerun leader tends to hit more home  
runs. Use Scatter plots to find your solution.  
³
Year  
Home Runs  
Year  
Home Runs  
NORTH SOUTH  
NORTH SOUTH  
1978  
1979  
1980  
1981  
40  
48  
48  
31  
46  
45  
41  
22  
1982  
1983  
1984  
37  
40  
36  
39  
39  
43  
1. Create three lists in the List  
editor, YEAR, NORTH, and  
SOUTH.  
3
For more information on entering lists,  
see Chapter 5: Lists.  
2. Turn off all stat plots.  
- e 4 b  
3. Display the STAT PLOTS  
menu.  
- e  
Select the Ô icon.  
4. Define Plot1 as a Scatter  
plot as shown to the right.  
1 b # b #  
- v YEAR b  
# - v NORTH  
b # b  
5. Display the STAT PLOTS  
menu.  
- e  
116 Chapter 6: Statistical Plots  
6. Define Plot2 as shown to the  
right.  
2 b # b #  
- v YEAR b  
# - v SOUTH  
b # " b  
Using different marks  
helps you distinguish  
between Plot1 and Plot2.  
7. Display the stat plots using  
the ZoomStat command.  
( 7  
8. Trace the Scatter plots to  
find the solution to the  
question.  
The plot that is  
being traced  
)
! and " (to trace  
point to point)  
$ and # (to move  
from plot to plot)  
The X and Y coordinates  
From 1978-1984, the North  
League's home run hitter led in  
4 of the 7 years.  
Solution  
Select the Ó icon.  
9. Redefining Plot1 as an  
xyLine plot makes it even  
easier to follow the trends  
of its data.  
- e 1 # " b  
10. Display Plot1 and Plot2 using  
the ZoomStat command.  
Trace, if desired.  
( 7  
) (optional)  
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots 117  
Pictograph Î  
In a Pictograph, an icon symbolizes the quantities being  
represented. Pictographs are useful for observing changes in  
quantity over time. They also can illustrate comparisons  
between similar situations.  
The calculator displays no more than seven Pictograph icons  
for up to seven categories on the screen. Therefore, if Scale is  
not big enough (meaning that Data List is broken up by more  
than seven icons), you get an INVALID DIM error.  
If an element in Data List is too large to fit the maximum scale  
(99999) so that the calculator can’t make all icons fit in one  
screen, you get a DOMAIN error.  
For your geography class, you want to compare distances (in  
kilometers) between Dallas, Texas, and seven other cities in  
North America. Use a vertical Pictograph to display your  
results.  
³
City  
km  
City  
km  
Toronto, ON  
2215  
Denver, CO  
1397  
Mexico City, MX 1775  
Los Angeles, CA 2180  
Washington, DC 1927  
Kansas City, KS 836  
Vancouver, BC 3444  
1. Create two lists in the List  
editor, CITY and DIST.  
Categorical list  
Numerical list  
Remember to surround the  
first categorical list element  
with quotation marks  
(found in the Text editor).  
3
For more information on entering lists,  
see Chapter 5: Lists.  
 
118 Chapter 6: Statistical Plots  
2. Turn off all stat plots.  
- e 4 b  
3. Display the STAT PLOTS  
menu.  
- e  
Select the Î  
4. Define Plot1 as a Pictograph  
as shown to the right.  
icon.  
1 b # " " b  
# - v CITY  
b # - v  
MILES b # 5 0 0 #  
b # b  
5. Display the stat plots.  
*
Highlighted  
column  
6. Trace, if desired.  
)
As you press " and !, the calculator  
highlights whole columns. Both list  
names and list values are displayed at  
the bottom of the screen.  
Dallas, TX, to Washington,  
DC is 1,927 km.  
Bar Graph Ð  
A Bar graph plots a group of up to three data lists (converted  
to bars) for comparison among one category. Bar graphs are  
especially useful for comparing data lists (especially when  
organized in categories) over a period of time.  
The calculator adjusts all bars so that they fit within the  
graphing screen. Therefore, the data list with the largest values  
is scaled to fit the screen, and then all other bars are graphed  
relative to it. Each element in CategList defines a category. You  
can define up to seven categories with up to three data bars  
per category.  
 
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots 119  
The Xscl WINDOW value specifies the range of values for each  
interval of a Bar graph. The Yscl WINDOW value specifies the  
height of a bar in a Bar graph; in other words, it acts as your  
bar scale. To adjust Xscl and Yscl manually, press ' and  
enter the new values with the number keys. For more  
information about setting WINDOW values, see Chapter 9:  
Function Graphing.  
If you want the calculator to adjust the WINDOW values for you  
automatically, press ( 7:ZoomStat.  
Graph the data lists from the Scatter plot baseball example as  
a vertical Bar graph (see that section in this chapter, if  
necessary). Assign ¨YEAR as CategList, ¨NORTH as DataList1 and  
¨SOUTH as DataList2. Ignore DataList3. (By default, L3 is assigned  
to DataList3, but if another list name is assigned you don’t need  
to change it.)  
³
1. Turn off all stat plots.  
- l :  
- e 4 b  
2. Display the STAT PLOTS  
menu.  
- e  
Select the  
3. Define Plot1 as a Bar graph  
as shown to the right.  
Ð icon.  
1 b # " " "  
b
4. Specify CategList, DataList1,  
and DataList2.  
# - v  
Y E A R b #  
- v NORTH  
b # - v  
SOUTH b  
120 Chapter 6: Statistical Plots  
5. Select Vert and 2, if  
necessary.  
# # b " " "  
b
6. Display the stat plots.  
*
7. Trace the Bar graph, if  
desired.  
)
! and " (to trace bar  
to bar)  
DataList Name  
and bar value  
CategList  
Pie Chart Ï  
A Pie chart is used to compare parts of a whole. The area of a  
“pie piece” is proportional to the part of 100% that it  
represents. You can display up to seven “pie pieces.”  
To trace the Pie chart with ), use " to trace clockwise  
and ! to trace counterclockwise.  
Keisha owns 4 cats, 5 dogs, 3 fish, 8 birds, and 14 snakes. Use a  
percentage Pie chart to illustrate this.  
³
1. Create two lists in the List  
editor, PETS and AMNT.  
3
For more information on entering lists,  
see Chapter 5: Lists.  
2. Turn off all stat plots.  
- e 4 b  
 
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots 121  
3. Display the STAT PLOTS  
menu and select Plot1.  
- e 1 b  
4. Define Plot1 as a Pie chart  
as shown to the right.  
# " " " " b #  
- v PETS b #  
- v AMNT b  
# " b  
A percentage  
Pie chart  
5. Display the stat plot.  
*
8 birds is  
6. Trace the Pie chart, if  
desired.  
23.529% of  
the total pets  
owned.  
)
" and ! (to trace  
from section to section)  
Data List name  
and section's  
CategList  
numerical value  
Histogram Ò  
Histograms are useful for representing data grouped in  
intervals, and it plots the data’s frequency of occurrence for  
each interval.  
Thirty students recently took a math test. All scores between  
100-90 are considered an A, 89-80 as a B, 79-70 as a C, 69-60 as  
a D, 59-0 as an F. Use a Histogram to show the scores grouped  
by their letter grade.  
³
{99,96,92,88,84,78,74,70,66,64}  
{1,2,3,5,2,7,4,3,2,1}  
SCORE  
FREQ  
 
122 Chapter 6: Statistical Plots  
1. Create two lists in the List  
editor, SCORE and FREQ.  
3
For more information on entering lists,  
see Chapter 5: Lists.  
2. Turn off all stat plots.  
- e 4 b  
3. Display the STAT PLOTS  
menu.  
- e  
4. Define Plot1 as a Histogram  
as shown to the right.  
Select the  
Ò icon.  
1 b # " " " "  
" b # - v  
SCORE b #  
- v FREQ b  
5. Display the stat plot using  
the ZoomStat command and  
trace the Histogram.  
( 7 )  
! and " (to trace bar  
to bar)  
7 scores fall between  
the min and max.  
WINDOW values  
6. Adjust the graphing window  
so that the data is grouped  
in intervals of 10 and so  
from ZoomStat  
that the lowest test score is  
60 and the highest is 100.  
The adjusted  
WINDOW  
values  
' 6 0 # 1 0 0 # #  
1 0 # 0 # 2 0 # 1  
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots 123  
7. Graph and trace the  
adjusted Histogram.  
* )  
" and ! (to trace bar  
to bar)  
14 scores fall  
between 70-80.  
Intervals=10  
because Xscl=10  
3 students received a D.  
14 students received a C.  
7 students received a B.  
6 students received an A.  
Solution  
Box Plot Ö  
A Box plot illustrates median applications of a data list. Lines  
on the plot, called whiskers, extend from the minimum data  
point in the set (minX) to the first quartile median point (Q1)  
and from the third quartile median point (Q3) to the maximum  
point (maxX). The middle vertical line is the median (Med) of all  
the data points.  
The first quartile contains all data points between minX and  
Med; the third quartile contains all data points between Med  
and maxX.  
When two Box plots are plotted, the first one plots at the top  
of the screen and the second plots in the middle. When three  
are plotted, the first one plots at the top, the second in the  
middle, and the third at the bottom.  
Xmin and Xmax specify minimum and maximum X-axis values  
when a Box plot is displayed on the Graph screen. Box plots  
ignore Ymin and Ymax values. To adjust Xmin and Xmax  
manually, press ' and enter the new values with the  
number keys. If you want the calculator to adjust the window  
values for you automatically, press ( 7:ZoomStat.  
For more information about setting WINDOW values, see  
Chapter 9: Function Graphing.  
 
124 Chapter 6: Statistical Plots  
Graph the test scores data from the Histogram example as a  
Box plot. (See previous section, if necessary.)  
³
1. Turn off all stat plots.  
- e 4 b  
2. Display the Stat Plots menu.  
- e  
3. Define Plot1 as a Box plot as  
shown to the right.  
Select the  
Ö icon.  
1 b # " " " "  
" " b # - v  
SCORE b #  
- v FREQ b  
4. Display the stat plot using  
the ZoomStat command.  
( 7  
5. Trace the Box plot.  
)
! and " (to trace  
point to point)  
Q1 Median point and its value  
Modified Box Plot Õ  
The Modified Box plot functions exactly like the Box plot,  
except it separates outliers from the plot. Outliers are those  
data points which are 1.5¦Interquartile Range beyond the  
quartiles. The Interquartile Range is defined as the difference  
between the third quartile, Q3, and the first quartile, Q1.  
Outliers are plotted individually beyond the whisker, using the  
Mark you select from the Stat Plot editor. Outliers are included  
in plot traces with ).  
 
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots 125  
Graph the test scores data from the Histogram and Box plot  
examples as a Modified Box plot. (See those sections, if  
necessary.) However, adjust SCORE and FREQ by inserting two  
outlier data points: 112 and 40, both at a frequency of 1.  
³
1. Edit SCORE and FREQ in the  
List editor.  
3
For more information on entering lists,  
see Chapter 5: Lists.  
2. Turn off all STAT PLOTS.  
- e 4 b  
3. Display the STAT PLOTS  
menu.  
- e  
4. Define Plot1 as a Modified  
Box plot as shown to the  
right.  
Select the  
Õ icon.  
1 b # " " " "  
" " " b #  
- v SCORE  
b # - v  
FREQ b # "  
b
5. Display the stat plot using  
the ZoomStat command.  
( 7  
6. Trace the plot, if desired.  
)
! and " (to trace  
point to point)  
126 Chapter 6: Statistical Plots  
Statistical  
Analyses  
7
The - v MATH Menu................................................128  
min( and max( - v " " 1 and 2.....................128  
mean(, median(, and mode(  
- v " " 3, 4, and 5.....................................130  
stdDev( - v " " 6...........................................131  
sum( - v " " 7................................................132  
The - v CALCULATE Menu.......................................133  
Using Frequency Lists with  
- v CALC Menu Items.................................133  
1-Var Stats and 2-Var Stats  
- v " " " 1 and 2 .....................................134  
Manual-Fit - v ! 3 ..........................................138  
Med-Med - v ! 4............................................140  
LinReg(ax+b) - v ! 5 ......................................142  
QuadReg - v ! 6.............................................144  
ExpReg - v ! 7................................................146  
 
128 Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses  
The - v MATH Menu  
The - v MATH menu allows you to calculate statistical  
analyses with lists (see chapter 5: Lists).  
- v " "  
1:min(  
Returns the minimum of two real numbers,  
lists, or expressions.  
2:max(  
3:mean(  
Returns the maximum of two real numbers,  
lists, or expressions.  
Returns the calculated average of the values  
in a list.  
4:median(  
5:mode(  
Returns the middle value occurring in a list.  
Returns the most frequently occurring  
element in a list.  
6:stdDev(  
7:sum(  
Returns the standard deviation of the  
elements in a list.  
Returns the sum of the elements in a list.  
min( and max( - v " " 1 and 2  
These are identical to the min( and max( commands found on  
the 1 NUM menu.  
min( (minimum) returns the smaller of two values or the  
smallest element in one list. value can be a real number,  
expression or a list.  
 
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses 129  
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same number  
of elements. If one argument is a list and the other a non-list,  
the non-list is compared with each element of the list, and a  
list is returned.  
min(valueA,valueB)  
min(list)  
max( (maximum) functions exactly like min(, but it always  
returns the larger of two values or the largest element in a list.  
Simply substitute max( in place of min( in the syntax models  
above.  
Compare L1 and L2 to find the min( and max(. L1={1,2,3}, and  
³
L2={3,2,1}.  
1. Define two lists in the List  
editor, L1 and L2.  
3
For more information on entering lists,  
see Chapter 5: Lists.  
2. Find the list minimums.  
-l:  
-v""1  
- v 1 ¡  
- v 2 E b  
3. Find the list maximums.  
-v""2  
- v 1 ¡  
- v 2 E b  
130 Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses  
mean(, median(, and mode(  
- v " " 3, 4, and 5  
median( returns the median (the middle element) of list when  
the elements, even if the list elements are not arranged in  
numerical order. With an even number of elements, the  
calculator returns the average of the two middle elements.  
mean( returns the mean (mathematical average) of list. mode(  
returns the mode (element which occurs most frequently) of  
list.  
If a second list, freq, is specified, it is interpreted as the  
frequency of the elements in the first list. list and freq must  
have the same number of elements. If freq is not included,  
then the default is 1 and every element in the first list is only  
counted once.  
mean(list[,freq])  
median(list[,freq])  
mode(list[,freq])  
Calculate David’s final course average for his math class.  
³
He received an 85 on Test 1, a 78 on Test 2, and a 90 on Test 3.  
He received an 82 on his Midterm Exam and a 75 on his  
Final Exam.  
Tests count 1 time, the Midterm counts 2 times, and the Final  
Exam counts 3 times.  
¨TEST {85,78,90,82,75}  
¨FREQ {1,1,1,2,3}  
1. Create two lists in the List  
editor, TEST and FREQ.  
3
For more information on entering lists,  
see Chapter 5:Lists.  
 
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses 131  
2. Return to the Home screen,  
and calculate the average of  
the test scores.  
- l :  
- v " " 3  
- v TEST  
b ¡ - v  
FREQ b E b  
David's final course  
average is 80.25.  
Solution  
stdDev( - v " " 6  
stdDev( returns the standard deviation of list. If a second list,  
freq, is specified, it is interpreted as the frequency of the  
elements in the first list. list and freq must have the same  
number of elements.  
stdDev(list,freq[,type])  
type=0 (population standard deviation) or 1 (sample  
population deviation). If type is not specified, the calculator  
returns sample population deviation.  
Find the population standard  
³
deviation of ¨TEST (from the  
previous example). Use ¨FREQ as  
your freq.  
- v " " 6  
- v TEST b  
¡ - v FREQ  
b ¡ 0 E b  
 
132 Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses  
sum( - v " " 7  
sum( (summation) returns the sum of all elements in list.  
Specify the additional optional arguments to return the sum of  
the range of elements between start and end. start and end  
represent element places, not the element values.  
To add the entire list:  
sum(list)  
To add the range of elements from start to the last element in  
list:  
sum(list,start)  
To add the range of elements between start and end:  
sum(list,start,end)  
Find the sum of ¨SUM between elements 4 and 6, where  
³
¨SUM={3,10,36,14,33,5,22,45}.  
1. Create a list, in the List  
editor, SUM.  
3
For more information on entering lists,  
see Chapter 5: Lists.  
2. Return to the Home screen,  
and calculate the partial list  
sum.  
- l :  
- v " " 7  
- v SUM b  
¡ 4 ¡ 6 E b  
 
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses 133  
The - v CALC Menu  
The - v CALC menu allows you to calculate statistical  
analyses on lists. When you choose an item from the menu, the  
calculator returns a list of statistical variables. Following the  
1-Var Stats and 2-Var Stats explanation, a list and definition of all  
possible statistical variables is provided.  
- v " " " –o r –  
- v !  
1:1-Var Stats  
2:2-Var Stats  
3:Manual-Fit  
Calculates 1-variable statistics.  
Calculates 2-variable statistics.  
Allows user to fit a line manually to  
plotted data.  
4:Med-Med  
Calculates a Median-Median line for the  
plotted data.  
5:LinReg(ax+b)  
6:QuadReg  
7:ExpReg  
Fits a linear model to plotted data.  
Fits a quadratic model to plotted data.  
Fits an exponential model to plotted data.  
Using Frequency Lists with - v CALC  
Menu Items  
For all menu items, you can specify a second list, freq, which  
is interpreted as the frequency of the elements in the first list.  
Each element in freq must be 0, and at least one element  
must be > 0.  
 
134 Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses  
Non-integer freq elements are valid. This is useful when  
entering frequencies expressed as percentages or parts that  
add up to 1. However, if freq contains non-integer frequencies,  
Sx and Sy (sample standard deviation) are undefined, and  
values are not displayed for Sx and Sy in the statistical results.  
1-Var Stats and 2-Var Stats - v ! 1 and 2  
1-Var Stats (one-variable statistics) analyzes data from one list  
with one measured variable (X). 1-Var Stats accepts two  
optional arguments, XList and freq. If XList is not specified,  
the default list name is L1.  
1-Var Stats [XList,freq]  
2-Var Stats (two-variable statistics) analyzes paired data from  
two lists with two measured variables, X, the independent  
variable, and Y, the dependent variable. 2-Var Stats accepts  
three optional arguments, XList, YList, and freq. If XList and  
YList are not specified, the default list names are L1 and L2.  
2-Var Stats [XList,YList,freq]  
Find the 1-Var Stats for L1, where L1={1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9}. Use L2 as  
³
freq, where L2={1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}.  
1. Define two lists in the List  
editor, L1 and L2.  
3
For more information on entering lists,  
see Chapter 5: Lists.  
 
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses 135  
2. Return to the Home screen,  
and calculate the 1-Var Stats  
for the lists.  
- l :  
- v ! 1  
- v 1 ¡  
- v 2 b  
Press $ and # to  
scroll all results.  
Find the 2-Var Stats for L1 (XList) and L2 (YList), where  
L1={1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9} and L2={1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}. Use L3 as freq, where  
{L3=1,2,2,2,4,4,3,3}.  
³
1. Define the three lists in the  
List editor, L1, L2, and L3.  
3
For more information on entering lists,  
see Chapter 5: Lists.  
2. Return to the Home screen,  
and calculate the 2-Var Stats  
for the lists.  
- l :  
- v ! 2  
- v 1 ¡  
- v 2 ¡  
- v 3 b  
Press $ and # to  
scroll all results.  
136 Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses  
What Do the Results Mean?  
1-Var Stats and 2-Var Stats variables are calculated and stored as  
indicated below. To access these variables for use in  
expressions, press - } 3:Statistics and select the  
appropriate menu. If you edit a list or change the type of  
analysis, all statistical variables are cleared.  
Variables Definition  
VARS Menu  
x or y  
Mean of all x or y values.  
XY  
G
Gx or Gy  
Gx2 or Gy2  
Sum of all x values or y values.  
Sum of all x2 values or y2  
G
values.  
Sx or Sy  
sx or sy  
n
Sample standard deviation of  
XY  
x or y.  
Population standard deviation XY  
of x or y.  
Number of x or x,y data points. XY  
minX  
minY  
Minimum of x values or y  
values.  
XY  
XY  
G
maxX  
maxY  
Maximum of x values or y  
values.  
Gxy  
Sum of x¦y for all xy pairs in  
two lists.  
Q1  
Median of the elements  
between minX and Med (1st  
quartile). Only calculated for  
1-Var Stats.  
PTS  
Med  
Q3  
Median of all data points.  
PTS  
PTS  
Median of the elements  
between Med and maxX (3rd  
quartile). Only calculated for  
1-Var Stats.  
 
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses 137  
Variables Definition  
VARS Menu  
r
Correlation coefficient  
Coefficient of determination  
Regression equation  
Summary points  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
PTS  
r2 or R2  
RegEQ  
x1,y1,x2,y2,  
x3,y3  
a, b, c  
Regressionà fit coefficients  
EQ  
n (number of data points)  
n=number of x data points in a 1-Var Stats analysis or the  
number of x and y data points in a 2-Var Stats analysis. Since  
both variable lists always have the same number of list  
elements in 2-Var Stats, n for x is always equal to n for y.  
Therefore, n applies to both the x and y analyses.  
freq (Frequency Lists)  
If freq is specified, n is equal to the sum of the elements in that  
list. For example, if the freq is {2,2,3,1,2}, n={2+2+3+1+2}=10.  
Q1, Q3, and Med  
Q1, Q3, and Med are undefined if the freq contains non-integer  
values. They also are not calculated if the freq contains a value  
larger than 99.  
RegEQ  
The calculator stores the most recently generated regression  
equation (see - v CALC menu items 3–7) to the variable,  
RegEQ. If, for example, you execute 5: LinReg(ax+b), but you  
don’t initially store RegEQ to a Yn variable, you can later insert  
RegEQ into the Y= editor. The calculator graphs the regression  
equation when it is selected.  
If the frequency for an element or data pair is 0, the element or  
data pair is ignored in the calculation.  
 
138 Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses  
Manual-Fit - v ! 3  
Manual-Fit allows you to fit a line to plotted data on the Graph  
screen manually (as opposed to the calculator automatically  
drawing it for you). You can execute Manual-Fit from either the  
Graph screen or the Home screen.  
From the Graph screen, select Manual-Fit, and then draw the  
line (steps provided below). The linear equation in the form  
y=ax+b is shown at the top of the Graph screen. You can use  
the cursors to adjust the line, if necessary, and the a and b  
equation values change accordingly.  
From the Home screen, Manual-Fit accepts one optional  
argument, Yn. The calculator stores to Yn (in the Y= editor)  
the ax+b equation that manually fits the plotted data. To access  
the Yn variables, press - } 2.  
Manual-Fit Yn  
From either the Home screen or the Graph screen or Program  
editor, select Manual-Fit after you have plotted the stat plot. To  
draw the Manual-Fit line:  
1. Position the cursor at the beginning of the line segment  
that you want to draw, and then press b.  
2. As you press the cursor keys, the line is drawn and the  
slope is adjusted. When you have matched the plotted  
points as desired, press b.  
3. The line segment is drawn across the entire screen and  
the ax+b equation is shown at the top of the Graph screen.  
4. Continue to adjust the line’s slope with $ and #, and the  
y-intercept with ! and ", if desired.  
5. If you specified a Yn variable on the Home screen, you can  
view the selected and defined equation in the Y= editor  
(&). If you no longer want to view the Manual-Fit line,  
deselect it in the Y= editor by highlighting the = and  
pressing b.  
 
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses 139  
Graph a scatter plot for L1 and L2, where L1={1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9} and  
L2={1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}, and use Manual-Fit to draw a line through the  
points.  
³
1. Set Decimal Notation mode  
to 2, if desired.  
. # " " " b  
2. After entering the lists,  
define Plot1 as a scatter plot  
using L1 and L2, as shown to  
the right.  
- e b  
For more information on defining stat  
plots, see Chapter 6: Statistical Plots.  
3. Turn off Y2, Y3, and Y4, if  
they have been previously  
defined and selected.  
- l :  
- } 2  
6
2 ¡ 3 ¡ 4 b  
4. Plot L1 and L2.  
( 7  
5. From the Home screen,  
assign the Manual-Fit (ax+b)  
line to Y1.  
- l :  
- v ! 3  
- } 2 1 b  
140 Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses  
6. Move the cursor to the  
beginning point of line.  
" ! $ # (as  
necessary)  
b
Cursor changes to a small box.  
7. Move the cursor to the end  
point of line.  
" ! $ # (as  
necessary)  
8. Draw the line.  
ax+b  
b
9. Adjust line with cursor  
keys, if necessary.  
" ! $ #  
b (when finished)  
10. View the equation in the  
Y= editor, if desired.  
Y2, Y3, and Y4  
may vary.  
&
Med-Med - v ! 4  
Med-Med (Median-Median) fits the model equation, y=ax+b, to  
the data using the median-median line (resistant line)  
technique, calculating the summary points x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, and  
y3. Med-Med displays values for a (slope) and b (y-intercept).  
You can execute Med-Med from either the Graph screen, the  
Home screen, or the Program editor.  
From the Home screen or the Program editor, Med-Med accepts  
four optional arguments. Enter up to two list names, XList and  
YList; a frequency list, freq; and an equation variable, Yn. freq  
is the frequency of occurrence for each corresponding data  
point in XList and YList.  
 
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses 141  
If freq is omitted, all values are used once. If XList and YList  
are not specified, the default list names are L1 and L2. To  
access Yn variables, press - } 2:Y-Vars.  
Med-Med [XList,YList,freq,Yn]  
Graph a scatter plot for L1 and L2, where L1={1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9} and  
L2={1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}, and use Med-Med to draw the median-median  
line through the points.  
³
1. Set Decimal Notation mode  
to 2, if desired.  
. # " " " b  
2. After entering the lists,  
define Plot1 as a scatter plot  
using L1 and L2, as shown to  
the right.  
- e  
For more information on defining stat  
plots, see Chapter 6: Statistical Plots.  
3. Turn off Y3 and Y4, if they  
have been previously  
defined and selected.  
- l :  
- } 2  
6
3 ¡ 4 b  
4. Find the Med-Med line, and  
store the results to Y2.  
: - v ! 4  
- } 2 2 b  
Specifying ¨1 and ¨2 is optional since  
they are the default listnames.  
However, if you were using other list  
names, you would have to enter them  
before the Yn variable.  
142 Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses  
The Manual-Fit line,  
Y1 (previous section).  
5. View the line on the Graph  
screen.  
( 7  
The Med-Med  
line  
6. View the equation stored to  
Y2, if desired.  
Y3 and Y4  
may vary.  
&
LinReg(ax+b) - v ! 5  
LinReg(ax+b) (linear regression) fits the model equation y=ax+b  
to the data using a least-squares fit. It displays the value for a  
(slope) and b (y-intercept); when DiagnosticOn is set, it also  
displays values for r2 (coefficient of determination) and r  
(correlation coefficient). The DiagnosticOn command is in the  
CATALOG (-|).You can execute LinReg(ax+b) from the  
Graph screen, Home screen, or the Program editor.  
It is also helpful to compare the slope of the line you draw  
with Manual-Fit to the slope of the line the calculator calculates  
with the LinReg(ax+b) command.  
From the Home screen or the Program editor, LinReg(ax+b)  
accepts four optional arguments. Enter up to two list names,  
XList and YList; a frequency list, freq; and an equation  
variable, Yn. freq is the frequency of occurrence for each  
corresponding data point in XList and YList. If freq is omitted,  
all values are used once. If XList and YList are not specified,  
the default list names are L1 and L2. To access Yn variables,  
press - } 2:Y-Vars.  
LinReg(ax+b) [XList,YList,freq,Yn]  
 
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses 143  
Graph a scatter plot for L1 and L2, where L1={1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9} and  
L2={1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}, and use LinReg(ax+b) to draw the linear  
regression line through the points.  
³
1. Set Decimal Notation mode  
to 2, if desired.  
. # " " " b  
2. After entering the lists,  
define Plot1 as a scatter plot  
using L1 and L2, as shown to  
the right.  
- e  
For more information on defining stat  
plots, see Chapter 6: Statistical Plots.  
3. Turn off Y3 and Y4, if they  
have been previously  
defined and selected.  
- l :  
- } 2  
6
3 ¡ 4 b  
4. Find the LinReg(ax+b) line,  
and store the results to Y2.  
- l :  
- v ! 5  
- } 2 2 b  
Specifying ¨1 and ¨2 is optional since  
they are the default listnames.  
However, if you were using other list  
names, you would have to enter them  
before the Yn variable.  
144 Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses  
The Manual-Fit line, Y1 (see  
5. View the line on the Graph  
screen.  
example from that section)  
( 7  
The LinReg(ax+b) line  
6. View the equation stored to  
Y2, if desired.  
Y3 and Y4  
&
may vary.  
QuadReg - v ! 6  
QuadReg (quadratic regression) fits the second-degree  
polynomial y=ax2+bx+c to the data. It displays values for a, b,  
and c; when DiagnosticOn is set, it also displays a value for r2  
(coefficient of determination). The DiagnosticOn command is in  
the CATALOG (- |). You can execute the QuadReg  
command from the Graph screen, the Home screen, or the  
Program editor.  
For three data points, the equation is a polynomial fit; for four  
or more, it is a polynomial regression. At least three data  
points are required.  
From the Home screen or the Program editor, QuadReg accepts  
four optional arguments. Enter up to two list names, XList and  
YList; a frequency list, freq; and an equation variable, Yn. freq  
is the frequency of occurrence for each corresponding data  
point in XList and YList. If freq is omitted, all values are used  
once. If XList and YList are not specified, the default list  
names are L1 and L2. To access Yn variables, press - } 2.  
QuadReg [XList,YList,freq,Yn]  
 
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses 145  
Graph a scatter plot for L1 and L2, where L1={1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9} and  
L2={1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}, and use QuadReg to draw the quadratic  
regression curve through the points.  
³
1. Set Decimal Notation mode  
to 2, if desired.  
. # " " " b  
2. After entering the lists,  
define Plot1 as a scatter plot  
using L1 and L2, as shown to  
the right.  
- e  
For more information on defining Stat  
plots, see Chapter 6: Statistical Plots.  
3. Turn off Y2, Y3 and Y4, if they  
have been previously  
defined and selected.  
- l :  
- } 2  
6
2 ¡ 3 ¡ 4 b  
4. Find the QuadReg curve, and  
store the results to Y1.  
- l :  
- v ! 6  
- } 2 1 b  
Specifying ¨1 and ¨2 is optional since  
they are the default listnames.  
However, if you were using other list  
names, you would have to enter them  
before the Yn variable.  
5. View the curve on the  
Graph screen.  
( 6  
146 Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses  
6. View the equation stored to  
Y1, if desired.  
Y2, Y3, and Y4  
&
may vary.  
ExpReg - v ! 7  
ExpReg (exponential regression) fits the model equation y=abx  
to the data using a least-squares fit and transformed values x  
and ln(y). It displays values for a and b; when DiagnosticOn is  
set, it also displays values for r2 (coefficient of determination)  
and r (correlation coefficient). The DiagnosticOn command is in  
the CATALOG (- |). You can execute ExpReg from the  
Graph screen, the Home screen, or the Program editor.  
From the Home screen or the Program editor, ExpReg accepts  
four optional arguments. Enter up to two list names, XList and  
YList; a frequency list, freq: and an equation variable, Yn. freq  
is the frequency of occurrence for each corresponding data  
point in XList and YList. If freq is omitted, all values are used  
once. If XList and YList are not specified, the default list  
names are L1 and L2. To access Yn variables, press - } 2.  
ExpReg [XList,YList,freq,Yn]  
Graph a scatter plot for L1 and L2, where L1={1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9} and  
L2={1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}, and use ExpReg to draw the exponential  
regression curve through the points.  
³
1. Set Decimal Notation mode  
to 2, if desired.  
. # " " " b  
 
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses 147  
2. After entering the lists,  
define Plot1 as a scatter plot  
using L1 and L2, as shown to  
the right.  
- e  
For more information on defining stat  
zplots, see Chapter 6: Statistical Plots.  
3. Turn off Y2, Y3, and Y4, if  
they have been previously  
defined and selected.  
- l :  
- } 2  
6
2 ¡ 3 ¡ 4 b  
4. Find the ExpReg curve, and  
store the results to Y1.  
- l : -  
v ! 7 - } 2  
1 b  
Specifying ¨1 and ¨2 is optional since  
they are the default list names.  
However, if you were using other list  
names, you would have to enter them  
before the Yn variable.  
5. View the curve on the  
Graph screen.  
( 6  
6. View the equation stored to  
Y1, if desired.  
Y2, Y3, and Y4  
&
may vary.  
148 Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses  
Tables  
8
What Is a Table? ................................................................150  
Steps for Creating a Table.................................................151  
Defining and Selecting Functions in the Y= Editor &....152  
Setting Up the Table - f ....................................153  
Displaying the Table - i.......................................154  
Indpnt=Auto and Depend=Auto ...............................155  
Indpnt=Auto and Depend=Ask..................................156  
Indpnt=Ask..................................................................157  
Editing Y from the Table Screen..............................160  
n
Table Setup from the Home Screen .................................161  
 
150 Chapter 8: Tables  
What Is a Table?  
A table displays coordinate pair (X,Y) solutions for a defined  
function. One column displays independent variable values  
(X), and all others display corresponding dependent variable  
values (Y).  
On the TIN73, functions can be displayed in one of three ways,  
as shown here with the function, Y1=X2-4X+3.  
Independent variable (X)  
Y= X2N4X+3  
Dependent variable (Y)  
The Y= editor (&) shows  
an algebraic representation.  
The Graph screen (*)  
shows a graphic representation.  
The Table screen (- i)  
shows a numeric representation  
in coordinate pairs.  
For more information about the Y= editor and function  
graphing, see Chapter 9: Function Graphing.  
 
Chapter 8: Tables 151  
Steps for Creating a Table  
Follow these basic steps when defining a table.  
&
Define or edit up to four functions  
in the Y= editor.  
Highlight =, and  
press b.  
Select the Yn function(s) that you  
want to be included in the table.  
Y
1 and Y2 are  
selected; Y3 is  
deselected.  
- f  
Set up the table.  
- i  
Display the table. Numeric  
Notation, Decimal Notation, and  
Angle mode settings determine the  
display of the elements.  
 
152 Chapter 8: Tables  
Defining and Selecting Functions  
in the Y= Editor &  
To create a table of values for a function, you first must define  
the function in the Y= editor. Press & to display the Y= editor;  
then define up to four functions, Y1, Y2, Y3, and Y4, in terms of  
the independent variable, X.  
For every selected function in the Y= editor, the calculator  
automatically creates a column of Yn values. Because the  
Y= editor holds up to four functions, the TIN73 can create up  
to four Yn columns in a table, one for each function.  
When you first enter a function, it is selected automatically. To  
select or deselect a function, highlight the = with the cursor,  
and then press b.  
For more details on entering functions, see Chapter 9:  
Function Graphing.  
Define Y1=X2N4X+3.  
³
1. Display the Y= editor.  
Your screen may vary.  
&
2. Move the cursor to Y1, and  
clear if necessary.  
# :  
3. Enter Y1= X2 N4X+3.  
I 6 T 4 I \ 3  
When you first enter a  
function, it is selected  
automatically.  
 
Chapter 8: Tables 153  
Setting Up the Table - f  
Use the TABLE SETUP screen to specify the initial settings for  
your table. To select an Indpnt or Depend setting, highlight the  
one you want with the cursor, and then press b.  
- f  
TblStart  
Specifies the first value displayed in the  
independent variable (X) column and can be  
any real number.  
Default=0  
@Tbl  
Specifies the increment by which the X values  
Default=1  
increase or decrease.  
Indpnt:  
Refers to the independent variable (X) column  
Default=Auto values. You must select one of two choices:  
Auto X values are automatically  
displayed in the independent variable  
column when you view the Table screen.  
Ask — No X values are shown when you  
view the Table screen. Instead, you enter  
the values for the X column.  
Depend:  
Refers to all dependent variable (Yn) column  
Default= Auto values. You must select one of two choices:  
Auto Yn values of all selected functions  
are automatically displayed in their  
respective columns when you view the  
Table screen.  
Ask — No Yn values are shown when you  
view the Table screen. Instead you select  
which Yn values you want the calculator to  
display.  
 
154 Chapter 8: Tables  
Displaying the Table - i  
Once your functions are defined and selected in the Y= editor  
and you have set up your table in the TABLE SETUP screen, if  
necessary, you can display the table with - i.  
- i  
On the Table screen, you can see lower X values by placing the  
cursor anywhere in the X column and pressing $, as necessary  
(you can’t scroll up from the Yn columns). To see higher X  
values, use # from anywhere on the Table screen.  
Only two Yn columns appear at a time on the Table screen. Use  
" to display a third or fourth Yn column.  
When you highlight a table element, the entry line displays the  
value in its entirety.  
The values displayed in the table are affected by the mode  
settings. If the calculator is set to the Sci Numeric Notation  
mode, all applicable values in all columns are displayed in  
scientific notation. If your calculator is set to Radian Angle  
mode and a defined function is a trig function, all the table  
values for that function are interpreted as radians, not degrees.  
 
Chapter 8: Tables 155  
Indpnt=Auto and Depend=Auto  
Select these settings on the TABLE SETUP screen when you  
want all X and Yn values to appear automatically.  
You have two dogs, Rover and Spot. You feed Rover 3 times a  
day. You feed Spot 4 times a day. How many times will Spot  
and Rover have eaten after 3 and 5 days?  
³
X=number of days  
Y=total times Rover has eaten  
Y =3X  
1
X=number of days  
Y=total times Spot has eaten  
Y =4X  
2
Note: This resets table settings and  
1. Reset default settings.  
all mode settings, and deselects any  
- Ÿ 7  
2
2
previously defined and selected Yn  
functions.  
2. Display the Y= editor.  
Your Y= editor may  
look different.  
&
3. Clear Y1, if necessary. Enter  
Y1=3X.  
: 3 I  
4. Clear Y2, if necessary. Enter  
Y2=4X.  
# : 4 I  
5. Display the table (using  
default table settings).  
When X=3, Y1=9  
and Y2=12.  
- i  
Rover has eaten 9 times.  
Spot has eaten 12 times.  
After Day 3  
After Day 5  
Rover has eaten 15 times.  
Spot has eaten 20 times.  
 
156 Chapter 8: Tables  
How many times will Spot and Rover have eaten after 1, 3, and  
4 weeks? (Refer to the previous example, if necessary.)  
³
1. Set up the table where  
TblStart=0, @Tbl=7,  
Indpnt=Auto, and  
Depend=Auto.  
- f  
0 # 7 # b  
# b  
TblStart=0  
2. Display the table.  
- i  
X values change by  
7 since @Tbl=7.  
Rover has eaten 21 times.  
Spot has eaten 28 times.  
After Day 7  
(End of Week 1)  
After Day 21  
(End of Week 3)  
Rover has eaten 63 times.  
Spot has eaten 84 times.  
Rover has eaten 84 times.  
Spot has eaten 112 times.  
After Day 28  
(End of Week 4)  
Indpnt=Auto and Depend=Ask  
Select these settings on the TABLE SETUP screen when you  
want X values to appear automatically, but you want to be able  
to reveal Yn values one at a time. It is also helpful in  
recognizing patterns between different Yn solutions.  
 
Chapter 8: Tables 157  
Display the number of times Rover has eaten after 4 days and  
8 days, and display the number of times Spot has eaten after 3  
days and 6 days. (Refer to the previous example, if necessary.)  
³
1. Setup the table where  
TblStart=3, @Tbl=1,  
Indpnt=Auto, and Depend=Ask.  
- f  
3 # 1 # b # "  
b
X starts with 3 because  
TblStart=3.  
2. Display the table.  
- i  
3. Display how many times  
Rover (Y1) has eaten after 4  
and 8 days.  
# " b  
# # # # b  
4. Display how many times  
Spot (Y2) has eaten after 3  
and 6 days.  
" $ $ b  
$ $ $ b  
Spot has eaten 12 times.  
Rover has eaten 12 times.  
After Day 3  
After Day 4  
Spot has eaten 24 times.  
Rover has eaten 24 times.  
After Day 6  
After Day 8  
Indpnt=Ask  
Select these settings on the TABLE SETUP screen when you  
want to find specific table values, especially those that are not  
in chronological order or which span across a large range of  
numbers. TblStart and @Tbl do not apply when Indpnt=Ask.  
 
158 Chapter 8: Tables  
How many total times will Spot and Rover have eaten after 16  
days, 37 days, 52 days, and 74 days? (Refer to the previous  
examples, if necessary.)  
³
TblStart and @Tbl  
1. Setup the table where  
values are ignored.  
Indpnt=Ask and Depend=Auto.  
- f  
# # " b  
# b  
2. Display the table.  
- i  
3. Enter X=16.  
1 6 b  
4. Enter X=37, X=52, and X=74.  
3 7 b 5 2  
b 7 4 b  
Rover has eaten 48 times.  
Spot has eaten 64 times.  
After Day 16  
After Day 37  
After Day 52  
After Day 74  
Rover has eaten 111 times.  
Spot has eaten 148 times.  
Rover has eaten 156 times.  
Spot has eaten 208 times.  
Rover has eaten 222 times.  
Spot has eaten 296 times.  
Chapter 8: Tables 159  
Editing X Values from the Table Screen  
You can edit X values from the Table screen when Indpnt=Ask.  
Change X=37 to X=36. (Refer to the previous example, if  
necessary.)  
³
1. Display the current table.  
- i  
2. Highlight X=37.  
# or $ (as necessary)  
3. Move the cursor to the  
entry line.  
b
4. Clear the entry line.  
:
5. Enter 36 and insert it into  
table.  
3 6 b  
Table values  
are adjusted.  
 
160 Chapter 8: Tables  
Editing Yn from the Table Screen  
At any time you can edit Yn from the Table screen without  
returning to the Y= editor.  
Change Y1 =3x to Y1 =3x+5. (Refer to the previous example, if  
necessary.)  
³
1. Display the Table screen,  
and highlight Y1 with the  
cursor.  
- i  
" a nd $ (as  
necessary)  
2. Move the cursor to the  
entry line.  
b
3. Clear the entry line.  
:
4. Enter 3X+5.  
3 I \ 5  
5. Insert the equation back  
into the table.  
Table values  
b
are adjusted.  
6. If desired, display the  
Y= editor to confirm that Y1  
has indeed been changed.  
&
 
Chapter 8: Tables 161  
Table Setup from the Home Screen  
You can store values to TblStart and @Tbl from the Home screen  
or the Program editor. These table variable names are on the  
- } 5:Table menu.  
You also can select DependAsk, DependAuto, IndpntAsk, and  
IndpntAuto from a Program editor to turn on these settings  
during program execution.  
Assign 6 to TblStart and 3 to @Tbl from the Home screen.  
³
1. Go to Home screen and  
clear, if desired.  
- l :  
2. Store 6 to TblStart.  
6 X - } 5  
1 b  
3. Assign 3 to @Tbl.  
3 X - } 5  
2 b  
4. Display the TABLE SETUP  
screen to confirm that the  
values you entered have  
indeed been set.  
- f  
 
162 Chapter 8: Tables  
Function Graphing  
9
Steps for Graphing a Function..........................................164  
Example of Function Graphing.........................................165  
Defining Functions in the Y= Editor & .........................167  
Entering Functions......................................................167  
Editing Functions ........................................................168  
Selecting Functions .....................................................168  
Exiting the Y= Editor ..................................................169  
Selecting a Graph Style .....................................................169  
Setting the Window Format - g........................171  
Defining Window Values..................................................173  
The Window Values Screen '.........................174  
Determining Window Values for a Specific Graph...175  
Displaying a Graph............................................................177  
Smart Graph ................................................................178  
Exploring the Graph with the Free-Moving Cursor.....178  
Exploring a Function Graph with )....................178  
Controlling the Increments of a Trace.......................179  
Adjusting Window Values with the ( ZOOM Menu...181  
Zoom Box (1.......................................................182  
Zoom In and Zoom Out ( 2 and 3.....................183  
ZStandard ( 6 .....................................................184  
ZInteger ( 0 ........................................................184  
Other Zoom Commands .............................................185  
The ( MEMORY Menu................................................185  
ZPrevious ( " 1..................................................185  
SetFactors ( " 2.................................................186  
 
164 Chapter 9: Function Graphing  
Steps for Graphing a Function  
Follow these basic steps when graphing a function. You may  
not have to do all of them each time.  
&
Define or edit up to four functions  
in the Y= editor.  
Highlight =, and then  
press b to select  
or deselect.  
Select the Yn function(s) that you  
want to graph. Deselect statistical  
plots, if desired (Chapter 7).  
Y
Y
1 is selected;  
3 is deselected.  
Highlight the area to  
the left of Yn. b  
cycles through 7  
styles.  
Set the graph style for each  
selected function.  
The Above graph  
style is selected  
for Y1  
- g  
Set the window format.  
( 6 values  
Xmin=M10  
'
or  
(
Define the viewing Window  
values. This may include using the  
ZOOM menu.  
Xmax=10  
@x=.21276595744681  
Xscl=1  
Ymin=M10  
Ymax=10  
Yscl=1  
*,  
),  
or  
Graph the selected functions with  
*. ) and ( also  
automatically display the graph.  
(
 
Chapter 9: Function Graphing 165  
Example of Function Graphing  
For every cookie Tham eats, Antonio eats two. How many  
cookies does Antonio eat if Tham eats 1 cookie, 2 cookies, 3  
cookies, and 4 cookies?  
³
Find the equation that represents the relationship between  
how many cookies Tham eats and how many Antonio eats,  
and represent your answers in the form of a function graph.  
X=number of cookies Tham eats  
Y=2X  
Y=number of cookies Antonio eats  
These steps explain what the calculator does internally when  
you define a function graph. The next page shows how to use  
the TIN73 to find the answers to this example.  
1. This example uses these 2. The TIN73 solves for Y  
X values:  
using specific X values.  
Y = 2¦X  
Y = 2¦1 = 2  
Y = 2¦2 = 4  
Y = 2¦3 = 6  
Y = 2¦4 = 8  
X=1  
X=2  
X=3  
X=4  
3. It generates a table of  
(X, Y) coordinate pairs  
for you to look at.  
4. It graphs the (X,Y) pairs.  
8
6
4
2
X
1
2
3
4
Y
2
4
6
8
6
5
0
1
3
4
2
 
166 Chapter 9: Function Graphing  
Graph Y=2X on your calculator and find the solutions to the  
word problem.  
³
1. Display the Y= editor.  
Your Y= editor may vary.  
&
2. Clear Y1=, if necessary.  
Deselect all other  
defined functions, if  
necessary.  
Enter Y1=2X.  
: 2 I  
3. Show the table of (X,Y)  
coordinate pairs, if desired;  
use TblStart=0 and @Tbl=1.  
- i  
Use $ and # to scroll  
See Chapter 8: Tables for more  
information about function tables.  
the X column.  
4. Define the viewing window  
for Quadrant 1 only.  
( 4  
5. Trace the graph with the  
cursor keys.  
The trace cursor  
X- and Y-  
coordinates of  
cursor  
)
(Use ! and " to move the  
cursor along the graph.)  
6. Find the Y values when  
X=1, 2, 3,and 4.  
1 b  
2 b  
3 b  
4 b  
When X=1, Y=2.  
Chapter 9: Function Graphing 167  
Defining Functions in the Y= Editor &  
Use the Y= editor to define up to four functions, Y1, Y2, Y3, and  
Y4, in terms of the independent variable, X.  
Press & to display the Y= editor. The TIN73 graphs up to four  
defined functions at the same time.  
If the result of an expression is not a real number, that point is  
not plotted. You do not get an error.  
&
Entering Functions  
Functions can consist of variables, lists, trigonometric or  
logarithmic expressions, or variations of already defined  
functions (for example, Y2=2¦Y1). Access a Yn variable by  
pressing - } 2:Y-Vars.  
Define Y2=3X+5.  
³
1. Display the Y= editor.  
&
If you tried the chapter  
example problem, then Y1=2X.  
2. Move the cursor to the  
function that you want to  
define, Y2.  
#
3. Clear Y2, if necessary.  
:
4. Enter Y2=3X+5.  
3 I \ 5  
 
168 Chapter 9: Function Graphing  
Editing Functions  
You can edit or delete functions at any time in the Y= editor.  
Move the cursor to the function in the Y= editor that you want  
to change.  
You can:  
Use the edit keys such as / and - m to delete and  
insert characters.  
Overwrite current entries.  
Delete a function with :. Position the cursor  
anywhere on the function.  
Selecting Functions  
Even if a function is defined in the Y= editor, the TIN73 only  
graphs the function if it is selected (turned on). You know that  
a function is selected because the background behind a  
function’s equal sign (=) is dark.  
When you first define a function, it is selected automatically.  
To select or deselect a function,  
highlight its = using the cursor  
keys, and then press b.  
Y2 is selected.  
Y2 is deselected.  
You can change the on/off status of a statistical plot in the  
Y= editor. To select or deselect Plot1, Plot2, or Plot3, highlight  
the name (across the top of the Y= editor) using the cursor  
keys, and then press b. A plot is selected (on) if the  
background behind its name is dark.  
 
Chapter 9: Function Graphing 169  
See Chapter 6: Statistical Plots for more information on  
defining and graphing stat plots.  
Plot1 is selected. Plot2  
and Plot3 are deselected.  
Exiting the Y= Editor  
To select another screen, press the appropriate key, such as  
* or '. Press - l to return to the Home  
screen.  
Selecting a Graph Style  
For a defined function, you can set one of seven styles that  
specify the appearance of a function graph. The graph style  
icons described below are located to the left of Yn in the  
Y= editor. If you do not select a style, the calculator graphs all  
defined functions with the default style, Line.  
To select a style, press ! from the Yn equal sign (=) to  
highlight the graph style icon, and then press b, as  
necessary, to cycle through the seven styles. Press " " to  
return to the Yn entry line.  
The graph style icon.  
Graph styles are especially useful when graphing multiple  
functions. For example, you can set Y1 as a solid line, Y2 as a  
dotted line, and Y3 as a thick line.  
 
170 Chapter 9: Function Graphing  
Icon Style  
Description  
Example (Y1=2x)  
ç
Line  
Connects plotted points  
with a line. This is the  
default.  
è
é
ê
ë
ì
Thick  
Above  
Below  
Path  
Connects plotted points  
with a thick line.  
Shades the area above  
the graph.  
Shades the area below  
the graph.  
A circular cursor traces  
the graph and draws the  
path.  
Animate A circular cursor traces  
the graph without  
drawing the path.  
í
Dot  
Displays a dot at each  
plotted point.  
Chapter 9: Function Graphing 171  
Set the Below graph style for Y2=3X+5.  
³
1. Enter the Y= editor and  
define Y2=3X+5.  
& # : 3 I \ 5  
2. Highlight the graph style  
icon (to the left of the Y2)  
and select the graph style,  
Below.  
! ! ! ! ! !  
b b b  
3. Display the graph.  
( 6  
Setting the Window Format  
- g  
The window format screen lets you choose display settings.  
These apply to function graphing and statistical plotting.  
- g  
 
172 Chapter 9: Function Graphing  
Setting  
Turns these on or off:  
Example:  
CoordOn/  
CoordOff  
X- and Y-coordinates of  
the cursor at the bottom  
of the screen. Useful  
when tracing a graph.  
CoordOn  
GridOff/  
GridOn  
Grid lines that  
correspond to the axes  
tick marks.  
GridOn  
AxesOn/  
AxesOff  
X- and Y-axes.  
AxesOff  
LabelOff/  
LabelOn  
Labels for the X- and Y-  
axes. These settings are  
disregarded when  
AxesOff is selected.  
LabelOn is especially  
helpful when displaying  
Quadrant I (( 4)  
graphs.  
A Quadrant I graph with  
LabelOn selected  
ExprOn  
ExprOn/  
ExprOff  
Expression which is  
currently being traced.  
The expression is shown  
in the top left corner of a  
graph.  
When CoordOn and  
ExprOff are both selected,  
the number in the top-  
right corner specifies  
which function is being  
traced.  
Y1 is being traced.  
ExprOff  
 
Chapter 9: Function Graphing 173  
Defining Window Values  
If you enter a function in the Y= editor and press *, but  
nothing happens or the graph doesn’t look the way you expect  
it to, you may need to adjust the WINDOW values (').  
Depending upon which section of a graph you specify through  
the WINDOW values, the display on your calculator screen can  
look very different.  
In the example below, the first calculator screen uses WINDOW  
values which include all four quadrants for the function,  
Y1=X¦cos(X). (Calculator is in Degree mode.) Then, Quadrants I,  
II, III, and IV are shown separately, so you can see how  
WINDOW values affect the display. The next section explains  
how to redefine the values.  
Y1=X¦cos(X)  
All Quadrants  
Xmin=M500  
Xmax=500  
Xscl=90  
Ymax=500  
Xmin=M500  
Xmax=500  
Ymin=M500  
Ymax=500  
Yscl=75  
Ymin=M500  
Quadrant I  
Quadrant II  
Xmin=M500  
Xmax=0  
Xmin=0  
Xmax=500  
Xscl=90  
Ymin=0  
Xscl=90  
Ymin=0  
Ymax=500  
Yscl=75  
Ymax=500  
Yscl=75  
Quadrant III  
Xmin=M500  
Xmax=0  
Quadrant IV  
Xmin=0  
Xmax=500  
Xscl=90  
Xscl=90  
Ymin=M500  
Ymax=0  
Ymin=M500  
Ymax=0  
Yscl=75  
Yscl=75  
 
174 Chapter 9: Function Graphing  
The Window Values Screen '  
WINDOW values put specific boundaries on the display. For an  
explanation of @X, see the section in this chapter entitled  
“Controlling the Increments of a Trace.”  
To exit the WINDOW menu, select another screen by pressing  
the appropriate key, or press - l to return to the Home  
screen.  
'
Xmin  
The minimum value on the X-axis; must be less  
than Xmax.  
Xmax  
The maximum value on the X-axis.  
@x  
When tracing the graph with ), this  
determines the increments between X values.  
Xscl  
The distance between tick marks on the X-axis.  
To turn off the tick marks, set Xscl=0.  
Ymin  
The minimum value on the Y-axis; must be less  
than Ymax.  
Ymax  
Yscl  
The maximum value on the Y-axis.  
The distance between tick marks on the Y-axis.  
To turn off the tick marks, set Yscl=0.  
 
Chapter 9: Function Graphing 175  
Determining Window Values for a Specific Graph  
The following example shows how you can adjust the WINDOW  
values manually (as opposed to using the standard WINDOW  
values set by ( 6:ZStandard).  
Yuko practices the piano 50 minutes per day. How many  
minutes has he practiced after 2, 4, and 5 days? Graph your  
answer.  
³
X=number of days  
Y=number of total minutes  
Y=50X  
1. A table of coordinate  
pairs would look like  
this:  
X
2
4
5
Y
100  
200  
250  
2. A possible graph of the ordered pairs would look like this  
(the WINDOW values are labeled):  
Ymax=300  
300  
250  
200  
150  
100  
50  
The Y-axis is  
measured in  
increments of 50;  
therefore, Yscl=50.  
Xmax=6  
0
1
3
4
5
6
2
Xmin=0  
Ymin=0  
The X-axis is measured in increments  
of 1; therefore, Xscl=1.  
 
176 Chapter 9: Function Graphing  
Graph the function, Y1=50X, on your calculator.  
³
1. Display the Y= editor.  
&
2. Enter Y1=50X.  
: 5 0 I  
Note: Deselect any other functions by  
Y2 is now deselected.  
highlighting the corresponding = and  
pressing b.  
3. Graph the function using  
standard window values  
(ZStandard).  
Standard values  
do not work well  
for all functions.  
( 6  
4. Adjust the WINDOW values  
to match the sample graph  
from the previous page.  
@x adjusts  
automatically.  
'
0 # 6 # # 1 # 0 #  
3 0 0 # 5 0  
The graph now  
resembles the  
graph on the  
5. Graph Y1.  
*
previous page.  
6. Trace the graph.  
The trace  
cursor.  
)
(Use ! and " to move the  
cursor along the graph.)  
X- and Y- coordinates  
of cursor.  
Chapter 9: Function Graphing 177  
7. Find the Y values when  
X= 2, 4, and 5.  
2 b 4 b 5 b  
Note: Consider using the  
CONVERSIONS menu (- ‚ 4)  
to convert your answers (in minutes) to  
seconds, hours, days, weeks, or years.  
When X=4, Y=200.  
If you trace ()) the graph with the cursor keys to an X  
value greater than Xmax or less than Xmin, the cursor goes off  
the Graph screen, but the corresponding Y values are still  
displayed since they exist. However, you cannot enter X values  
(as you did in step 7 above) that are greater than Xmax or less  
than Xmin.  
Displaying a Graph *  
Press * to display the graph of the selected function(s).  
(Some operations, such as ) and (, display the graph  
automatically.) As a graph is plotted, the busy indicator comes  
on (upper right corner) until the graph is completely drawn  
and X and Y are updated.  
Pressing *, ), or  
selecting a ( function graphs  
all defined and selected  
functions.  
If the desired WINDOW  
values are already set, press  
* or ).  
Standard default  
window values  
are set.  
Press ( to change the  
WINDOW values and graph  
all selected functions.  
( 6:ZStandard  
is selected.  
( , then select a  
function from the menu  
 
178 Chapter 9: Function Graphing  
To pause while a graph is being drawn, press b; press  
b again to resume plotting.  
Press ^ to stop graphing. Press * to start over and plot  
again.  
Smart Graph  
When you press *, the Graph screen immediately displays  
(instead of replotting) the previous function graph(s) if no  
changes were made. If changes were made, the functions are  
replotted.  
The graph is replotted if you have:  
Changed a function.  
Selected or deselected a function.  
Changed the value of a variable in a selected function.  
Changed a WINDOW variable or a - g setting.  
Cleared drawings by selecting ClrDraw (Chapter 10: Draw).  
Changed a stat plot definition (Chapter 6: Statistical  
Plots).  
Exploring the Graph with the Free-Moving Cursor  
Use ", !, $, and # to move the cursor around the Graph  
screen. When you first display the graph, the cursor is in the  
middle of the screen but is not visible. When you press a  
cursor key, the cursor moves from that point and can be seen.  
(Remember to use the - g CoordOn setting if you want  
to see the (X,Y) coordinates at the bottom of the screen.)  
Exploring a Function Graph with )  
Pressing ) allows you to move the ! and " cursor keys  
from one plotted point to another and displays the cursor  
coordinates at the bottom of the screen (if CoordOn is set). If  
ExprOn (- g) is set, the expression being traced  
appears in the top left corner.  
 
Chapter 9: Function Graphing 179  
When more than one function (or stat plot) is selected and  
graphed, press $ and # to move the cursor from one function  
graph to another.  
The cursor movement is based on the order of the functions as  
they appear in the Y= editor and not on the appearance of the  
functions as graphed on the screen. (However, the TIN73 starts  
with selected statistical plots first.)  
The function number in the upper right corner of the display  
changes as you move to the various graphs.  
To quit ) mode, select another screen by pressing the  
appropriate key, such as ' or (, or press - l  
to return to the Home screen. Press : to stay on the  
Graph screen.  
Using QuickZoom  
While tracing, you can press b to adjust the viewing  
window. The cursor location then becomes the center of the  
new viewing window, and the cursor remains in ) mode.  
This is called QuickZoom. If you do a QuickZoom accidentally,  
and you want to return to the zoom settings in the previous  
window, select ( MEMORY 1:ZPrevious.  
Controlling the Increments of a Trace  
By assigning a specific value to @X (which is optional), you can  
control the X coordinates of a trace. @X is a WINDOW value;  
change it by pressing '.  
The TIN73 automatically calculates @X as:  
(Xmax-Xmin)  
@X =  
94  
If standard window values are set (ZStandard),  
@X = .21276595744681. If you assign a value to @X, the values for  
Xmin and Xmax are adjusted automatically according to the  
formula above.  
 
180 Chapter 9: Function Graphing  
Graph Y1=2X with ZStandard.  
³
1. Define Y1=2X in the  
Y= editor.  
& : 2 I  
Note: Deselect any other functions by  
highlighting the corresponding = and  
pressing b.  
2. Graph and trace the  
function.  
( 6  
) " ! (as  
necessary)  
The TIN73 chooses the  
X-value increments.  
Assign .5 to @X, and graph and  
³
trace Y1=2X.  
' # # . 5  
)
! and "  
X- coordinates  
change in  
increments of .5.  
Chapter 9: Function Graphing 181  
Adjusting Window Values with the  
( ZOOM Menu  
The ( ZOOM menu items allow you to adjust the viewing  
WINDOW of a graph quickly in a variety of ways. From the  
Graph screen, press ' to see the adjusted WINDOW  
values.  
1:ZBox, 2:Zoom In, and 3:Zoom Out, require you to move the  
cursor first to define the viewing window.  
(
1:ZBox  
Lets you draw a box around a specific  
section of the Graph screen. The calculator  
then zooms in on the area inside the box.  
2:Zoom In  
Lets you select a point with the cursor keys.  
The calculator then zooms in around the  
point by an amount defined by SetFactors  
(found on the ( MEMORY menu).  
3:Zoom Out  
Lets you select a point with the cursor keys.  
The calculator then zooms out around the  
point by an amount defined by SetFactors.  
4:ZQuadrant1  
5:ZSquare  
Displays Quadrant I only. Replots the graph  
immediately.  
Adjusts WINDOW variables so that a square  
or a circle is shown in correct proportion  
(instead of a rectangle or an ellipse).  
Replots the graph immediately.  
 
182 Chapter 9: Function Graphing  
6:ZStandard  
7:ZoomStat  
8:ZDecimal  
Sets the standard (default) WINDOW  
variables. Replots the graph immediately.  
Sets the WINDOW values for the current stat  
lists. Replots the graph immediately.  
Sets @X and @Y to 0.1 and centers the origin.  
Replots the graph immediately; press )  
to view the new coordinate values.  
9:ZoomFit  
Adjusts Ymin and Ymax so that the Graph  
screen displays the full range of Y variable  
values. Replots the graph immediately.  
10:ZInteger  
Lets you select a new center point, and then  
sets @X and @Y to 1 and sets Xscl and Yscl to  
10. Replots the graph immediately; press  
) to view the new coordinate values.  
11:ZTrig  
Sets WINDOW variables to preset values that  
are often appropriate for graphing trig  
functions. Replots the graph immediately.  
ZBox ( 1  
With ZBox, use the cursor keys to draw a box around a specific  
section of the Graph screen that you would like to view up  
close. The calculator then zooms in on the area inside the box  
with the cursor in the center of the screen.  
Explore the function graph,  
Y1=2X with ZBox.  
³
1. Display the graph of a  
selected function (the  
example shows Y1=2X).  
( 6  
 
Chapter 9: Function Graphing 183  
2. Select the ZBox function and  
return to the function  
graph.  
( 1  
Cursor changes  
3. Move the cursor to one  
corner of the box you want  
to define.  
to a small square.  
" ! $ # b  
4. Move the cursor to the  
corner diagonally opposite  
from the first one.  
" ! $ #  
5. Replot the graph.  
The cursor is in the  
center of the new screen.  
b
Zoom In and Zoom Out ( 2 and 3  
Zoom In magnifies the graph around the cursor location.  
Zoom Out displays a greater portion of the graph, centered on  
the cursor location, to provide a more global view. (The  
procedure is the same for both.)  
After a Zoom In or Zoom Out operation is selected, move the  
cursor, as necessary, and press b to select the new center  
point. Repeat the operation until another operation is selected  
or you exit the Graph screen.  
1. Display the graph of a  
selected function (the  
example shows Y1=X2).  
³
( 6  
 
184 Chapter 9: Function Graphing  
You want to  
zoom in on  
this side of the  
graph.  
2. Select the Zoom In operation  
for the function graph.  
( 2  
3. Move the cursor to the  
point that you want as the  
center of the new viewing  
window.  
" ! $ #  
4. Replot the graph.  
The cursor point  
b
becomes the center  
of the new window.  
Zoom Out works exactly the same way as Zoom In. The  
calculator zooms out automatically around the center point.  
ZStandard ( 6  
ZStandard is one of the more popular zoom commands because  
many function graphs look good when graphed according to  
the standard (default) WINDOW values: Xmin=M10, Xmax=10,  
Xscl=1, Ymin=-M10, Ymax=10, Yscl=1.  
If you select the ZStandard operation, either from the Graph  
screen or another screen, all selected functions are  
immediately replotted according to these standard WINDOW  
values.  
ZInteger ( 0  
ZInteger requires you first to select a new center point. The  
calculator then replots the graph immediately using the  
adjusted WINDOW values which set @X and @Y to 1, and Xscl and  
Yscl to 10.  
Select the center point (as you would do for ZoomIn and  
ZoomOut) by moving the cursor with the cursor keys, and then  
pressing b. Press ) to view the new coordinate  
values.  
 
Chapter 9: Function Graphing 185  
Other Zoom Operations  
All other Zoom commands, ZQuadrant, ZSquare, ZoomStat,  
ZDecimal, ZoomFit, and ZTrig, replot immediately all selected  
functions and adjust WINDOW values according to their  
definitions. For ZDecimal, press ) to view the new  
coordinate values.  
Examples of these operations are included in Appendix A:  
Function and Instruction Reference.  
The ( MEMORY Menu  
( "  
1:ZPrevious  
2:SetFactors  
Replots all selected function graphs using  
the WINDOW variables of the graph that was  
displayed before you executed the last ZOOM  
operation.  
Define the magnification or reduction factor  
used to Zoom In or Zoom Out around a cursor  
point. There are two: XFact and YFact.  
ZPrevious ( " 1  
Selecting ZPrevious automatically replots all selected functions  
and stat plots and adjusts WINDOW values according to the  
definition of the previous graph.  
 
186 Chapter 9: Function Graphing  
SetFactors ( " 2  
The zoom factors, XFact and YFact, are positive real numbers  
1. They define the magnification or reduction factor used to  
Zoom In or Zoom Out around a cursor point. The default values  
for both XFact and YFact are 4. Highlight the factor you want to  
change, press :, and then enter the new value. XFact and  
YFact do not affect any other Zoom operations.  
 
Drawing  
10  
The 2 DRAW Menu.....................................................188  
ClrDraw 2 1.........................................................189  
Line( 2 2 ..............................................................189  
Horizontal and Vertical 2 3 and 4 .....................191  
Shade( 2 5...........................................................193  
Circle( 2 6............................................................195  
Text( 2 7..............................................................197  
Pen 2 8 ................................................................199  
The 2 POINTS Menu....................................................201  
Pt-On(, Pt-Off(, and Pt-Change(  
2 " 1, 2, and 3...............................................202  
Pxl-On(, Pxl-Off(, and Pxl-Change(  
2 " 4, 5, and 6...............................................205  
pxl-Test( 2 " 7....................................................206  
The 2 STO Menu .........................................................206  
StorePic 2 " " 1................................................207  
RecallPic 2 " " 2...............................................208  
Deleting a Graph Picture............................................208  
 
188 Chapter 10: Drawing  
The 2 DRAW Menu  
The 2 DRAW menu items let you draw on top of function  
graphs and stat plots (see Chapter 9: Function Graphing and  
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots). The way the TIN73 interprets  
draw instructions depends on whether you accessed the menu  
items from the Home screen or the Program editor, or directly  
from a graph.  
Note: Redefining WINDOW values, graphing a Yn function or  
stat plot, or pressing ( erases all drawn items from the  
Graph screen.  
2
1:ClrDraw  
2:Line(  
Clears all drawn elements.  
Draws a line segment between two points.  
Draws a horizontal line.  
3:Horizontal  
4:Vertical  
5:Shade(  
6:Circle(  
7:Text(  
Draws a vertical line.  
Shades an area between two functions.  
Draws a circle.  
Draws text on a Graph screen.  
Activates the free-form drawing tool.  
8:Pen  
When using a 2 DRAW menu item or 2 POINTS menu  
item to draw directly on a graph, the cursor coordinates are  
displayed if CoordOn is selected (- g). If a graph is not  
displayed when you select a 2 DRAW menu item, the Home  
screen is displayed.  
 
Chapter 10: Drawing 189  
ClrDraw 2 1  
ClrDraw clears all drawn elements from the Graph screen. All  
points, lines, and shading drawn with 2 DRAW menu items  
are temporary. Therefore, if you leave the Graph screen, and  
then return, all drawings are erased.  
If you select ClrDraw from the Graph screen, the current graph  
is replotted and displayed with no drawn elements. You can  
save drawings and recall them with the 2 STO menu.  
If you select ClrDraw from the Home screen or a program, it is  
pasted to the cursor location. Pressing b executes the  
instruction, all drawings on the current graph are erased, and  
the message Done is displayed. When you display the graph  
again, all drawn elements disappear.  
Line( 2 2  
Line( draws a line from point (X ,Y ) to (X ,Y ). You can execute  
the Line( instruction from the Graph screen, the Home screen  
or Program editor.  
Line( from the Graph Screen  
To draw a line on the Graph screen:  
1. From the Graph screen, select 2 2. The cursor  
appears in the middle of the Graph screen. The X- and Y-  
coordinates are shown at the bottom of the screen. If  
they are not, you can turn them on by selecting CoordOn  
(- g).  
2. Position the cursor at the beginning point of the line  
segment that you want to draw, and then press b.  
The cursor becomes a small box.  
3. Move the cursor to the end point of the line segment, and  
then press b. The line segment is drawn as you move  
the cursor.  
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, as necessary. To cancel Line(, press  
:.  
 
190 Chapter 10: Drawing  
Draw a line segment from the Graph screen.  
³
1. Clear all previous drawings,  
and select the beginning  
point of the line segment.  
The cursor  
becomes  
a small box.  
( 6 2 1 2 2  
# $ " !  
(as necessary)  
b
2. Select the ending point of  
the line segment.  
The line segment  
is finished.  
# $ " !  
(as necessary)  
b
Line( from the Home Screen or Program Editor  
From the Home screen or the Program editor, Line( can draw  
or erase a line segment from point (X ,Y ) to (X ,Y ) on the  
Graph screen.  
You follow the Line( instruction with the coordinates of the  
beginning point (X1,Y1) and the ending point (X2,Y2) of the line  
segment. Including the argument, 0, after the X and Y  
coordinates erases a line from (X ,Y ) to (X ,Y ).  
To draw the line segment:  
Line(X1,Y1,X2,Y2)  
To erase a line segment:  
Line(X1,Y1,X2,Y2,0)  
 
Chapter 10: Drawing 191  
From the Home screen, draw a line segment from (0,0) to  
(6,9).  
³
1. From the Home screen,  
clear the Graph screen.  
- l :  
2 1 b  
2. Specify the (X,Y)  
coordinates and draw the  
line segment.  
' is set to  
standard default  
2 2  
values.  
0 ¡ 0 ¡ 6 ¡ 9 E b  
Erase the portion of the line from (2,3) to (4,6).  
³
- l 2 2  
2 ¡ 3 ¡ 4 ¡ 6 ¡ 0 E  
b
Horizontal and Vertical 2 3 and 4  
Horizontal and Vertical draw a horizontal or vertical line on the  
Graph screen. You can execute both instructions from the  
Graph screen, Home screen or the Program editor.  
 
192 Chapter 10: Drawing  
Horizontal and Vertical from the Graph Screen  
To draw a horizontal or vertical line on the Graph screen:  
1. From the Graph screen, select 2 3 or 4. The cursor  
appears in the middle of the Graph screen. The X- and  
Y-coordinates are shown at the bottom of the screen.  
2. A line is displayed that moves as you move the cursor.  
Place the cursor on the Y-coordinate (for horizontal lines)  
or the X-coordinate (for vertical lines) through which you  
want the line to pass.  
3. Press b to draw the line on the graph.  
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, as necessary. To cancel Horizontal or  
Vertical, press :.  
Draw a horizontal line from the  
Graph screen.  
' is set to  
standard default  
values.  
³
³
* 2 1 2 3  
# $ (as necessary)  
b
Draw a vertical line from the  
Graph screen.  
* 2 4  
" ! (as necessary)  
b
Horizontal and Vertical from the Home Screen or  
Program Editor  
From the Home screen or the Program editor, Horizontal draws  
a horizontal line at Y=y. y can be an integer or an expression.  
Horizontal y  
 
Chapter 10: Drawing 193  
Vertical draws a vertical line at X=x. x can be an integer or an  
expression.  
Vertical x  
From the Home screen, draw a  
horizontal line at Y=4.  
³
' is set to  
- l :  
2 1 b 2 3  
standard default  
values.  
4 b  
Draw a vertical line at X=4.  
³
- l 2 4  
4 b  
Shade( 2 5  
With Shade(, you can shade areas above and below functions  
on the Graph screen.  
You can execute Shade( only from the Home screen or in a  
programming instruction. Shade( accepts two mandatory  
arguments and four optional arguments. However, you cannot  
skip any arguments. For example, if you want to specify the  
5th argument, pattern, you also must specify the 3rd and 4th  
arguments, left and right.  
Shade(lower,upper[,left,right,pattern,res])  
 
194 Chapter 10: Drawing  
To use Shade( from the Home screen or a program:  
1. Select 2 5.  
2. Enter two functions, lower and upper, in terms of X. After  
the instruction is executed, the calculator graphs the  
functions and shades above lower and below upper.  
3. Enter left and right, the left and right X boundaries, if  
desired. Xmin and Xmax are the defaults.  
4. Enter the shading pattern number, pattern, if desired.  
The four shading patterns are:  
1=Vertical (default)  
2=Horizontal  
3=Diagonal upper left to lower right  
4=Diagonal lower left to upper right  
5. Specify the pattern resolution, res, an integer number  
between 1 and 8, if desired.  
res=1 is the default and represents the lowest resolution  
(lines drawn very close together). res=8 represents the  
highest resolution (lines drawn very far apart).  
6. Press b to execute the instruction.  
Shade above the function Y=X-2  
(lower) and below the function  
³
Y=X3-8X (upper).  
Y=X-2  
(The functions are shown to the  
right as they would look if  
graphed individually.)  
Y=X3-8X  
Chapter 10: Drawing 195  
- l :  
2 1 b  
2 5 I T 2 ¡ I  
1 3 T 8 I E b  
Enter a left X boundary, M2, and a right X boundary, 5, for the  
same functions.  
³
- l 2 1 b  
- £ - £  
! ¡ a 2 ¡ 5 E b  
`
5 is the right  
boundary.  
M2 is the left boundary.  
Circle( 2 6  
You can execute the Circle( instruction from the Graph screen,  
Home screen, or the Program editor.  
Circle( from the Graph Screen  
To draw a circle on the Graph screen:  
1. From the Graph screen, select 2 6. The cursor appears  
in the middle of the Graph screen. The X- and Y-  
coordinates are shown at the bottom of the screen.  
2. Place the cursor at the center point of the circle you want  
to draw. Press b.  
3. Move the cursor to a point on the circumference. Press  
b. The circle is drawn automatically on the graph.  
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, as necessary. To cancel Circle(, press  
:.  
 
196 Chapter 10: Drawing  
Draw a circle from the Graph screen.  
³
1. Clear all previous drawings,  
and select the center point  
of the circle.  
* 2 1 2 6  
# $ " ! (as  
necessary)  
b
2. Move the cursor to a point  
on the circumference.  
$ # " !  
(as necessary)  
3. Draw the circle.  
b
Circle( from the Home Screen or Program Editor  
From the Home screen or the Program editor, you can draw a  
circle on the Graph screen. Circle( accepts three mandatory  
arguments: X and Y, the coordinates of the center point of the  
circle, and radius, the radius length which must be a positive  
real number.  
Circle(X,Y,radius)  
Draw a circle with center point=(0,0) and radius=7.  
³
- l : 2  
1 b 2 6  
0 ¡ 0 ¡ 7 E b  
Note: Use ( 5:ZSquare to adjust  
them and make the circle circular.  
 
Chapter 10: Drawing 197  
Text( 2 7  
You can access Text( from the Graph screen, Home screen, or  
the Program editor. Text( allows you to draw text on the Graph  
screen when a graph is displayed. Use the Text editor  
(- t) to access all text characters. You may enter TIN73  
functions, variables, and instructions as text. The font is  
proportional, so the exact number of characters you can place  
on the graph varies.  
Text( from the Graph Screen  
To draw text on the Graph screen:  
1. From the Graph screen, select 2 7. The cursor  
appears in the middle of the Graph screen.  
2. Place the cursor at the point where you want the text to  
begin.  
3. Press - t to display the Text editor. Select the text  
characters. Highlight Done with the cursor, and then press  
b. The selected text is pasted onto the Graph screen.  
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, as necessary. To cancel Text(, press  
:.  
From the Graph screen, Label Quadrant I with QUAD1.  
³
1. Clear all previous drawings,  
and select the beginning  
point where you want the  
text to start.  
* 2 1 2 7  
# $ " !  
(as necessary)  
2. Using the Text editor, enter  
QUAD1.  
- t Q b  
U b A b  
D b 1 Done b  
 
198 Chapter 10: Drawing  
Text( from the Home Screen or the Program Editor  
From the Home screen or the Program editor, you can draw  
text on the Graph screen.  
Text( accepts three mandatory arguments: row and column,  
which specify the pixel value of the top-left corner of the first  
character, and text, which can be functions, variables, or text  
instructions.  
Text(row,column,text)  
Text(row,column,"text")  
row is an integer between 0 and 57 and column is an integer  
between 0 and 94. Therefore, (0,0) is the top left corner, (0,94),  
is the top right corner, (57,0) is the lower left corner, and  
(57,94) is the lower right corner. If you try to draw text on any  
edge of the Graph screen, the calculator only displays text that  
fits; text does not wrap to the next row.  
If text is surrounded by quotation marks (" ") (found in the  
Text editor), the calculator interprets any characters,  
numbers, or expressions as text. If the quotation marks are  
omitted, the TIN73 calculates and displays the result, if  
applicable, with up to 10 characters.  
Label Quadrant I with QUAD1 from the Home screen. Start the  
text at the pixel value of (10,60).  
³
1. Clear all previous drawings,  
and select the beginning  
point of the text.  
- l :  
2 1 b  
2 7 1 0 ¡ 6 0 ¡  
 
Chapter 10: Drawing 199  
2. Using the Text editor, enter  
"QUAD1".  
- t " b  
Q b U b  
A b D b 1  
" b Done b E  
b
Pen 2 8  
Pen draws any shape you want, including irregular or unusual  
ones.  
You can execute Pen only from the Graph screen. You cannot  
execute Pen from the Home screen or the Program editor.  
To draw your own shape on the Graph screen:  
1. From the Graph screen, select 2 8. The cursor  
appears in the middle of the Graph screen. The X- and Y-  
coordinates are shown at the bottom of the screen.  
2. Place the cursor at the point where you want to begin  
drawing. Press b to turn on the pen.  
3. Move the cursor. As you move the cursor, you draw on  
the graph, shading one pixel at a time.  
4. Press b to turn off the pen.  
5. Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4, as necessary. To cancel Pen,  
press :.  
 
200 Chapter 10: Drawing  
Draw a happy face on the Graph screen.  
³
1. Clear all previous drawings,  
and then select AxesOff.  
* 2 1  
- g # # "  
b
2. First draw a circle.  
* 2 6 b  
$ (as necessary)  
b
3. Use Pen( to draw the eyes.  
2 8  
# and !  
(as necessary)  
b b  
" (as necessary)  
b b  
4. Draw the mouth.  
# b (to begin  
smile)  
! # (repeat as  
necessary)  
! (repeat as  
necessary)  
! $ (repeat as  
necessary)  
Chapter 10: Drawing 201  
The 2 POINTS Menu  
The 2 POINTS menu items let you draw or erase individual  
points or pixels on top of function graphs and stat plots (see  
Chapter 9: Function Graphing and Chapter 6: Statistical Plots).  
The way the TIN73 interprets the point instructions depends  
on whether you accessed the instructions from the Home  
screen or the Program editor, or directly from a graph.  
Redefining WINDOW values (( 6:ZStandard), graphing a Yn  
function or stat plot, or pressing ( erases all drawn items  
from the Graph screen.  
Note: All examples in this section show the Graph screen set  
to standard WINDOW values and with all Yn functions and stat  
plots deselected.  
2 "  
1:Pt-On(  
Turns on a point.  
2:Pt-Off(  
Turns off a point.  
3:Pt-Change(  
4:Pxl-On(  
Toggles a point on or off.  
Turns on a pixel.  
5:Pxl-Off(  
Turns off a pixel.  
6:Pxl-Change(  
7:pxl-Test(  
Toggles a pixel on or off.  
Returns 1 if pixel is on, 0 if pixel is off.  
 
202 Chapter 10: Drawing  
Pt-On(, Pt-Off(, and Pt-Change(  
2 " 1, 2, and 3  
Pt-On(, Pt-Off(, and Pt-Change( turn on, off, or change the status  
of a point from the Graph screen, Home screen, or Program  
editor.  
A point (as opposed to a pixel) is tied directly to the X- and Y-  
axes. The screen is divided into X- and Y-coordinates as  
specified by (X,Y). The points that you can view depend upon  
how the WINDOW values are defined.  
For example, if standard WINDOW values are set, M10X10 and  
M10Y10. This does not mean that points outside these  
boundaries do not exist, only that you cannot see any turned  
on points outside these boundaries.  
Pt-On(, Pt-Off( and Pt-Change( from the Graph Screen  
To use Pt-On(, Pt-Off(, and Pt-Change( on the Graph screen:  
1. From the Graph screen, select 2 " 1, 2, or 3. The  
cursor appears in the middle of the Graph screen. The X-  
and Y-coordinates are shown at the bottom of the screen.  
2. Move the cursor:  
To the position where you want to draw the point  
(Pt-On( ).  
To the position of the point you want to erase  
(Pt-Off( ).  
To the position of the point you want to change  
(toggle on or off) (Pt-Change( ).  
3. Press b to draw, erase, or change the point.  
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, as necessary. To cancel Pt-On(,  
Pt-Off(, or Pt-Change(, press :.  
 
Chapter 10: Drawing 203  
Draw points from the Graph screen.  
³
1. Select AxesOn, if desired,  
and then clear all previous  
drawings.  
- g # # b  
* 2 1  
2. Select the beginning point  
where you want to draw the  
point.  
2 " 1 " ! $ #  
(as necessary)  
3. Draw the point.  
b
4. Repeat as necessary.  
Erase four points from the  
Graph screen.  
³
1. Move the cursor to the  
point you want to erase.  
* 2 " 2  
" ! $ #  
(as necessary) b  
2. Repeat as necessary.  
204 Chapter 10: Drawing  
Pt-On(, Pt-Off(, and Pt-Change( from the Home Screen  
and Program Editor  
From the Home screen or the Program editor, you can draw,  
erase, or change a point’s status on the Graph screen.  
Pt-On(, Pt-Off(, and Pt-Change( accept two mandatory arguments:  
X and Y, which specify the coordinates of the point that you  
want to draw, erase, or change. Pt-On( and Pt-Off( have one  
optional argument, mark, which determines the point’s  
appearance. Specify 1 (default), 2, or 3, where:  
1(default)= ¦ (dot) 2= (box)  
3= + (cross)  
If you specify mark to turn on a point with Pt-On(, you must  
specify the same mark when you turn off the point with Pt-Off(.  
Pt-Change( does not have the mark argument.  
Also note that if, for example, you specify the point (20,30) but  
your viewing window is set to the standard values, you do not  
see the point since the viewing window does not include the  
specific part of the graph where (20,30) exists. Press '  
to redefine the WINDOW values.  
Note: Redefining WINDOW values, graphing a Yn function or  
stat plot, or pressing ( erases all drawn items from the  
Graph screen.  
Pt-On(X,Y[,mark])  
Pt-Off(X,Y[,mark])  
Pt-Change(X,Y)  
Turn on point (M5,3) and assign the box mark to it.  
³
- l :  
2 1 b 2 "  
1 a 5 ¡ 3 ¡ 2 E b  
 
Chapter 10: Drawing 205  
Pxl-On(, Pxl-Off(, and Pxl-Change(  
2 " 4, 5, and 6  
Pxl-On(, Pxl-Off(, and Pxl-Change( turn on, off, or change the  
status of a pixel only from the Home screen or the Program  
editor.  
When you select a pixel instruction from the 2 POINTS  
menu, the TIN73 returns you to the Home screen or the  
Program editor. Since the pixel instructions are not  
interactive, they cannot be used from the Graph screen.  
A pixel is independent of the X- and Y- axes. It is based instead  
on the physical size of the screen. The screen is divided into  
pixels specified as (row,column). 0row62 and 0column94.  
Pxl-On(, Pxl-Off(, and Pxl-Change( accept two mandatory  
arguments: row and column, which specify the pixel that you  
want to draw, erase, or change.  
Pxl-On(row,column)  
Pxl-Off(row,column)  
Pxl-Change(row,column)  
Turn on the pixel at (45,35).  
³
1. From the Home screen,  
clear the Graph screen.  
- l :  
2 1 b  
2. Turn on the pixel.  
2 " 4  
4 5 ¡ 3 5 E b  
 
206 Chapter 10: Drawing  
pxl-Test( 2 " 7  
You can execute pxl-Test( only from the Home screen or the  
Program editor.  
pxl-Test( tests a pixel at (row,column) to see if it is turned on or  
off. If it is on, pxl-Test( returns 1. If it is off, pxl-Test( returns 0.  
0row57 and 0column94.  
pxl-Test(row,column)  
Test to see if the pixel at (45,35) is turned on or off.  
³
- l 2 " 7  
4 5 ¡ 3 5 E b  
The 2 STO Menu  
The 2 STO (store) menu lets you store or recall up to three  
pictures in memory. When you select an instruction from the  
2 STO menu, the TIN73 returns to the Home screen or the  
Program editor. The picture instructions are not interactive,  
which means you cannot use them from the Graph screen.  
Note: All examples in this section show the Graph screen set  
to standard WINDOW values (( 6:ZStandard) and with all Yn  
functions and stat plots deselected.  
2 " "  
1:StorePic  
2:RecallPic  
Stores the current picture.  
Recalls a stored picture.  
 
Chapter 10: Drawing 207  
StorePic 2 " " 1  
You can execute StorePic only from the Home screen or  
Program editor. You can store up to three pictures, each of  
which is an image of the current graph display, in picture  
variables Pic1, Pic2, or Pic3. Later, you can superimpose the  
stored picture onto a displayed graph from the Home screen  
or a program.  
A picture includes drawn elements, plotted functions, axes,  
and tick marks. The picture does not include axes labels,  
lower and upper bound indicators, prompts, or cursor  
coordinates. Any parts of the display hidden by these items are  
stored with the picture.  
StorePic accepts one mandatory argument, number, which  
specifies the number of the picture variable to which you want  
to store the picture. For example, if you enter 3, the TIN73  
stores the picture to Pic3. Pressing b displays the current  
graph and stores the picture.  
StorePic number  
To see which graph variables have pictures stored to them, use  
the PICTURE secondary menu (- } 4:Picture). Each  
variable Pic1, Pic2, and Pic3 is marked as either Defined or  
Empty. If selected, the variable is pasted next to StoPic.  
Store the drawn picture (to the  
right) in picture variable 2.  
³
For more information on drawing lines,  
see the previous section entitled  
“Line(.”  
- l :  
2 " " 1 2 b  
You return to  
the Graph  
screen.  
 
208 Chapter 10: Drawing  
RecallPic 2 " " 2  
You can execute RecallPic only from the Home screen or  
Program editor. Use RecallPic to recall the graph picture stored  
in the picture variables Pic1, Pic2, or Pic3.  
RecallPic accepts one mandatory argument, number, which  
specifies the number of the picture variable that you want to  
recall. For example, if you enter 3, the TIN73 recalls Pic3.  
Pressing b displays the current graph and superimposes  
Pic3 on it. Since pictures are drawings, you cannot trace a  
curve that is part of a picture.  
RecallPic number  
To see which graph variables have pictures stored to them, use  
the PICTURE secondary menu (- } 4:Picture). Each  
variable Pic1, Pic2, and Pic3 is marked as either Defined or  
Empty. If selected, the variable is pasted next to RecallPic.  
³
1. Clear the Graph screen.  
- l  
2 1 b *  
2. Recall picture variable 2. (A  
picture was stored to it in  
the previous example.)  
2 " " 2 2 b  
You return to the  
Graph screen.  
Deleting a Graph Picture  
To delete graph pictures from memory, use the MEMORY  
DELETE:Pic menu (- Ÿ 4:Delete 7:Pic).  
 
Trigonometry  
11  
The - u TRIG Menu...................................................210  
Trig Functions - u 1, 3, and 5..........................210  
Inverse Trig Functions - u 2, 4, and 6 ...............211  
Angle Mode Settings ..................................................211  
Graphing Trig Functions ...................................................214  
The - u ANGLE Menu...............................................215  
r
Using ¡ and to Specify Degrees and Radians  
- u " 1 and 4...............................................216  
Converting between Degrees and Radians...............217  
Entering Angles in DMS Notation  
- u " 1, 2, and 3..........................................218  
8DMS - u " 5 ..................................................220  
 
210 Chapter 11: Trigonometry  
The - u TRIG Menu  
The - u TRIG (trigonometry) menu accesses the  
trigonometric (trig) functions (sin(, cos(, tan() and their inverses  
(sin-1(, cos-1(, tan-1().  
- u  
The sine, cosine, and tangent of an angle (q) are defined by the  
lengths of the sides of a right triangle.  
opposite  
sin q =  
cos q =  
tan q =  
hypotenuse  
hypotenuse  
opposite  
adjacent  
q
hypotenuse  
adjacent  
opposite  
adjacent  
Trig Functions - u 1, 3, and 5  
All trig functions return the sine, cosine, or tangent of a real  
number, expression, or a each element in a list. If value is a  
list, the calculator calculates the trig function of each element  
in the list, and a list is returned.  
sin(value)  
cos(value)  
tan(value)  
For tan, value cannot be 90, 270, etc., or M90, M270, etc. In other  
words, since tan q=sinàcos by definition, tan q is undefined  
when cos q=0.  
 
Chapter 11: Trigonometry 211  
Hint: This chapter’s section entitled “Graphing Trig  
Functions” contains an example which graphs and traces  
Y1=tan(X) to show undefined Y values for the function.  
Inverse Trig Functions - u 2, 4, and 6  
The inverse trig functions calculate the smallest angle that  
gives a particular sine, cosine, or tangent. For example, sin-1(.5)  
calculates the angle whose sine is .5.  
sin-1(value)  
cos-1(value)  
tan-1(value)  
For cos-1 (also called arccosine) and sin-1 (also called arcsine),  
M1value1.  
All inverse trig functions return the arcsine, arccosine, or  
arctangent of value or of each element in a list. If value is a  
list, the calculator calculates the inverse trig function of each  
element in the list, and a list is returned.  
Angle Mode Settings  
In trig calculations, angles are interpreted as degrees ( ¡ ) or  
radians ( r ), depending on the Angle mode setting, Degree or  
Radian.  
Set the Angle mode from the mode screen.  
.
Depending on the Angle mode, sin(1) is the sine of either 1¡ or  
1r. As you can see in the following illustration, 1¡ is not the  
same as 1r. Therefore, sin(1¡) ƒ sin(1r ). For correct results,  
enter angle values in the same units (degrees or radians) as the  
Angle mode setting.  
 
212 Chapter 11: Trigonometry  
r
Radians (  
)
Degrees (¡ )  
p
90¡  
2
1
360  
1
2p  
1¡=  
of a circle  
r
1 =  
of a circle  
180¡  
0¡, 360¡  
p
0, 2p  
r
Note: 1 = 57.29578¡  
270¡  
3p  
2
To perform a trig calculation, select the Angle mode for your  
value and then select the function. In Radian Angle mode,  
angles are often defined in terms of p.  
Calculate sin(30) in both degrees and radians.  
³
1. Select the Degree Angle  
mode.  
. # # b  
2. Return to the Home screen,  
and clear it, if desired.  
- l :  
3. Enter sin(30).  
- u 1  
3 0 E b  
4. Change to the Radian Angle  
mode, and return to the  
Home screen.  
. # # " b  
- l  
5. Recall the previous entry to  
recalculate sin(30).  
- £ b  
 
Chapter 11: Trigonometry 213  
In Degree Angle mode, calculate tan-1(1). Check your answer.  
³
1. Select the Degree Angle  
mode.  
. # # b  
2. Return to the Home screen,  
and clear it, if desired.  
- l :  
3. Enter tan-1(1).  
- u 6  
1 E b  
4. Using the result, enter  
tan(45).  
This confirms the  
- u 5  
previous result.  
4 5 E b  
In Radian mode, calculate cos(p/4).  
³
1. Select the Radian Angle  
mode.  
. # # " b  
2. Return to the Home screen,  
and clear it, if desired.  
- l :  
3. Enter cos(p/4).  
- u 3  
- „ F 4 E b  
214 Chapter 11: Trigonometry  
Graphing Trig Functions  
In addition to using the calculator to solve trig functions  
numerically, as described so far in this chapter, you can solve  
trig functions graphically.  
For more information on generating function tables or  
graphing functions, see Chapter 8: Tables and Chapter 9:  
Function Graphing.  
In Degree Angle mode, find four Y values where Y1=tan(X) is  
undefined. Check your answer by displaying the table for Y1.  
³
1. Select Degree Angle mode, if  
necessary.  
. # # b  
2. Deselect all Yn functions.  
- } 2 6 b  
3. Define Y1=tan(X) in the  
Y= editor.  
& : - u 5  
I E  
4. Graph the function using  
the ZTrig command.  
( $ b  
5. Trace the graph and  
observe where the Y value  
is undefined.  
)
" and ! , as necessary  
When X=90,  
Y is undefined.  
 
Chapter 11: Trigonometry 215  
6. Use the table to check your  
result. Set TblStart=90,  
@Tbl=60, Indpnt=Auto and  
Depend=Auto.  
- f 9 0 # 6 0  
- i  
$ or # , as necessary  
From these two screens, you  
know that tan(X) is undefined at  
X=M270, M90, 90, 270, 450.  
The - u ANGLE Menu  
The ANGLE menu lets you specify the unit (degrees, radians, or  
DMS) of an angle, and it lets you convert an angle from one  
unit to another.  
- u "  
1:¡  
2:'  
Designates an angle as degrees, regardless of the  
current Angle mode setting or DMS notation.  
'
"
In DMS (degrees¡ minutes seconds ) notation,  
specifies the minutes.  
'
"
3:"  
In DMS (degrees¡ minutes seconds ) notation,  
specifies the seconds.  
r
4:  
Specifies an angle as radians, regardless of the  
current Angle mode setting.  
'
Converts an angle to DMS (degrees¡ minutes  
5:8DMS  
"
seconds ) notation.  
 
216 Chapter 11: Trigonometry  
r
Using ¡ and to Specify Degrees and Radians  
- u " 1 and 4  
Normally, angles are interpreted according to the Angle mode  
setting. However, you can specify an angle as degrees or  
radians regardless of the Angle mode.  
Suppose a series of trig calculations uses radians, but a few  
use degrees. Rather than change from Radian to Degree Angle  
mode and then back again, you can stay in the Radian Angle  
mode and specify some angles as degrees.  
In Radian Angle mode, calculate sin(p/3). Then, without  
changing to the Degree Angle mode, calculate sin(60¡).  
³
1. Select Radian Angle mode.  
. # # " b  
2. Return to the Home screen,  
and clear it, if desired.  
- l :  
3. Enter sin(p/3).  
- u 1 - „ F 3  
E b  
4. Use the ¡ designator to  
enter sin(60¡).  
- u 1  
60 is specified as degrees  
6 0 - u " 1  
E b  
even in Radian angle mode.  
r
p/3 =60¡.  
r
Likewise, you can use to specify an angle as radians in the  
Degree Angle mode.  
 
Chapter 11: Trigonometry 217  
Converting between Degrees and Radians  
Set the Angle mode to the unit you want to convert to because  
results are displayed according to the Angle mode setting.  
Then use ¡ or r to designate the unit to convert from.  
Convert 50¡ to radians.  
³
1. Set Angle mode to Radian.  
. # # " b  
2. Return to the Home screen,  
and clear it, if desired.  
- l :  
3. Enter the value to convert,  
50. Use ¡ to specify it as  
degrees.  
50¡ converted to  
radians.  
5 0 - u " 1 b  
Convert 50r to degrees.  
³
1. Set the Angle mode to  
Degree.  
. # # b  
- l  
2. Enter the value to convert,  
50. Use r to specify it as  
radians.  
r
50 converted to  
degrees.  
5 0 - u " 4 b  
 
218 Chapter 11: Trigonometry  
Entering Angles in DMS Notation  
- u " 1, 2, and 3  
'
"
DMS (degrees¡ minutes seconds ) is often used for angles  
involving latitude and longitude. The degrees can be any real  
number; minutes and seconds must be 0. To enter an angle  
in DMS notation, use the - u ANGLE menu.  
30 - u " 1  
10 - u " 2  
23 - u " 3  
30¡10'23"  
If you enter the angle of a trig function, where the angle is in  
DMS notation (as shown in the following example), the angle  
is interpreted as degrees, even in Radian mode.  
'
"
Calculate sin(30¡10 23 ) in Degree and Radian mode.  
³
1. Select Degree Angle mode.  
. # # b  
2. Return to the Home screen,  
and clear it, if desired.  
- l :  
3. Enter sin(30¡10'23").  
- u 1  
3 0 - u " 1  
1 0 - u " 2  
2 3 - u " 3 E  
b
4. Select Radian Angle mode.  
. # # " b  
 
Chapter 11: Trigonometry 219  
5. Calculate sin(30¡10'23").  
- l  
- £ b  
DMS notation overrides  
Radian mode.  
In Radian mode, if you enter an angle only (without a trig  
function) in DMS notation (as shown in the following  
example), the angle is interpreted as degrees, but converted to  
a result in radians.  
"
'
Convert 20¡10 14 to radians.  
³
1. Select Radian Angle mode.  
. # # " b  
2. Return to the Home screen,  
and clear it, if desired.  
- l :  
3. Enter 20¡10'14".  
2 0 - u " 1  
1 0 - u " 2  
1 4 - u " 3  
b
The result is in radians.  
220 Chapter 11: Trigonometry  
8DMS - u " 5  
To convert angles to DMS notation, use 8DMS from the  
- u ANGLE menu.  
angle8DMS  
Entering ¡ overrides Radian mode. For example, if you enter  
50¡8DMS in Radian mode, the calculator still interprets 50 as  
degrees and displays the DMS equivalent.  
In Radian mode, if you enter 508DMS (no ¡), the calculator  
interprets 50 as radians, and then displays the DMS equivalent.  
For example, 508DMS in Radian mode shows 2804¡47'20.312".  
Likewise, in Degree mode, if you enter 508DMS (no ¡), the  
calculator interprets 50 as degrees, and then displays the DMS  
equivalent. For example, 508DMS in Degree mode shows 50¡0'0".  
In Degree Angle mode, convert 50.672¡ to DMS.  
³
1. Select Degree Angle mode.  
. # # b  
2. Return to the Home screen,  
and clear it, if desired.  
- l :  
3. Convert 50.672¡ to DMS.  
5 0 . 6 7 2  
Entering ¡ after 50.672 is  
optional in Degree mode.  
- u " 5  
b
 
Programming  
12  
What Is a Program? ...........................................................223  
Steps for Creating a Program ...........................................223  
Creating and Naming a New Program.............................224  
Create New 8 " " 1..........................................224  
The Program Editor.....................................................225  
Entering Program Commands...........................................226  
The 8 CTL Menu ..........................................................227  
If 8 1 ....................................................................229  
If-Then 8 1 and 2 ................................................229  
If-Then-Else 8 1, 2, and 3....................................230  
For( 8 4 ................................................................231  
While 8 5.............................................................232  
Repeat 8 6...........................................................232  
End 8 7 ................................................................233  
Pause 8 8 .............................................................233  
Lbl and Goto 8 9 and 0.......................................234  
IS>( 8 A................................................................235  
DS<( 8 B...............................................................235  
Menu( 8 C............................................................236  
SetMenu( 8 D......................................................237  
prgm 8 E..............................................................238  
Return 8 F............................................................239  
Stop 8 G...............................................................239  
DelVar 8 H...........................................................240  
GraphStyle( 8 I ....................................................240  
 
222 Chapter 12: Programming  
The 8 I/O Menu ........................................................... 241  
Input 8 " 1......................................................... 242  
Prompt 8 " 2 ..................................................... 244  
Disp 8 " 3........................................................... 244  
DispGraph 8 " 4 ................................................ 245  
DispTable 8 " 5 ................................................. 245  
Output( 8 " 6 .................................................... 245  
getKey 8 " 7...................................................... 246  
ClrScreen and ClrTable 8 " 8 and 9.................. 247  
GetCalc( 8 " 0.................................................... 247  
Get( and Send( 8 " A and B.............................. 247  
Editing Program Commands............................................. 248  
Inserting, Deleting, and Editing Command Lines..... 249  
Copying and Renaming a Program............................ 249  
Calling a Program from Another Program................ 250  
Executing a Program......................................................... 251  
Breaking Out of a Program........................................ 252  
Debugging a Program ...................................................... 252  
Chapter 12: Programming 223  
What Is a Program?  
A program is a series of one or more programming commands  
to be executed by the calculator. Each command is an  
expression or instruction and begins with a colon (:). The  
number and size of programs that the TIN73 can store is  
limited only by available memory.  
Steps for Creating a Program  
Follow these basic steps when creating and executing a  
program. You may not have to do all of them each time.  
8 " "  
b
Create a new program  
by naming it.  
Enter, delete, and edit  
command lines in the  
Program editor.  
- l exits the  
Program editor.  
8
prgmname b  
b
Execute the Program.  
8"  
prgmname b  
If it is necessary to debug the  
program, go back to the Program  
editor to edit commands.  
 
224 Chapter 12: Programming  
Creating and Naming a New Program  
You create a new program by selecting 1:Create New from the  
8 NEW menu. You then are prompted to name the new  
program.  
8 " "  
1:Create New  
Creates a new program and displays  
the PROGRAM Name= screen, prompting  
you to name the new program.  
Create New 8 " " 1  
After you select 1:Create New from the 8 NEW menu, the  
TIN73 displays Name= to prompt you to name the new program.  
A program name can be one to eight characters long. The first  
character must be a letter from A to Z. The second through  
eighth characters can be any combination of letters and  
numbers.  
Access letters from the Text editor (- t). If you type a  
name with more than eight characters, the calculator accepts  
the first eight characters and disregards the rest.  
Create a new program and name it PROGRAM1.  
³
1. Display the 8 NEW  
menu.  
8 " "  
2. Select 1:Create New.  
b
 
Chapter 12: Programming 225  
3. Enter PROGRAM1 at the  
cursor.  
Begin entering the  
name at the cursor.  
- t P b  
R b O b  
G b R b  
A b M b 1  
Done b  
4. Display the Program editor  
with the name of the  
program on the top line.  
b
The Program Editor  
You use the Program editor to enter and edit program  
commands. Enter the Program editor in one of two ways:  
Create and name a new program from the 8 NEW  
menu with 1:Create New. Once the name is entered, the  
calculator automatically enters the Program editor with  
the name of the program on the top line.  
Select a program to edit from the 8 EDIT menu  
(8 "). The calculator automatically enters the  
Program editor with the name of the program on the top  
line.  
Each new command line in the Program editor begins with a  
colon (:). Enter programming commands at the cursor. You  
can enter more than one command per line. To do this,  
separate the two commands with a colon (- |  
$ $ $ b). If the command line is longer than the screen  
is wide, the command wraps to the next screen line.  
To exit the Program editor, press - l. All commands are  
automatically saved.  
 
226 Chapter 12: Programming  
8 " prgmName  
– or –  
8 " " 1 - t  
prgmName D o n e  
b b  
Program Name  
Entering Program Commands  
The calculator contains built-in programming commands on  
three menus. You access these menus by pressing 8 from  
the Program editor. The first two menus, the 8 CTL menu  
and the 8 I/O menu, are discussed extensively in the next  
two sections. The third menu, the 8 EXEC menu, lets you  
call existing programs as subroutines. It is discussed in the  
section entitled, “Executing a Program.”  
Entering Functions, Instructions, and Variables  
In the Program editor, you also can select from function  
menus on the calculator (1, - ‚, etc.), change  
settings (., - f, etc.), as well as select function  
keys (=, 6, etc.). Simply press the appropriate key, and the  
function, instruction, or mode setting is pasted at the cursor  
location in the Program editor. Also, remember that all  
instructions and functions are listed in the CATALOG  
(- |).  
Programs can access variables and lists saved in memory. If a  
program stores a new value to a variable or list, the program  
changes the value in memory during execution.  
The following menus or keystroke sequences change  
appearance or operate differently when accessed from the  
Program editor:  
8 (accesses programming command menus)  
- e (changes appearance)  
- † (changes appearance)  
- f (changes appearance)  
 
Chapter 12: Programming 227  
2 DRAW (excludes 8:Pen)  
1 MATH (excludes 6:Solver)  
( MEMORY (excludes 2:SetFactors)  
Exiting the Program Editor  
Pressing &, ', *, - Ÿ, - l, or 3 exits  
the Program editor and displays the applicable screen. The  
calculator automatically saves all command lines in memory  
whenever you exit the Program editor.  
The 8 CTL Menu  
You can only access the 8 CTL (control) menu by pressing  
8 from the Program editor. These programming  
commands help control the flow of an executing program.  
They make it easy to repeat or skip a group of commands  
(block) during program execution.  
If, For(, While, Repeat, IS>(, and DS<( check a defined condition to  
determine which command to execute next. Conditions  
frequently use relational or Boolean tests (Chapter 2: Math  
Operations). When you select an item from the menu, the  
name is pasted to the cursor location on a command line in the  
program. To return to the Program editor without selecting an  
item, press :.  
8 (from the Program  
editor only)  
 
228 Chapter 12: Programming  
1:If  
Creates a conditional test.  
2:Then  
Executes commands when If condition is  
true.  
3:Else  
Executes commands when If condition is  
false.  
4:For(  
Creates an incrementing loop.  
Creates a conditional loop.  
5:While  
6:Repeat  
7:End  
Creates a conditional loop.  
Signifies the end of a block.  
Pauses program execution.  
Defines a label.  
8:Pause  
9:Lbl  
0:Goto  
Goes to a label.  
A:IS>(  
Increments and skips if greater than.  
Decrements and skips if less than.  
Defines menu items and branches.  
Views and modifies variables on a menu.  
Executes a program as a subroutine.  
Returns from a subroutine.  
Stops execution.  
B:DS<(  
C:Menu(  
D:SetMenu(  
E:prgm  
F:Return  
G:Stop  
H:DelVar  
I:GraphStyle(  
Deletes a variable from within program.  
Designates the graph style to be drawn.  
Chapter 12: Programming 229  
If 8 1  
Use If to execute one command depending upon condition. If  
condition is true (non-zero), then command1 is executed. If  
condition is false (zero), then command1 is skipped. If  
instructions can be nested.  
:If condition  
:command1 (if true)  
:command2  
Write a program named COUNT that adds one to variable A and  
displays the current value until A2.  
³
PROGRAM:COUNT  
:0"A  
Press b.  
:Lbl Z  
:A+1"A  
:Disp "A IS",A  
:Pause  
:If A2  
:Stop  
:Goto Z  
If-Then 8 1 and 2  
Use If with Then to execute more than one command (block)  
depending upon condition. If condition is true (non-zero),  
then block is executed. If condition is false (zero), then block is  
skipped. End identifies the end of the block. Both Then and End  
must be on a line by itself.  
:If condition  
:Then  
:block (if true)  
:End  
:command  
 
230 Chapter 12: Programming  
Write a program named TEST that tests the values of variable  
X. If X<10, manipulate X and Y and then display both values. If  
³
X10, then display X and Y (without manipulating them).  
PROGRAM:TEST  
:1"X:10"Y  
:If X<10  
:Then  
:2X+3"X  
:2Y-3"Y  
:End  
:Disp {X,Y}  
:Pause  
If-Then-Else 8 1, 2, and 3  
Use If with Then and Else to execute only one of two blocks of  
commands depending upon condition. If condition is true  
(non-zero), then block1 is executed. If condition is false  
(zero), then block2 is executed. End identifies the end of  
block2. Then, Else, and End each must be on a line by itself.  
:If condition  
:Then  
:block1 (if true)  
:Else  
:block2 (if false)  
:End  
:command  
 
Chapter 12: Programming 231  
Write a program named TESTELSE that tests an input value, X.  
If X<0, then square it and store it to Y. If X0, then store it to  
Y. Display X and Y.  
³
PROGRAM:TESTELSE  
:Input "X=",X  
:If X<0  
:Then  
:X"Y  
:Else  
:X"Y  
:End  
:Disp {X,Y}  
:Pause  
For( 8 4  
Use For( to control how many times a loop is repeated. A For(  
command loops to repeat the same group of commands  
(block) and increments to control the number of times the loop  
is repeated.  
It executes commands in block through end, increasing  
variable from begin by increment until variable>end.  
increment is optional (default=1) and can be negative  
(end<begin). end is a maximum or minimum value not to be  
exceeded, which identifies the end of the loop. End identifies  
the end of block. When variable>end, the program executes  
each command following End. For( loops can be nested.  
:For(variable,begin,end[,increment])  
:block (while variable { end)  
:End  
:command  
Write a program named SQUARE that displays A2, where  
0=begin, 8 =end, and 2=increment.  
³
Press b  
between results.  
PROGRAM:SQUARE  
:For(A,0,8,2)  
:Disp A  
:Pause  
:End  
 
232 Chapter 12: Programming  
While 8 5  
Use While to test condition before the commands in the loop  
are executed. While performs a block of commands WHILE  
condition is true (non-zero). condition is frequently a  
relational test (Chapter 2: Math Operations) and is tested  
when While is encountered. End identifies the end of block.  
When condition is false (zero), the program executes each  
command following End. While instructions can be nested.  
:While condition  
:block (while condition is true)  
:End  
:command  
Write a program named LOOP that increments two variables, I  
and J, and displays the value of J when I6.  
³
PROGRAM:LOOP  
:0"I  
:0"J  
:While I<6  
:J+1"J  
:I+1"I  
:End  
:Disp "J=",J  
:Pause  
Repeat 8 6  
Use Repeat to test condition after the commands in the loop  
are executed. Repeat executes block UNTIL condition is true  
(non-zero). It is similar to While, but condition is tested when  
End is encountered; therefore, the group of commands is  
always executed at least once. When condition is false (zero),  
Repeat instructions can be nested.  
:Repeat condition  
:block (until condition is true)  
:End  
:command  
 
Chapter 12: Programming 233  
Write a program named RPTLOOP that increments two  
variables, I and J, and displays the value of J while I6.  
³
PROGRAM:RPTLOOP  
:0"I  
:0"J  
:Repeat I|6  
:J+1"J  
:I+1"I  
:End  
:Disp "J=",J  
:Pause  
End 8 7  
End identifies the end of a group of commands. You must  
include an End instruction at the end of each For(, While, or  
Repeat loop. Also, you must enter an End instruction at the end  
of each If-Then group and each If-Then-Else group.  
:End  
Pause 8 8  
After a program has been executed, the screen is erased.  
Therefore, Pause is useful to suspend program execution until  
you press b, or to display value (such as answers or  
graphs) and suspend program execution until you press b.  
During the pause, the pause indicator is on in the top-right  
corner. Press b to resume execution.  
Pause without value temporarily pauses the program. If the  
DispGraph or Disp instruction has been executed, the  
appropriate screen is displayed.  
:Pause  
Pause with value displays value on the Home screen. value can  
be scrolled.  
:Pause value  
 
234 Chapter 12: Programming  
Write a program named PAUSE that stores a value to A, an  
equation to Y1, graphs Y1 using standard WINDOW values  
(ZStandard), pauses, and then displays A.  
³
PROGRAM:PAUSE  
:2"A  
:FnOff  
For FnOff and Y1,  
Press b  
press - } 2 1.  
:"X+A""Y  
:ZStandard  
:Pause  
to get to next  
screen.  
For ZStandard,  
press ( 6.  
:Disp "A=",A  
:Pause  
Press b  
to end  
Lbl and Goto 8 9 and 0  
Lbl (label) and Goto are used together for branching.  
execution.  
Lbl gives a name (label) to a particular location in a program.  
label can be one or two text characters (A through Z, 0 through  
99).  
:Lbl label  
Goto causes the program to branch to label when Goto is  
encountered.  
:Goto label  
Write a program named SQUARE2 that asks for an input, A,  
squares A, and then displays A until A100.  
³
PROGRAM:SQUARE2  
:Lbl 99  
:Input A  
:If A|100  
:Stop  
Press b  
after answer is  
:Disp A  
:Pause  
:Goto 99  
displayed.  
 
Chapter 12: Programming 235  
IS>( 8 A  
IS>( (increment and skip if greater than) is used for testing and  
branching. IS>( adds 1 to variable. If the answer is > value  
(which can be an expression), then command1 is skipped; if  
the answer is { value, then command1 is executed.  
command2 is always executed. variable cannot be a system  
variable. IS>( is not a looping instruction.  
:IS>(variable,value)  
:command1 (if answer { value)  
:command2  
Write a program named ISKIP that displays A until A>5.  
³
PROGRAM:ISKIP  
:0"A  
:Lbl S  
Press b  
between  
A values.  
:Disp A  
:Pause  
:IS>(A,5)  
:Goto S  
:Disp "A IS NOW >5"  
:Pause  
DS<( 8 B  
DS<( (decrement and skip if less than) is used for testing and  
branching. DS<( subtracts 1 from variable. If the answer is  
< value (which can be an expression), then command1 is  
skipped; if the answer is | value, then command1 is executed.  
command2 is always executed. variable cannot be a system  
variable. DS<( is not a looping instruction.  
:DS<(variable,value)  
:command1 (if answer | value)  
:command2  
 
236 Chapter 12: Programming  
Write a program named DSKIP that displays A until A<5.  
³
PROGRAM:DSKIP  
:9"A  
:Lbl S  
Press b  
between  
A values.  
:Disp A  
:Pause  
:DS<(A,5)  
:Goto S  
:Disp "A IS NOW <5"  
:Pause  
Menu( 8 C  
Menu( generates a menu of up to seven items during program  
execution. The pause indicator stays on until you select a  
menu item. The calculator then branches to the label  
corresponding with that item.  
The menu title is enclosed in quotation marks (" ") and can  
have up to 16 characters. Up to seven pairs of menu items  
follow. Each pair consists of a text item (also enclosed in  
quotation marks) to be displayed as a menu selection, and a  
label item to which to branch if you select the corresponding  
menu selection.  
:Menu("title","item1",label1[,"item2",label2,ꢀ])  
Write a program named DATES that displays a menu of dates.  
Label the title “DATES”, and label option one “JANUARY 16” with  
A, label option two “FEBRUARY 19” with B, label option three  
APRIL 9” with C, label option four “JULY 29” with D, label  
option five “AUGUST 2” with E, label option six “NOVEMBER 10”  
with F, and label option seven “DECEMBER 8” with F.  
³
PROGRAM:DATES  
:Menu("DATES","JANUARY  
16",A,"FEBRUARY 19",B,"APRIL  
9",C,"JULY 29",D,"AUGUST  
2",E,"NOVEMBER 10",F,"DECEMBER  
8",G)  
 
Chapter 12: Programming 237  
The program above pauses until you select 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7.  
If you select 2:FEBRUARY 19, for example, the menu disappears  
and the program continues execution at Lbl B.  
SetMenu( 8 D  
Like Menu(, SetMenu( sets up a menu of up to seven items.  
During program execution, the user assigns (and edits, as  
necessary) numerical values to each item. To assign a value,  
enter the value using the number keys, and then press b  
or #.  
Long values do not wrap; they scroll off the screen, and an  
ellipsis (ꢀ) is displayed. Use " and ! to scroll the whole  
value. Use $ and # to move between menu items as  
necessary.  
:SetMenu("title","item1",variable1[,"item2",variable2,ꢀ])  
The menu title is enclosed in quotation marks (" ") and can  
have up to 16 characters. Up to seven menu items (also  
enclosed in quotation marks) follow. During program  
execution, the menu displays the first 10 characters of item.  
Each item needs a corresponding variable where the entered  
value is stored.  
The values you enter for the variables (assigned to the menu  
items) are stored in the calculator’s memory. Also, if you  
assign to a menu item a variable that has been previously  
defined in the calculator’s memory, that value displays when  
you first execute the program.  
Press - l to exit the menu and end program execution.  
 
238 Chapter 12: Programming  
Write a program named SETMENU that displays a menu of  
³
animal weights. Label the title “WEIGHTS”, show weight values  
of five different animals, and allow the user to change the  
weight values.  
PROGRAM:SETMENU  
A, B, and C  
were previously  
defined.  
:SetMenu("WEIGHTS","AARDVARK",  
A,"ELEPHANT",B,"ARMADILLO",  
C,"MONKEY",D,"KANGAROO",E)  
For example, the  
ARMADILLO's weight is  
assigned to variable C.  
Enter new  
weights.  
prgm 8 E  
Use prgm to execute other programs as subroutines. When you  
select prgm, it is pasted to the cursor location. Use the Text  
editor to enter the characters needed to spell a program name.  
Using prgm is equivalent to selecting existing programs from  
the 8 EXEC menu (see the section in this chapters entitled  
Calling a Program from Another Program”; however, it  
allows you to enter the name of a program that you have not  
yet created.  
:prgmname  
Write two programs named CALCAREA and VOLUME. CALCAREA  
calculates the area of a circle. VOLUME inputs the circle  
diameter D, and height H, calls CALCAREA as a subroutine,  
which calculates the area using D and H, and then displays the  
volume of a cylinder .  
³
 
Chapter 12: Programming 239  
PROGRAM:VOLUME  
:Input "DIAMETER=",D  
:Input "HEIGHT=",H  
:prgmCALCAREA  
:A¦HÜV  
Press b  
after inputs.  
:Disp "VOLUME=",V  
:Pause  
PROGRAM:CALCAREA  
:D/2ÜR  
:p¦R ÜA  
:Return  
Return 8 F  
Return quits the subroutine and returns execution to the calling  
program, even if it is encountered within nested loops. Any  
loops are ended. An implied Return exists at the end of any  
program that is called as a subroutine. Within the main  
program, Return stops execution and returns to the Home  
screen.  
:Return  
See the program examples (on the previous page), CALCAREA  
and VOLUME, explaining the programming command, prgm. The  
subroutine, CALCAREA, ends with a Return command.  
Stop 8 G  
Stop ends program execution and returns to the Home screen.  
Stop is optional at the end of a program.  
:Stop  
Write a program named STOP that inputs T. If T20, then the  
³
program displays T20. If T<20, then the program stops  
execution. (Note: The example screens show two program  
executions so that you can see what happens with both types  
of input.)  
 
240 Chapter 12: Programming  
Press b  
PROGRAM:STOP  
:Input "T=",T  
:If T20  
:Then  
after input.  
Press b  
:Disp "T20"  
:Pause  
:Else  
after input.  
:Stop  
You are returned  
to the Home screen.  
DelVar 8 H  
DelVar (delete variable) deletes the contents of variable from  
memory. You cannot delete a program or a system variable.  
:DelVar variable  
Write a program named DELVAR that deletes the value for  
variable A from the calculator’s memory.  
³
PROGRAM:DELVAR  
:{1,2}ÜL1  
Press b.  
:Disp L1  
:Pause  
:DelVar L1  
:Disp L1  
:Pause  
GraphStyle( 8 I  
GraphStyle( defines one of seven graph style types for Yn. Yn=1,  
2, 3, or 4 (for Y1, Y2, Y3, or Y4). The type icons described below  
are located to the left of Yn in the Y= editor.  
1 = ç (line)  
5 = ë (path)  
6 = ì (animate)  
7 = í (dot)  
2 = è (thick line)  
3 = é (shade above)  
4 = ê (shade below)  
:GraphStyle(Y ,type)  
 
Chapter 12: Programming 241  
For a detailed description of each graph style, see Chapter 9:  
Function Graphing.  
Write a program named GRPHSTYL that defines the shade  
below graph style for Y1=2X+5 and graphs it.  
³
PROGRAM:GRPHSTYL  
:FnOff  
For FnOff and Y1,  
:"2X+5"ÜY  
:GraphStyle(1,4)  
:ZStandard  
press - } 2 1.  
For ZStandard, press  
( 6.  
The 8 I/O Menu  
You can only access the 8 I/O (input/output) menu by  
pressing 8 " from the Program editor. The 8 I/O menu  
instructions allow you to input values and output answers  
during program execution.  
To return to the Program editor without selecting an item,  
press :.  
8 " (from the  
Program editor only)  
1:Input  
Lets the user enter a value or display a  
graph.  
2:Prompt  
3:Disp  
Prompts the user to enter variable values.  
Displays text or values on the Home screen.  
Displays the current graph.  
4:DispGraph  
 
242 Chapter 12: Programming  
5:DispTable  
6:Output(  
Displays the current table.  
Displays text or values at a specified  
position.  
7:getKey  
8:ClrScreen  
9:ClrTable  
0:GetCalc(  
A:Get(  
Checks the keyboard for a keystroke.  
Clears the Home screen.  
Clears the current table.  
Gets a variable from another TIN73.  
Gets a variable from the CBL 2/CBL or CBR.  
Sends a variable to the CBL 2/CBL or CBR.  
B:Send(  
Input 8 " 1  
Input functions in two different ways. You can use it to store to  
a variable value or to display the current graph.  
Storing to a Variable  
Input accepts input and stores it to variable. When the program  
is executed, a ? (question mark) prompt (unless otherwise  
defined) is displayed. Enter a real number, a list name, or a Yn  
function. Then press b, which tells the calculator to  
evaluate the input and store the value to variable.  
:Input variable  
To input lists and expressions during program execution, you  
must use the Text editor to include braces ( {} ) around the list  
elements and quotation marks (" ") around the expressions  
and Yn functions.  
You also can display text of up to 16 characters as a prompt.  
During program execution, enter a value after the prompt, and  
then press b. The value is stored to variable, and the  
program resumes execution.  
:Input "text",variable  
 
Chapter 12: Programming 243  
Write a program named INPUTVAR that inputs two sets of data  
and a function, and then solves the function using both of the  
data sets.  
³
PROGRAM:INPUTVAR  
:Input "Y=",Y  
For Y1, press  
- } 2 1.  
:Input "A=",A  
For ¨, press  
:Input "¨DATA=",¨DATA  
- v " 9.  
Surround Y1  
:Disp "Y(A)=",Y(A)  
:Pause  
:Disp "Y(¨DATA)=",Y(¨DATA)  
with quotation marks.  
Enclose list in { }.  
:Pause  
Press b between  
data displays.  
Displaying the Current Graph  
Input, with no arguments, displays the current graph. Once the  
graph screen is shown, you can move the free-moving cursor,  
which updates X and Y by a value of .1. The pause indicator is  
displayed. Press b to resume program execution. The  
Home screen then displays the X- and Y-coordinates.  
:Input  
Write a program named GRPHINPT that gets input from the  
graph screen (the (X,Y) coordinates of the cursor’s position)  
and displays the values on the Home screen.  
³
PROGRAM:GRPHINPT  
Move cursor to  
desired location,  
For FnOff, press  
:FnOff  
- } 2 6. For  
PlotsOff, select  
- e 4.  
:PlotsOff  
:ZDecimal  
:Input  
and press  
b
.
:Disp X,Y  
:Pause  
For ZDecimal, press  
X=2.6;  
Y=1.5.  
( 8.  
244 Chapter 12: Programming  
Prompt 8 " 2  
During program execution, Prompt displays the specified  
variables followed by =?, one at a time on separate lines.  
During program execution, the user enters a value or  
expression for each variable, and then presses b. The  
values are stored, and the program resumes execution. Yn  
functions are not valid with Prompt.  
:Prompt variableA[,variableB,variableCꢀ]  
Write a program named WINDOW that requests inputs to be  
stored to WINDOW variables.  
³
PROGRAM:WINDOW  
For WINDOW  
variables, press  
- } 1.  
:Prompt Xmin  
:Prompt Xmax  
:Prompt Ymin  
:Prompt Ymax  
Disp 8 " 3  
Disp displays one or more variable values during program  
execution. To display text, surround the text with quotation  
marks.  
:Disp valueA[,valueB,valueC,…]  
:Disp "text"[,valueA]  
Pause after Disp halts execution temporarily so that you can  
examine the screen. To resume execution, press b. If a  
list is too large to display in its entirety, an ellipsis () is  
displayed in the last column, but the list cannot be scrolled.  
If value is a variable, the current value stored to the  
variable is displayed.  
If value is an expression, it is evaluated and the result is  
displayed on the right side of the next line.  
If value is text within quotation marks, it is displayed on  
the left side of the current display line. " is not valid as  
text.  
 
Chapter 12: Programming 245  
Write a program named DISPNOTE that displays the messages,  
³
I LOVE MATH” and “TEST1 GRADE=95”.  
PROGRAM:DISPNOTE  
:Disp "I LOVE MATH"  
:Pause  
Press b.  
:Disp "TEST1 GRADE=",95  
:Pause  
DispGraph 8 " 4  
DispGraph (display graph) displays the graph of all defined and  
selected Yn functions during program execution. If Pause is  
encountered after DispGraph, the program halts temporarily so  
that you can examine the screen. Press b to resume  
execution.  
:DispGraph  
DispTable 8 " 5  
DispTable (display table) displays the table for all defined and  
selected Yn functions during program execution. If Pause is  
encountered after DispTable, the program halts temporarily so  
that you can examine the screen. Press b to resume  
execution.  
:DispTable  
Output( 8 " 6  
Output( displays text or value on the Home screen beginning at  
row (1-8) and column (1-16), overwriting any existing  
characters. You may want to precede Output( with ClrScreen.  
Expressions are evaluated and values are displayed according  
to the current mode settings. " is not valid as text.  
:Output(row,column,"text")  
:Output(row,column,value)  
 
246 Chapter 12: Programming  
Write a program named OUTPUT that writes the contents of B  
to a specific area on the screen.  
³
PROGRAM:OUTPUT  
:3+5"B  
:ClrScreen  
:Output(5,4,"ANSWER: ")  
:Output(5,12,B)  
:Pause  
getKey 8 " 7  
getKey returns a number corresponding to the last key pressed,  
according to the following key code diagram. If no key has  
been pressed, getKey returns 0. Use getKey inside loops to  
transfer control, for example, when creating programs that use  
a key to control the logic flow.  
:getKey  
TIN73 Key Code Diagram  
^ has no number associated with it.  
It stops program execution.  
 
Chapter 12: Programming 247  
³ Write a program named GETKEY that displays the key code for  
the last key pressed, represented as variable K. End the  
program when K=45 (:).  
PROGRAM:GETKEY  
:Lbl A  
:0"K  
:While K=0  
:getKey"K  
:End  
: (45)  
:Disp K  
:If Kƒ45  
:Goto A  
stops execution.  
ClrScreen and ClrTable 8 " 8 and 9  
ClrScreen (clear Home screen) clears the Home screen during  
program execution.  
:ClrScreen  
ClrTable (clear table) clears the values in the table during  
program execution.  
:ClrTable  
GetCalc( 8 " 0  
GetCalc( gets the contents of variable from another TIN73 and  
stores it to variable on the receiving 73. variable can be a real  
number, list element, list name, Yn variable, or picture.  
:GetCalc(variable)  
You can access GetCalc( from the CATALOG (- |) to  
execute it from the Home screen.  
Get( and Send( 8 " A and B  
Get( gets data from the Calculator-Based Laboratoryè  
(CBL 2™, CBL™), or Calculator-Based Rangerè (CBRè)  
system and stores it to variable on the receiving TIN73.  
variable can be a real number, list element, list name, Yn  
variable, or picture.  
 
248 Chapter 12: Programming  
:Get(variable)  
Send( sends the contents of variable to the CBL 2/CBL or CBR.  
You cannot use it to send to another TIN73. variable can be a  
real number, list element, list name, Yn variable, or picture.  
variable can be a list of elements.  
:Send(variable)  
³ Write a program named GETSOUND that gets sound data and  
time in seconds from a CBL 2/CBL.  
PROGRAM:GETSOUND  
:Send({3,.00025,99,1,0,0,0,0,  
1})  
:Get(L1)  
:Get(L2)  
Editing Program Commands  
To edit a stored program, select the program name that you  
want to edit from the 8 EDIT menu. The calculator displays  
the Program editor and all existing program lines for that  
program.  
The 8 EDIT menu lists in alphabetical order all created  
programs. From this list, select the program you want to edit.  
The calculator then displays the Program editor which  
displays all existing programming commands that make up the  
selected program.  
This menu labels the first 10 items using 1 though 9, then 0. All  
other programs are still included in the list but are not labeled  
with a number. To select a menu item, press the number  
associated with it or highlight the item with the cursor keys,  
and then press b.  
8 "  
 
Chapter 12: Programming 249  
Inserting, Deleting, and Editing Command Lines  
To insert a new command line anywhere in the program,  
place the cursor where you want the new characters,  
press - m, and then press b. A colon indicates a  
new line.  
To insert characters on an existing line, place the cursor  
where you want the new line, press - m, and then  
enter the new characters.  
To delete a command line, place the cursor on the line,  
press : to clear all instructions and expressions on  
the line, and then press / to delete the command line,  
including the colon.  
To move the cursor to the beginning of a command line,  
press - !; to move to the end, press - ".  
Copying and Renaming a Program  
You can copy all command lines from one program into a new  
or existing program.  
To copy into a new program, use the (8 " ") menu  
to create and name the new program. The calculator then  
automatically displays the Program editor with the  
program name on the top line.  
To copy into an existing program, use the 8 EDIT  
(8 ") menu and select the existing program name.  
The calculator then automatically displays the Program  
editor with the existing program name on the top line.  
 
250 Chapter 12: Programming  
Then follow these steps:  
1. Position the cursor where you want the copy of the  
program to begin.  
2. Press - P. Rcl is displayed on the bottom line of the  
Program editor.  
3. Press 8 " " to display the 8 EXEC menu.  
4. Select a name from the menu. prgmname is pasted to the  
bottom line of the Program editor. You cannot directly  
enter the subroutine name using the Text editor when  
using Rcl. You must select the name from the 8 EXEC  
menu.)  
5. Press b. All command lines from the selected  
program are copied into the new or existing program.  
Calling a Program from Another Program  
The 8 EXEC (execute) menu (8 " "), accessed only  
from the Program editor, lets you call any stored program into  
the current program. The called program then becomes a  
subroutine in the current program.  
The 8 EXEC menu lists in alphabetical order all created  
programs. From this list, select the program that you want to  
call. The program name is pasted to the cursor location in the  
Program editor.  
This menu labels the first 10 items using 1 though 9, then 0. All  
other programs are still included in the list, but are not labeled  
with a number. To select a menu item, press the number  
associated with it or highlight the item with the cursor keys,  
and then press b.  
You also can enter a program name on a command line by  
selecting E:prgm from the 8 CTL menu, and then entering  
the program name using the Text editor.  
 
Chapter 12: Programming 251  
8 " " (from the  
Program editor only)  
When prgmname is encountered during execution, the next  
command that the program executes is the first command in  
the subroutine. It returns to the subsequent command in the  
first program when it encounters either Return or the implied  
Return at the end of the second program.  
Notes about Calling Programs  
Variables are global.  
label used with Goto and Lbl is local to the program where  
it is located. label in one program is not recognized by  
another program. You cannot use Goto to branch to a  
label in another program.  
Return exits a subroutine and returns to the calling  
program, even if it is encountered within nested loops.  
Executing a Program  
The 8 EXEC (execute) menu lists in alphabetical order all  
created programs. From this list, select the program that you  
want to execute. The program name is pasted to the cursor  
location on the Home screen. Pressing b begins executing  
the program. Pressing b after a program is completed  
returns you to the Home screen.  
The 8 EXEC menu labels the first 10 items using 1 though 9,  
then 0. All other programs are still included in the list, but are  
not labeled with a number. To select a menu item, press the  
number associated with it or highlight the item with the cursor  
keys, and then press b.  
 
252 Chapter 12: Programming  
8 (except from the  
Program editor)  
Breaking Out of a Program  
To stop program execution, press ^. The ERR:BREAK menu is  
displayed.  
To return to the Home screen, select 1:Quit.  
To go where the interruption occurred, select 2:Goto.  
Debugging a Program  
The TIN73 checks for program errors during program  
execution. It does not check for errors as you enter a program.  
If the calculator finds an error during program execution, it  
stops execution and then displays an error screen.  
To return to the Home screen, press 1:Quit.  
To go where the error occurred in the program code,  
select 2:Goto.  
 
Communication Link  
and the CBL/CBR  
Application  
13  
TIN73 Link Capabilities ......................................................254  
Linking to Another Calculator ...................................254  
Linking to the CBL 2/CBL System or CBR....................255  
The Link SEND Menu 9 1.............................................255  
The Link RECEIVE Menu 9 1 " .................................257  
Transmitting Data Items....................................................258  
Repeating a Transmission to an Additional TIN73....259  
DuplicateName Menu.................................................259  
Transmission Error Conditions....................................260  
Backing Up Memory..........................................................261  
Upgrading your TIN73 Graph Explorer Software.............262  
Graph Explorer Software Upgrades...........................262  
Where to Get Upgrades..............................................262  
How to Install Upgrades.............................................262  
Backing Up Your Unit before an Installation............263  
The APPLICATIONS Menu 9 ......................................263  
Steps for Running the CBLàCBR Application...................264  
Selecting the CBL/CBR Application...................................265  
Specifying the Data Collection Method...........................265  
Specifiying Data Collection Options.................................266  
GAUGE.........................................................................266  
DATA LOGGER.............................................................269  
RANGER .......................................................................272  
Collecting the Data ...........................................................273  
Stopping Data Collection..................................................274  
 
254 Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application  
TI-73 Link Capabilities  
The TIN73 comes with a unit-to-unit link cable. With this cable,  
you can connect to and communicate with another TIN73, a  
TIN82, a TIN83, the Calculator-Based Laboratory™ (CBL 2™,  
CBL™), or the Calculator-Based Rangerè (CBRè). You can  
communicate with a personal computer using TI™ Connect or  
TI-GRAPH LINK™ software and a TI-GRAPH LINK cable.  
For information about any of these accessories, contact Texas  
Instruments Customer Support (see Appendix C:  
BatteryàService and Warranty Information).  
To connect the TIN73 to another device using the unit-to-unit  
cable, use the link port located at the center of the bottom  
edge of the calculator.  
1. Insert either end of the unit-to-unit cable into the TIN73  
port very firmly.  
2. Insert the other end of the cable into the port of the other  
device.  
Linking to Another Calculator  
By linking two TI-73’s you can transfer all variables and  
programs to another TIN73 or back up the entire RAM  
(Random Access Memory) of a TIN73. To transmit from one  
TIN73 to another, you first must set up one TIN73 to send and  
the other to receive using the 9 1:Link SEND and RECEIVE  
menus (see page 255 and 257).  
Linking a TIN73 to a TIN82 or TIN83 lets you transfer some  
types of data between the calculators. Use the 9 1:Link  
SEND menu items 9:Vars to TI82 and 0:Vars to TI83 (see page 256).  
You can only transfer numerical list data stored in L1L6  
(NOT categorical lists) to a TIN82. All fractional elements  
are converted to decimals.  
If dimension>99 for a TIN73 list that is selected to be sent  
to a TIN82, the TIN82 truncates the list at the 99th element  
during transmission.  
   
Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application 255  
You can only transfer numerical list data stored in L1L6  
or user-named numerical lists to a TIN83 (NOT  
categorical lists). All fractional elements are converted to  
decimals.  
From a TIN82 or a TIN83 to a TIN73, you cannot perform a  
memory backup (but you can send real numbers, real  
number lists, and picture variables).  
Linking to the CBL 2/CBL System or CBR  
Connect a CBL 2/CBL or CBR to a TIN73 using one of the  
unit-to-unit link cables that are included with the calculator,  
the CBR and the CBL 2/CBL. See the section entitled,  
“Selecting the CBL/CBR Application” in this chapter.  
Linking to a PC or Macintoshè  
TI-GRAPH LINKè is an optional application that connects to a  
TIN73 to enable communications with a personal computer.  
The Link SEND Menu 9 1  
You choose the type of data you want to send from the TIN73  
to another device from the 9 1:Link SEND menu.  
To communicate between two calculators, you must set up  
one calculator to send the data and the other calculator to  
receive the data. The following section describes how to set  
up the TIN73 to send data. To set up a TIN82 or TIN83, refer to  
its user manual.  
9 1  
   
256 Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application  
1:All+…  
Displays all RAM items as selected.  
Displays all RAM items as deselected.  
Displays all program names.  
Displays all list names.  
2:All–…  
3:Prgm…  
4:List…  
5:Pic…  
Displays all picture data types.  
Displays all real variables.  
Displays all Yn variables.  
6:Real…  
7:Y-Vars…  
8:Consts…  
9:Vars to TI82…  
Displays all constants.  
Displays list names L1-L6 that are  
defined as numerical lists, real number  
variables and picture variables.  
0:Vars to TI83…  
Displays list names that are defined as  
numerical lists, real number variables,  
and picture variables.  
A:Apps…  
Displays all software applications.  
B:AppVars…  
Displays all software applications  
variables.  
C:SendId  
Sends the Calculator ID number  
immediately. (You do not need to  
select TRANSMIT.)  
D:Back Up…  
Selects all RAM for backup to a TIN73.  
 
Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application 257  
To select data items to send from the sending unit to another  
calculator, follow these steps:  
1. Press 9 to display the APPLICATIONS menu.  
2. Select 1:Link to display the Link SEND menu.  
3. Select the type of data you want to send. The  
corresponding SELECT screen is displayed. Each SELECT  
screen, except the one for All+, is displayed initially with  
no data items selected.  
4. Press $ and # to move the selection cursor (4) to an  
item you want to select or deselect.  
5. Press b to select or deselect an item. Selected names  
are marked with a black box (0). To exit a SELECT screen  
without transmitting any items, press - l.  
SELECT LIST screen includes L1-L6  
and any user-named lists.  
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to select or deselect additional  
items.  
The Link RECEIVE Menu 9 1 "  
You set up the TIN73 to receive data from another device using  
the 9 1:Link RECEIVE menu.  
To communicate between two calculators, you must set up  
one calculator to send the data and the other calculator to  
receive the data. The following section describes how to set  
up the TIN73 to receive data. To set up a TIN82 or TIN83, refer  
to its user manual.  
9 1 "  
1:Receive  
Sets unit to receive data transmission.  
   
258 Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application  
To set up the TIN73 to receive data, follow these steps:  
1. Press 9 to display the APPLICATIONS menu.  
2. Select 1:Link and press " to display the Link RECEIVE  
menu.  
3. Select 1:Receive. The message Waiting… and the busy  
indicator are displayed. The receiving unit is ready to  
receive transmitted items.  
To exit the receive mode without receiving items, press  
^, and then select 1:Quit from the Error in Xmit menu.  
When transmission is complete, the unit is still in the  
receive mode. Press - l to exit the receive mode.  
Transmitting Data Items  
To transmit data items from a TIN73, follow these steps:  
1. Select items to send on the sending unit. Keep the SELECT  
screen displayed on the sending unit (see page 257).  
2. Set the receiving unit to receive mode (see page 257).  
3. Press " on the TIN73 to display the TRANSMIT menu.  
4. Confirm that Waiting… is displayed on the receiving unit,  
which indicates it is set to receive.  
5. Select 1:Transmit. The name and type of each data item are  
displayed line by line on the sending unit as the item is  
queued for transmission, and then on the receiving unit as  
each item is accepted.  
6. After all selected items have been transmitted, the  
message Done is displayed on both calculators. Press $  
and # to scroll through the names.  
To stop a transmission, press ^. The Error in Xmit menu is  
displayed on both units. To leave the error menu, select 1:Quit.  
   
Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application 259  
During transmission, if the receiving unit does not have  
sufficient memory to receive an item, the Memory Full menu is  
displayed on the receiving unit.  
To skip this item for the current transmission, select  
1:Omit. Transmission resumes with the next item.  
To cancel the transmission and exit transmission mode,  
select 2:Quit.  
Repeating a Transmission to an Additional TI-73  
After sending and receiving data between two TIN73s, you can  
repeat the same transmission without having to reselect data  
items to send. Use the original sending unit only and as many  
additional TIN73 units as necessary.  
Simply repeat the transmission process without selecting or  
deselecting any new items. Note: You cannot repeat the  
transmission if you selected All+ or All-.  
DuplicateName Menu  
During transmission, if a variable name is duplicated, the  
DuplicateName menu is displayed on the receiving TIN73.  
The duplicate variable name, L1,  
and its type, LIST, are displayed.  
1:Rename  
Prompts you to rename the receiving  
variable.  
2:Overwrite  
Overwrites data while receiving the  
variable.  
3:Omit  
4:Quit  
Skips transmission of sending variable.  
Stops transmission.  
   
260 Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application  
When you select 1:Rename, the Name= prompt is displayed,  
and you can enter another appropriate variable name  
using the - } menu (for example, renaming Pic1 to  
Pic2 where Pic2 is undefined), or you can enter text using  
the Text editor (- t) (for example, renaming L1 to  
¨ABC where ¨ABC is undefined). When renaming lists, do  
not enter the ¨ (- v OPS 9). The calculator assumes  
that it is a list name. Press b to resume transmission.  
Note: You cannot rename software applications or  
constants (the 1:Rename option is excluded from the  
DuplicateName menu).  
When you select 2:Overwrite, the sending unit’s data  
overwrites the existing data stored on the receiving unit.  
Transmission resumes.  
When you select 3:Omit, the sending unit does not send  
the data in the duplicated variable name. Transmission  
resumes with the next item.  
When you select 4:Quit, transmission stops, and the  
receiving unit exits receive mode.  
Transmission Error Conditions  
A transmission error (Error in Xmit) occurs after one or two  
seconds if:  
The unit-to-unit cable is not attached to the sending or  
receiving unit. Note: If the cable is attached, push it in  
firmly and try again.  
The receiving unit is not set to receive transmission.  
You attempt a backup between a TIN73 and a TIN82 or  
TIN83.  
You attempt a data transfer from a TIN73 to a TIN82 with  
data other than numerical lists, L1-L6, or without using  
menu item 9:Vars to TI82.  
   
Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application 261  
You attempt a data transfer from a TIN73 to a TIN83 with  
data other than numerical lists, L1-L6, or user-named  
numerical lists, or without using menu item 0:Vars to TI83.  
Although a transmission error does not occur, these two  
conditions may prevent successful transmission:  
You try to use Get( with a calculator instead of a  
CBL 2/CBL.  
You try to use GetCalc( with a TIN82 or TIN83 instead of a  
TIN73.  
Backing Up Memory  
The TIN73 includes two types of memory: RAM (Random  
Access Memory) and F-ROM (Flash Read Only Memory). RAM  
includes all lists, programs, variables, and equations. F-ROM  
includes software applications, such as the CBLàCBR  
application (9 2).  
To copy (and overwrite) the exact contents of RAM in the  
sending TIN73 to the memory of the receiving TIN73, follow  
these steps:  
1. Set up the receiving unit in receive mode (see page 257).  
2. Then, on the sending unit, select D:Back Up from the Link  
SEND menu.  
3. Select 1:Transmit from the MEMORYBACKUP menu on the  
sending unit to begin transmission. Selecting 2:Quit  
returns you to the Link SEND menu.  
4. As a safety check to prevent accidental loss of memory,  
the message WARNING–BACKUP is displayed when the  
receiving unit receives notice of a backup.  
Select 1:Continue to begin the backup transmission.  
Select 2:Quit to prevent the backup and return to the Link  
SEND menu.  
When the backup is complete, both the sending calculator and  
receiving calculator display a MEMORY BACKUP confirmation  
screen. If a transmission error occurs during a backup, the  
receiving unit’s memory is reset.  
   
262 Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application  
Upgrading your TI-73 Graph Explorer  
Software  
You can upgrade the software, or operating system, on your  
TIN73. You do this by transferring this software from a  
computer to your TIN73 using the TI Connector  
TI-GRAPH LINKsoftware and a TI-GRAPH LINK cable.  
Graph Explorer Software Upgrades  
You can upgrade two different types of software. These are  
stored in F-ROM. Therefore, this software is unaffected if you  
select - Ÿ 7:Reset 1:All RAM. These include:  
New versions which enhance the existing software  
(released free of charge).  
Feature upgrades which modify or add functionality to  
existing software (available for purchase).  
If you want to download these feature upgrades, which  
must be purchased from the TI web site, you must provide  
the unique ID number that identifies your TIN73. To find  
the ID number, press - Ÿ 1:About.  
Where to Get Upgrades  
For up-to-date information about available upgrades and how  
to install them, check the TI web site at  
education.ti.com or contact Texas Instruments as  
described in Appendix C: BatteryàService and Warranty  
Information.  
How to Install Upgrades  
To install new Graph Explorer Software, including free or  
purchased upgrades and applications, you need your TIN73, a  
computer, TI Connect or TI-GRAPH LINK software, and a  
TI-GRAPH LINK cable. Extensive directions for installing  
upgrades are provided on the web site at education.ti.com.  
   
Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application 263  
1. Transfer the software from the web site to your  
computer.  
2. Transfer the software from the computer to your unit.  
Backing Up Your Unit before an Installation  
When you install new operating system software, the  
installation process:  
Deletes all user-defined data items located in RAM.  
Resets all system variables and modes to their original  
factory settings. This is equivalent to using the MEMORY  
RESET menu to reset all memory.  
To retain any existing data items, do either of the following  
before installing the upgrade:  
Transmit the data items to another TIN73 as described on  
page 258.  
Use the TI Connector TI-GRAPH LINKsoftware and a  
TI-GRAPH LINK cable to send the data items to a  
computer.  
The APPLICATIONS Menu 9  
For the TIN73, you can buy additional software applications,  
which allow you to customize further your calculator’s  
functionality. The calculator reserves four spaces  
(placeholders) within ROM memory specifically for  
applications. The TIN73 comes with the CBLàCBR application  
already listed on the APPLICATIONS menu (9 2).  
   
264 Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application  
Steps for Running the  
CBLàCBR Application  
Follow these basic steps when using the CBLàCBR  
application. You may not have to do all of them each time.  
9 2  
b
Select the CBLàCBR application.  
b
Specify the data collection method.  
Select options, as applicable.  
1, 2, or 3  
Highlight options  
or enter value  
and press b.  
Select Go… or  
Collect the data.  
START NOW.  
Follow directions, if applicable.  
^ and  
¤ or  
P
Stop the data collection, if  
necessary. Repeat these steps or  
exit the APPLICATIONS menu.  
   
Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application 265  
Selecting the CBL/CBR Application  
You access the CBL/CBR application by pressing 9. In order  
to use a CBL/CBR application, you need a CBL 2/CBL or CBR  
(as applicable), a TIN73, and a unit-to-unit link cable.  
9
Select 2:CBL/CBR to set up the TIN73 to use either of the  
applications. An informational screen first appears. Press any  
key to continue to the next menu.  
9 2  
Specifying the Data Collection Method  
With a CBL 2/CBL or CBR, you can collect data in one of three  
ways: GAUGE (bar or meter), DATA LOGGER (a Temp-Time,  
Light-Time, Volt-Time, or Sonic-Time graph), or RANGER,  
which runs the RANGER program, the built-in CBR data  
collection program.  
CBL 2/CBL and CBR differ in that CBL 2/CBL allows you to  
collect data using one of four different probes: Temperature,  
Light, Volt, or Sonic. CBR collects data using only the Sonic  
probe. You can find more information on CBL 2/CBL and CBR  
in their user manuals.  
   
266 Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application  
9 2 b  
1:GAUGE  
Represents results as either a bar or  
meter. Compatible with CBL 2/CBL or  
CBR.  
2:DATA LOGGER  
Represents results as a Temp-Time,  
Light-Time, Volt-Time, or Sonic-Time  
graph. Compatible with CBL 2/CBL or  
CBR.  
3:RANGER  
Sets up and runs the RANGER program  
and represents results as a  
Distance-Time, Velocity-Time, or  
Acceleration-Time graph. Compatible  
with CBR only.  
4:QUIT  
Quits the CBLàCBR application.  
Specifiying Data Collection Options  
After you select a data collection method, a screen showing  
the options for that method is displayed. The method you  
choose, as well as the data collection options you choose for  
that method, determine whether you use the CBR or the  
CBL 2/CBL. Refer to the charts in the following sections to  
find the options for the application you are using.  
GAUGE  
9 2 b  
   
Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application 267  
1
The GAUGE data collection method lets you choose one of four  
different probes: Temp, Light, Volt, or Sonic. You can use the  
CBL 2/CBL with all probes; you can use the CBR only with the  
Sonic probe.  
When you select a PROBE option, all other options change  
accordingly. Use " and ! to move between the PROBE  
options. To select a probe, highlight the one you want with the  
cursor keys, and then press b.  
GAUGE Options (Defaults)  
Temp  
Light  
Volt  
Sonic  
TYPE:  
Bar or Meter  
MIN:  
0
0
1
M10  
10  
0
6
MAX:  
100  
UNITS:  
DIRECTNS:  
¡C or ¡F mWàcm2  
On or Off  
Volt  
m or Ft  
TYPE  
The GAUGE data collection results are represented according  
to TYPE: Bar or Meter. Highlight the one you want with the  
cursor keys, and then press b.  
Bar  
Meter  
 
268 Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application  
MIN and MAX  
MIN and MAX refer to the minimum and maximum UNIT values  
for the specified PROBE. Defaults are listed in the table on page  
267. See the CBL 2/CBL and CBR guidebook for specific  
MINàMAX ranges. Enter values using the number keys.  
UNITS  
The results are displayed according to the UNITS specified. To  
specify a unit measurement (Temp or Sonic probes only),  
highlight the one you want using the cursor keys, and then  
press b.  
DIRECTNS (Directions)  
If DIRECTNS=On, the calculator displays step-by-step directions  
on the screen, which help you set up and run the data  
collection. To select On or Off, highlight the one you want with  
the cursor keys, and then press b.  
With the Sonic data collection probe, if DIRECTNS=On, the  
calculator displays a menu screen before starting the  
application asking you to select 1:CBL or 2:CBR. This ensures  
that you get the appropriate directions. Press 1 to specify CBL  
or 2 to specify CBR.  
Data Collection Comments and Results  
To label a specific data point, press b to pause the data  
collection. You see a Comment= prompt. Enter up to a  
six-character comment using the Text editor (- t) or  
number keys. The calculator automatically converts the  
comment labels and the corresponding results into list  
elements using the following list names (you cannot rename  
these lists):  
 
Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application 269  
Probe Comment Labels (X) Data Results (Y)  
Stored to:  
Stored to:  
Temp  
Light  
Volt  
¨TCMNT  
¨LCMNT  
¨VCMNT  
¨DCMNT  
¨TEMP  
¨LIGHT  
¨VOLT  
¨DIST  
Sonic  
To see all elements in one of these lists, you can insert these  
lists into the List editor just as you would any other list.  
Access list names from the - v Ls menu.  
CAUTION: These lists are only temporary placeholders for  
comment labels and data results for any particular probe.  
Therefore, every time you collect data and enter comments for  
one of the four probes, the two lists pertaining to that probe  
are overwritten with comment labels and data results from the  
most recently collected data.  
If you want to save comment labels and data results from  
more than one data collection, copy all list elements that you  
want to save to a list with a different name.  
Also, the DATA LOGGER data collection method stores data  
results to the same list names, overwriting previously-  
collected data results, even those collected using the GAUGE  
data collection method.  
DATA LOGGER  
9 2 b  
2
   
270 Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application  
The DATA LOGGER data collection method lets you choose one  
of four different probes: Temp, Light, Volt, or Sonic. You can use  
the CBL 2/CBL with all probes; you can use the CBR only with  
the Sonic probe.  
When you select a PROBE option, all other options change  
accordingly. Use " and ! to move between the PROBE  
options. To select a probe, highlight the one you want with the  
cursor keys, and then press b.  
DATA LOGGER Options (Defaults)  
Temp  
Light  
Volt  
99  
Sonic  
50  
#SAMPLES:  
INTRVL (SEC):  
UNITS:  
99  
1
99  
1
1
1
¡C or ¡F mWàcm2  
Volt  
m or Ft  
PLOT:  
RealTme or End  
DIRECTNS:  
Ymin ('):  
Ymax ('):  
On or Off  
0
6
The DATA LOGGER data collection results are represented as a  
Temp-Time, Light-Time, Volt-Time, or Distance-Time graph.  
Probe-Time Graph  
A Distance-Time graph in  
meters (Sonic probe).  
#SAMPLES  
#SAMPLES refers to how many data samples are collected and  
then graphed. For example, if #SAMPLES=99, data collection  
stops after the 99th sample is collected. Enter values using the  
number keys.  
 
Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application 271  
INTRVL (SEC)  
INTRVL (SEC) specifies the interval in seconds between each  
data sample that is collected. For example, if you want to  
collect 99 samples and INTRVL=1, it takes 99 seconds to finish  
data collection. Enter values using the number keys. See the  
CBR or CBL 2/CBL guidebook for more information about  
interval limits.  
UNITS  
The results are displayed according to the UNITS specified. To  
specify a unit measurement (Temp or Sonic only), highlight the  
one you want using the cursor keys, and then press b.  
PLOT  
You can specify whether you want the calculator to collect  
realtime (RealTme) samples, which means that the calculator  
graphs data points immediately as they are being collected, or  
you can wait and show the graph only after all data points  
have been collected (End). Highlight the option you want with  
the cursor keys, and then press b.  
Ymin and Ymax  
To specify Ymin and Ymax values for the final graph, press  
' to view the PLOT WINDOW screen. Use $ and # to  
move between options. Enter Ymin and Ymax using the number  
keys. Press - l to return to the DATA LOGGER options  
screen.  
DIRECTNS (Directions)  
If DIRECTNS=On, the calculator displays step-by-step directions  
on the screen, which help you set up and run the data  
collection. To select On or Off, highlight the one you want with  
the cursor keys, and then press b.  
With the Sonic data collection probe, if DIRECTNS=On, the  
calculator displays a menu screen before starting the  
application asking you to select 1:CBL or 2:CBR. This ensures  
that you get the appropriate directions. Press 1 to specify CBL  
or 2 to specify CBR.  
 
272 Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application  
Data Collection Results  
The calculator automatically converts all collected data points  
into list elements using the following list names (you cannot  
rename the lists):  
Probe Time Values (X)  
Data Results (Y)  
stored to:  
Stored to:  
Temp  
Light  
Volt  
¨TTEMP  
¨TLGHT  
¨TVOLT  
¨TDIST  
¨TEMP  
¨LIGHT  
¨VOLT  
¨DIST  
Sonic  
To see all elements in one of these lists, you can insert these  
lists into the List editor just as you would any other list.  
Access list names from the - v Ls menu.  
CAUTION: These lists are only temporary placeholders for  
data results for any particular probe. Therefore, every time  
you collect data for one of the four probes, the list pertaining  
to that probe is overwritten with data results from the most  
recently collected data.  
If you want to save data results from more than one data  
collection, copy all list elements that you want to save to a list  
with a different name.  
Also, the GAUGE data collection method stores data results to  
the same list names, overwriting previously-collected data  
results, even those collected using the DATA LOGGER data  
collection method.  
RANGER  
Selecting the RANGER data collection method runs the CBR  
RANGER program, a customized program especially for the  
TIN73 which makes it compatible with the CBR.  
   
Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application 273  
9 2 b 3  
b
For detailed information about the RANGER program as well as  
option explanations, see the Getting Started with CBRè  
guidebook.  
Note: If you execute the RANGER data collection method, the  
program name, RANGER, appears in the 8 EXEC menu. You  
can’t edit the program, but you can execute it from this menu,  
just as you would another program. If you delete RANGER from  
the 8 EXEC menu (- Ÿ 4:Delete 6:Prgm), you can no  
longer access RANGER from this menu; you must select 9  
2:CBLàCBR 3:RANGER.  
The RANGER data collection method only uses the Sonic probe.  
Collecting the Data  
After you specify all of the options for your data collection  
method, select the Go option from the GAUGE or DATA LOGGER  
options screen. If you are using the RANGER data collection  
method, select 1:SETUPàSAMPLE from the MAIN MENU menu, and  
then START NOW.  
   
274 Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application  
If DIRECTNS=Off, GAUGE and DATA LOGGER data collection  
begin immediately.  
If DIRECTNS=On, the calculator displays step-by-step  
directions.  
If PROBE=Sonic, the calculator first displays a menu screen  
asking you to select 1:CBL or 2:CBR. This ensures that you  
get the appropriate directions. Press 1 to specify CBL or 2  
to specify CBR.  
If you select START NOW from the MAIN MENU of the  
RANGER data collection method, the calculator displays  
one directions screen. Press b to begin data  
collection.  
Stopping Data Collection  
To stop the GAUGE data collection method, press : on the  
TIN73.  
The DATA LOGGER and RANGER data collection methods stop  
after the specified number of samples have been collected. To  
stop them before this happens:  
1. Press ^ on the TIN73.  
2. Press ¤ on the CBR, T on the CBL 2, or  
P on the CBL.  
To exit from the GAUGE or DATA LOGGER option menus  
without beginning data collection, press - l.  
To exit from the RANGER option menu without beginning data  
collection, select MAIN MENU. Select 6:QUIT to return to the  
CBLàCBR APP menu.  
Press 4:QUIT from the CBLàCBR APP menu to return to the  
TIN73 Home screen.  
   
Memory  
Management  
14  
The - Ÿ MEMORY Menu ..........................................276  
About - Ÿ 1.......................................................276  
Check RAM - Ÿ 2..............................................277  
Check APPs - Ÿ 3 ..............................................277  
Delete - Ÿ 4 ......................................................278  
Clear Home - Ÿ 5..............................................279  
ClrAllLists - Ÿ 6.................................................280  
Reset - Ÿ 7 ........................................................280  
 
276 Chapter 14: Memory Management  
The - Ÿ MEMORY Menu  
At any time, you can check available memory or manage  
existing memory by selecting items from the - Ÿ MEMORY  
menu.  
- Ÿ  
1:About  
Displays information about the  
calculator.  
2:Check RAM  
Reports memory availability and variable  
usage.  
3:Check APPs  
4:Delete  
Reports availability of application spaces.  
Displays the DELETE FROM menu.  
Clears the Home screen.  
5:Clear Home  
6:ClrAllLists  
7:Reset  
Clears all lists in memory.  
Displays the RESET menu, which allows  
you to reset all RAM memory or all  
defaults.  
About - Ÿ 1  
About displays information about your TIN73. To leave the  
About screen and return to the Home screen, press either -  
l or :.  
GRAPH EXPLORER SOFTWARE  
Version  
X.X  
PROD. ID:02-X-XX-XX  
ID:XXXXX-XXXXX-XXXX  
Number  
- Ÿ 1  
Help:education.ti.com  
 
Chapter 14: Memory Management 277  
Check RAM - Ÿ 2  
Check RAM displays the MEM FREE screen. The top line reports  
the total amount of available memory. The remaining lines  
report the amount of memory each variable type is using. You  
can check this screen to see whether you need to delete  
variables from memory to make room for new data.  
To leave the MEM FREE screen, press either - l or :.  
- Ÿ 2  
Check APPs - Ÿ 3  
Check Apps displays the Spaces Free screen, which displays  
application memory available on the calculator. Four spaces in  
the calculator’s memory are reserved for applications. The  
TIN73 comes with the CBLàCBR application already loaded.  
Since applications take up no RAM memory, selecting  
- Ÿ 4:Delete 1:All doesn’t delete any applications. Instead,  
delete an application using - Ÿ 4:Delete 8: Apps.  
The Spaces Free screen displays how many spaces are free as  
well as the names of all loaded applications and the spaces  
each one occupies. (Any application can occupy anywhere  
from one to four spaces depending upon its size.)  
To leave the Spaces Free screen and return to the Home screen,  
press either - l or :.  
For more information on running applications on the TIN73,  
see Chapter 13: Communication Link and the CBLàCBR  
Application.  
 
278 Chapter 14: Memory Management  
- Ÿ 3  
Delete - Ÿ 4  
To increase available RAM memory or application space, you  
can delete the contents of any type of system variable. You  
also can delete applications or the application variable,  
AppVars. Delete displays a menu of types of variables from  
which you can select. Selecting a type displays a DELETE:type  
screen of specific variables to delete.  
To leave any DELETE:type screen without deleting anything,  
press - l, which displays the Home screen. Some system  
variables, such as the last-answer variable Ans and the  
statistical variable RegEQ are not listed and cannot be deleted.  
- Ÿ 4  
To delete from the DELETE FROM screen:  
1. Press - Ÿ 4:Delete to display the DELETE FROM  
secondary menu.  
2. Select the data type of the variable you want to delete, or  
select 1:All for a list of all variables of all types. The  
DELETE: type menu is displayed, listing each specific  
variable of the type you selected and the number of bytes  
each variable is using.  
3. Press $ and # to move the selection cursor (8) next to  
the variable you want to delete, and then press b.  
The variable is deleted from memory. Repeat, as  
necessary.  
 
Chapter 14: Memory Management 279  
List - Ÿ 4 3  
In addition to deleting lists from the DELETE:List menu, you  
also can delete IDList. The IDList stores any additional IDs that  
have been collected from other calculators (using the 9  
1:Link 1:Receive feature). Therefore, at any time you can delete  
IDList, just as you would delete any other variable.  
The - Ÿ 2:Check RAM MEM FREE screen adds all statistical  
list and IDList memory bytes together and displays the total  
after the List.  
Apps and AppVars - Ÿ 4 8 and 9  
Apps allows you to delete individual applications that have  
been stored on the calculator. Individual applications are not  
deleted when you select - Ÿ 4:Delete 1:All because they  
are stored in ROM memory (as opposed to RAM).  
AppVars is a variable holder used to store variables created by  
independent applications, but which are not recognized by the  
TIN73. For example, if you create a matrix with an application  
and save it to the calculator’s memory, the calculator stores it  
in AppVars since matrices are not recognized by the TIN73.  
In addition, you cannot edit or change variables in AppVars  
unless you do so through the application which created them.  
For more information on running applications, see Chapter 13:  
Link Communication and the CBLàCBR Application.  
Clear Home - Ÿ 5  
Clear Home not only clears the Home screen (like ClrScreen) but  
also clears all previous entries stored in - £ (unlike  
ClrScreen). In addition, all previous entries displayed on the  
Home screen are erased. To cancel Clear Home without  
clearing, press :.  
Note: Clear Home is different from the ClrScreen programming  
command found under the 8 I/O menu.  
 
280 Chapter 14: Memory Management  
You can execute Clear Home from either the Home screen or  
the Program editor. If you select Clear Home from the Program  
editor, it is inserted at the cursor location. The Home screen  
and all entries are cleared when the program is executed.  
Clear Home takes no additional arguments.  
To clear the Home screen and all entries:  
1. Press - l to display the Home screen.  
2. Press - Ÿ 5 to paste the instruction to the Home  
screen.  
3. Press b to execute the instruction.  
ClrAllLists - Ÿ 6  
ClrAllLists sets to 0 the dimension of each list in memory. To  
cancel ClrAllLists, press :. ClrAllLists does not delete list  
names from memory, from the - v Ls menu, or from the  
List editor.  
You can execute ClrAllLists from either the Home screen or the  
Program editor. If you select ClrAllLists from within the  
Program editor, it is inserted at the cursor location. The lists  
are cleared when the program is executed.  
ClrAlllLists takes no additional arguments.  
To clear all elements from all lists:  
1. Press - l to display the Home screen.  
2. Press - Ÿ 6 to paste the instruction to the Home  
screen.  
3. Press b to execute the instruction.  
Reset - Ÿ 7  
The RESET secondary menu gives you the options of resetting  
all RAM memory (including default settings) or only resetting  
the default settings while preserving other data stored in  
memory, such as programs and Yn functions. To leave without  
resetting and to return to the Home screen, press either  
- l or :.  
 
Chapter 14: Memory Management 281  
Resetting All Memory - Ÿ 7 1  
Resetting all RAM memory on the TIN73 restores the memory  
to the factory settings. It deletes all non-system variables and  
all programs. It resets all system variables to the default  
settings.  
Before you reset ALL memory, consider deleting only selected  
data using - Ÿ 4:Delete.  
- Ÿ 7  
- Ÿ 7  
1
From the RESET RAM screen:  
Select 1:No to cancel memory reset and return to the  
Home screen.  
Select 2:Reset to erase from memory all data and  
programs. All factory defaults are restored. Mem cleared is  
displayed on the Home screen.  
When you clear memory, the contrast sometimes changes. If  
the screen is faded or blank, adjust the contrast. Press - $  
to increase the contrast or - # to decrease the contrast.  
 
282 Chapter 14: Memory Management  
Resetting Defaults - Ÿ 7 2  
When you reset defaults on the TIN73, all defaults are restored  
to the factory settings. Stored data and programs are not  
changed.  
Some examples of the TIN73 defaults that are restored by  
resetting the defaults are:  
Mode settings (.).  
Yn functions that are deselected (&).  
WINDOW variables (').  
Stat plots that are deselected (- e).  
WINDOW format settings (- g).  
rand seed value (1 PRB 1:rand).  
- Ÿ 7  
- Ÿ 7  
2
From the RESET DEFAULTS screen:  
Select 1:No to cancel defaults reset and return to the Home  
screen.  
Select 2:Reset to reset all defaults. Default settings are  
restored. Defaults set is displayed on the Home screen.  
Function and  
Instruction Reference  
A
All the operations in this section are included in the CATALOG  
(- |). Non-alphabetic operations (such as +, !, and >) are  
listed at the end of the CATALOG.  
You always can use the CATALOG to select an operation and insert it  
next to the cursor on the Home screen or to a command line in the  
Program editor. You also can use the specific keystrokes, menus, or  
screens listed here below the function or instruction’s name.  
† Indicates menus or screens that insert the operation’s name only  
if you are in the Program editor. In most cases (like mode or  
window format settings), you can use these menus or screens from  
the Home screen to perform the operation interactively; the name  
is not inserted at the cursor.  
‡ Indicates menus or screens that are valid only from the Program  
editor’s main menu. From the Home screen, you cannot use these  
menus or screens to select an operation.  
[ ] Indicate optional arguments. If you specify an optional  
argument, do not enter the brackets.  
4
5
8
5
2
5
A§b/c  
b
+
2
.
Selects the A§b/c Display Format mode setting.  
Displays results as mixed numbers, if applicable.  
1
10  
3
8Ab/c/d/e  
8
8
/
Ab/c d/e  
b
b
3
3
?
10  
3
1
3
/
Ab/c d/e  
Converts a simple fraction to a mixed number or a  
mixed number to a simple fraction.  
3
 
284 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference  
abs(value)  
M
abs( 35)  
b
35  
1NUM  
Returns the absolute value of a real number,  
expression, or each element of a list.  
conditionA and conditionB  
-t  
PROGRAM:AND  
Ü
:1 A  
Ü
:2 B  
Logic (boolean) operator; returns 1 if both conditionA  
and conditionB are true (non-zero). Returns 0 if  
either conditionA or conditionB is false (zero).  
conditionA and conditionB can be real numbers,  
expressions, or lists.  
:A>0 and B<0  
If both conditions are lists, they must have the same  
number of elements. If one condition is a list and the  
other a non-list, the non-list is compared with each  
element of the list, and a list is returned.  
Test operations are frequently used in programs.  
Ans  
¦
1.7 4.2  
b
7.14  
-¢  
b
147/ Ans  
Returns the last answer calculated.  
20.58823529  
augment(list1,list2)  
augment({1L, 3,2},{5,4})  
b
{1 L3 2 5 4}  
-vOPS  
Combines the elements of two lists, list1 and list2, to  
create a new list.  
1
9
5
9
2
3
Autosimp  
b
+
.
Selects the Autosimp Simplification mode setting.  
Automatically simplifies fractional results.  
AxesOff  
AxesOn  
-g  
WINDOW format settings; turns off or on the graph  
axes.  
3
4
2
5
4
b/c  
b
+
4
.
Selects the b/c Display Format mode setting. Displays  
results as simple fractions, if applicable.  
BarPlot  
See Plot1: Bar Graph  
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 285  
BoxPlot  
See Plot1: Box Plot  
Circle(X,Y,radius)  
b
ClrDraw  
Done  
2
b
Circle(0,0,7)  
Draws a circle with center (X,Y) and radius, a real  
number.  
WINDOW values are  
set with ZSquare.  
Clear Home  
-Ÿ  
Clears the Home screen (like ClrScreen), and also  
clears all entries stored in - £ and erases all  
entries on the History screen.  
ClrAllLists  
-Ÿ  
Sets the dimension of all lists in memory to 0.  
ClrDraw  
2
Clears all drawn elements from the graph screen.  
ClrList list1[,list2,list3,...]  
-vOPS  
1 ¨  
ClrList L , LIST  
b
Clears all items in at least one specified list.  
ClrScreen  
8I/O  
Programming command; clears the Home screen  
during program execution.  
ClrTable  
8I/O  
-|  
–or–  
Clears the values in the table during program  
execution if Indpnt:Ask is set.  
coin(tosses)  
b
coin(5)  
{1 1 0 1 0}  
1PRB  
Returns a random list of 0s and 1s that represents  
heads and tails for one or more coin tosses. tosses is a  
positive whole number.  
286 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference  
CoordOff  
CoordOn  
-g  
format settings; turns off or on cursor  
WINDOW  
coordinates so that they are not displayed at the bottom  
of the graph.  
cos(value)  
-uTRIG  
Returns the cosine of a real number, expression, or  
each element of a list. Results are determined by  
Angle mode setting ( or ).  
In Degree mode:  
cos(45)b  
.7071067812  
cos ({0,60,90})b  
{1 .5 0}  
Degree  
Radian  
In Radian mode:  
cos(p/2) b  
0
cos ({0,p/2,p}) b  
{1 0 L1}  
L
1
cos (value)  
In Degree mode:  
cos (1) b  
0
-uTRIG  
cos ({1,0}) b  
Returns the arccosine of a real number, expression,  
or each element of a list. M1  
1. Results are  
or  
{0 90}  
value  
determined by Angle mode setting (  
).  
Radian  
Degree  
In Radian mode:  
cos (.5) b  
1.047197551  
cos ({0,.5} )b  
{1.570796327 1. ...}  
Degree  
.  
Selects the  
In Degree mode:  
sin(90)b  
1
sin(2) b  
.0274121336  
Angle mode setting. Interprets  
Degree  
angles as degrees.  
DelVar variable  
8CTL –or– -|  
Deletes the contents of  
PROGRAM:DELVAR  
1
:{1,2}ÜL  
1
:Disp L  
from memory. You  
variable  
:Pause  
cannot delete a program or a system variable.  
1
:DelVar L  
1
:Disp L  
:Pause  
ERROR 14: UNDEFINED  
DependAsk  
-f  
Selects the  
format setting.  
Depend: Ask TABLE SETUP  
The user must highlight a dependent variable ( )  
Y
to view  
space with the cursor, and then press  
the value.  
b
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 287  
DependAuto  
-f  
Selects the  
format setting.  
Depend: Auto TABLE SETUP  
Table automatically displays dependent variable ( )  
Y
values.  
DiagnosticOff  
DiagnosticOn  
-|  
Settings which tell the calculator not to display  
(
) or to display (  
) r and r  
and  
DiagnosticOff  
(coefficient of determination) with  
DiagnosticOn  
LinReg  
regression model (  
) results or  
ExpReg  
- v CALC  
R for QuadReg regression model results.  
[,  
]
dice(rolls #dice )  
dice(5)b  
{5 1 3 6 2}  
1PRB  
dice(5,2)b  
Returns a random list of numbers (between 1 and 6)  
that represent dice rolls. takes one optional  
{11 5 7 2 10}  
dice(  
a positive whole number>1. If  
argument,  
#dice,  
#dice  
is specified, each list element is the total sum of one  
roll’s results.  
dim(list)  
newDimension#Xdim(list)  
dimension#Xdim(newList)  
1
{1,2,3}ÜL  
b
{1 2 3}  
3
1
dim(L ) b  
-vOPS  
1
5Üdim(L ) b  
5
1
L
b
{1 2 3 0 0}  
Returns the dimension (number of elements) of a  
defined list, changes the dimension of an existing list,  
or creates a new list with a specified number of  
elements. New elements are set to 0.  
4Üdim(¨NEW) b  
4
¨NEW b  
{0 0 0 0}  
[
,
,ꢀ]  
Disp valueA valueB  
PROGRAM:DISP  
:10ÜX  
8I/O  
:Disp X  
Programming command (display); displays one or  
more , as specified in an argument. To display  
:Disp X +3X–6  
:Pause  
values  
text, surround the  
the output, follow  
with quotation marks. To see  
value  
with a  
instruction.  
Pause  
Disp  
PROGRAM:DISPTEXT  
:Disp "MATH IS FUN!"  
:Pause  
DispGraph  
8I/O  
Programming command (display graph); displays the  
PROGRAM:GRAPH  
:"2X+5"ÜY  
:DispGraph  
graph for all defined and selected n functions during  
Y
program execution.  
288 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference  
DispTable  
PROGRAM:TABLE  
:"2X+5"ÜY  
8I/O  
Programming command (display table); displays the  
:IndpntAuto  
:DependAuto  
:DispTable  
table for all defined and selected n functions during  
Y
program execution.  
angle8DMS  
-uANGLE  
In Degree or Radian mode:  
50 DMS b  
¡8  
50 0'0"  
¡
Converts an angle to DMS (degrees minutes'  
¡
seconds") notation. Results are determined by the  
In Radian mode:  
50 DMS b  
8
Angle mode setting (  
or  
).  
Degree  
Radian  
2864 47'20.312"  
¡
:
:
:
,
DS<(variable value)  
(if answer  
command1  
command2  
PROGRAM:DS  
:9ÜA  
)
| value  
:Lbl S  
:Disp A  
8CTL  
Programming command (decrement and skip if less  
than); subtracts 1 from . If the answer is <  
:DS<(A,5)  
:Goto S  
variable  
is skipped; if the answer is  
:Disp "A IS NOW <5"  
:Pause  
, then  
, then  
value  
value  
always executed.  
command1  
command1  
|
is executed.  
is  
command2  
e^(x)  
e^(2.5)b  
12.18249396  
1LOG  
Raises e to a power of , where is a real number, an  
x
x
expression that results in an real number, or a list of  
real numbers. e equals 2.71828182846.  
value © exponent  
In Normal Numeric mode:  
12.3456789 © 5 b 1234567.89  
(1.78/2.34)© 2 b  
76.06837607  
-{  
Enters a number in scientific notation. The display of  
the result depends upon the Numeric mode setting  
or ). can be a real number or list.  
{6.34,854.6}© 3 b  
{6340 854600}  
(
Normal  
Sci value  
Else  
See  
:
:
:
If Then Else End  
End  
8CTL  
Programming command; you must include an  
End  
instruction at the end of each  
loop. Also, you must enter an  
, or  
Repeat  
instruction at the  
For(, While  
End  
end of each  
group.  
group and each  
If–Then–Else  
If–Then  
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 289  
ExpReg [XList,YList,freq,Y ]  
Ü
{1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9} L  
3 b  
Done  
Done  
Ü
4 b  
{1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9} L  
-vCALC  
Set Decimal mode to 2.  
Fits the equation (y=ab ) to XList and YList with  
frequency list, freq, and stores the regression equation  
to Y . XList, YList, and freq (if specified) must have  
the same number of elements.  
3
ExpReg L ,L ,Y  
4
b
freq is the frequency of occurrence for each  
corresponding data point in XList. If freq is omitted,  
all values are used once.  
Select ZStandard.  
Defaults for XList and YList are L1 and L2.  
ExprOff  
ExprOn  
-g  
WINDOW format settings; turns off or on the  
expression display in the top left corner while tracing  
a graph.  
8F/D  
3
8 /  
F
b
.
75  
D
4
>
3
4
8 /  
.75 F  
b
Converts a fraction to its decimal equivalent or  
changes a decimal to its fractional equivalent, if  
possible.  
D
Fill(number,list)  
Ü
{3,4,5} L  
1 b  
{3 4 5}  
Done  
{8 8 8}  
1
Fill(8,L )  
b
-|  
1 b  
L
Replaces each element in existing list with specified  
real number, number.  
Fix #ofplaces  
b
Fix 3  
Done  
3.142  
p b  
.
Sets fixed Decimal mode setting for # of decimal  
places. #ofplaces must be an integer between 0 and 9.  
It can be an expression which equals an appropriate  
integer.  
Float  
b
Float  
Done  
p b  
.
3.141592654  
Selects the Float Decimal Notation mode setting.  
Displays a decimal with a maximum of 10 digits,  
including the sign and decimal point.  
290 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference  
FnOff [1,2,3,4]  
FnOn [1,2,3,4]  
FnOff 1,3 b  
FnOn 2 b  
Done  
Done  
-}2:Y-Vars  
Turns off (deselects) or on (selects) all Yn functions  
or specified Yn functions (Y1, Y2, Y3, or Y4).  
:For(variable,begin,end,[increment])  
:block (while variable  end)  
:End  
:command  
PROGRAM:FOR  
:For(A,0,8,2)  
:Disp A2  
:Pause  
:End  
8CTL  
Programming command; executes commands in block  
through end, increasing variable from begin by  
increment until variable>end.  
fPart(value)  
1NUM  
Returns the fractional part of a real number,  
expression, or each element in a list.  
fPart(23.45)b  
fPart(L17.26¦8) b  
fPart({1.2,3.4,5.6}) b  
.45  
L.08  
{.2 .4 .6}  
1
1
2
fPart(1 )  
2
gcd(valueA,valueB)  
1MATH  
Returns the greatest common divisor (the largest  
gcd(27,36) b  
9
27  
3
4
4Simp 9 b  
36  
number that can divide into the two values evenly), of  
two positive whole numbers or lists of positive whole  
numbers.  
Get(variable)  
PROGRAM:GETSOUND  
:Send ({3,.00025,99,1,0,0,0,0,  
8I/O –or– -|  
13})  
:Get(L1)  
:Get(L2)  
Gets data from a CBR or CBL 2/CBL System and stores  
it in variable.  
GetCalc(variable)  
PROGRAM:GETCALC  
:GetCalc(L1)  
:GetCalc(Y1)  
8I/O or-|  
Gets contents of variable from another TIN73 and  
stores it to variable on the receiving TIN73.  
:GetCalc(Pic1)  
getKey  
PROGRAM:GETKEY  
:Lbl A  
8I/O  
:0"K  
Programming command; returns the key code for the  
current keystroke. See Chapter 12: Programming for  
the Key Code Diagram displayed with the GetKey  
explanation.  
:While K=0  
:getKey"K  
:End  
:Disp K  
:If Kƒ45  
:Goto A  
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 291  
Goto label  
8CTL  
PROGRAM:GOTO  
:Lbl 99  
:Input A  
Programming command; transfers program control to  
:If A 100  
the label specified by preceding label instruction.  
:Stop  
:Disp A  
:Pause  
:Goto 99  
GraphStyle(Y ,type)  
8CTL -|  
PROGRAM:STYLE  
Ü
:"2X+5" Y  
–or–  
:GraphStyle(1,4)  
:ZStandard  
Defines one of seven graphstyle types for Y . Y =1, 2,  
n
3, or 4 (for Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4). The type icons described  
below are located to the left of Yn in the Y= editor.  
1 = » (line)  
5 = À (path)  
6 = Á (animate)  
7 = Â (dot)  
2 = ¼ (thick)  
3 = ¾ (above)  
4 = ¿ (below)  
GridOff  
GridOn  
-g  
WINDOW format settings; turn off or on grid lines that  
correspond with Xscl and Yscl while graphing.  
Histogram  
See Plot1: Histogram  
Horizontal y  
b
Horiz 4.5  
2DRAW  
Draws a horizontal line on the current graph at Y=y. y  
can be an expression but not a list.  
:If condition  
:command1 (if true)  
:command2  
PROGRAM:IF  
Ü
:0 A  
:Lbl Z  
Ü
:A+1 A  
8CTL  
:Disp "A IS",A  
:Pause  
Programming command; if condition is true  
(non-zero), then command1 is executed. If condition  
:If A 2  
is false (zero), then command1 is skipped.  
:Stop  
:Goto Z  
292 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference  
If–Then  
PROGRAM:THEN  
:If condition  
:Then  
:block (if true)  
:End  
Ü
Ü
:1 X:10 Y  
:If X<10  
:Then  
Ü
:2X+3 X  
Ü
:2Y–3 Y  
8CTL  
:End  
Programming commands; if condition is true  
:Disp (X,Y)  
:Pause  
(non-zero), then block is executed. If condition is  
false (zero), then block is skipped.  
If–Then–Else  
:If condition  
:Then  
PROGRAM:ELSE  
:Input "X=",X  
:If X<0  
:block1 (if true)  
:Else  
:Then  
Ü
Y
:X  
:block2 (if false)  
:End  
:Else  
Ü
:X Y  
:End  
8CTL  
:Disp X,Y  
:Pause  
Programming commands; if condition is true  
(non-zero), then block1 is executed. If condition is  
false (zero), then block2 is executed.  
IndpntAsk  
-f  
Selects the Indpnt: Ask TABLE SETUP format setting.  
Table asks the user for independent variable (X)  
values.  
IndpntAuto  
-f  
Selects the Indpnt: Auto TABLE SETUP format setting.  
Table automatically displays independent variable (X)  
values.  
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 293  
Input  
Input [variable]  
Input ["text",variable]  
PROGRAM:INPUTVAR  
:Input "Y =",Y  
:Input "A=",A  
¨
¨
8I/O  
:Input " DATA=", DATA  
:Disp "Y (A)=",Y (A)  
:Pause  
Programming command; Input, with no arguments,  
displays the current graph. Otherwise, Input accepts  
input and stores it to variable (prompted by a ?,  
unless otherwise defined). text designates a specific  
text prompt (16 characters), if desired, and must be  
enclosed in quotation marks.  
:Disp  
¨
:"Y ( DATA)=",Y ( DATA)  
:Pause  
¨
:PROGRAM:GRPHINPT  
:FnOff  
:PlotsOff  
:ZStandard  
:Input  
:Line (0,0,8,8)  
:Pause  
int(value)  
b
b
int (23.45)  
23  
-|  
L
L24  
int ( 23.45)  
Returns the largest integer  value, where value can be a  
real number, expression, or list.  
For a negative non-integer, int returns the integer that is  
one less than the integer part of the number. To return  
the exact integer part, use iPart instead.  
à
posintegerA Int posintegerB  
b
9 Intà 2  
4r1  
-Œ  
Divides two positive integers and displays the  
quotient and the remainder, r.  
iPart(value)  
b
iPart (23.45)  
23  
L
iPart ( 17.26 8)  
iPart ({1.2,3.4,5.6})  
¦
b
1NUM  
L138  
b
Returns the integer part of a real number, expression,  
or each element of a list.  
{1 3 5}  
1
1
iPart(1 )  
2
:IS>(variable,value)  
:command1 (if answer is  value)  
:command2  
:PROGRAM:IS  
Ü
:0 A  
:Lbl S  
8CTL  
:Disp A  
:IS>(A,5)  
:Goto S  
Programming command (increment and skip if  
greater than); adds variable by 1. If the answer is >  
value, then command1 is skipped; if the answer is   
value, then command1 is executed. command2 is  
always executed.  
:Disp "A IS NOW >5"  
:Pause  
294 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference  
¨listname  
ܨ  
{1,2,3} ABC  
b
{1 2 3}  
{1 2 3}  
¨
b
-vOPS  
List signifier; precedes all user-created names when  
displayed outside of the List editor.  
LabelOff  
LabelOn  
-g  
ABC  
WINDOW format settings; turns off or on axes labels.  
Lbl label  
8CTL  
PROGRAM:LBL  
:Lbl 99  
:Input A  
Programming command; gives a name (label) to a  
particular location in a program. label can be one or  
two text characters.  
:If A 100  
:Stop  
:Disp A  
:Pause  
:Goto 99  
lcm(valueA,valueB)  
b
lcm(10,6)  
30  
1MATH  
Returns the least common multiple (the smallest  
number that the two values can divide into evenly) of  
two positive whole numbers or lists of positive whole  
numbers.  
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same  
number of elements. If one argument is a list and the  
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each  
element of the list, and a list is returned.  
Line(X ,Y ,X ,Y [,0])  
2DRAW  
Draws a line from point (X ,Y ) to (X ,Y ).  
Select ZStandard and return to  
the Home screen.  
b
Line(0,0,6,9)  
Including the argument, 0, after the X and Y  
coordinates erases a line from (X ,Y ) to (X ,Y ).  
Return to the Home screen.  
b
Line(2,3,4,6,0)  
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 295  
LinReg(ax+b) [XList,YList,freq,Y ]  
-vCALC  
Fits the linear equation (y=ax+b) to XList and YList  
Decimal mode set to 2:  
Ü
3 b  
{1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9} L  
Done  
Done  
Ü
4 b  
{1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9} L  
3
LinReg(ax+b) L,L ,Y  
4
b
with frequency list, freq, and stores the regression  
equation to Y . XList, YList, and freq (if specified)  
must have the same number of elements.  
freq is the frequency of occurrence for each  
corresponding data point in XList. If freq is omitted,  
all values are used once.  
Select ZStandard.  
Defaults for XList and YList are L1 and L2.  
@List(list)  
-vOPS  
Returns a list of the differences between consecutive  
elements in a list.  
ln(value)  
ln(list)  
1LOG  
Returns the natural logarithm of a positive real  
Ü
{4.5,4.6,6,7.5} L  
2 b  
{4.5 4.6 6 7.5}  
{.1 1.4 1.5}  
.6931471806  
2.495956486  
@
2
List(L )  
b
b
ln(2)  
b
ln(36.4/3)  
number, an expression that results in a positive real  
number, or a list of positive real numbers.  
log(value)  
log(list)  
b
log(2)  
.3010299957  
1.083980129  
1LOG  
b
log(36.4/3)  
Returns the base 10 logarithm of a positive real  
number, an expression (that results in a positive real  
number), or a list of positive real numbers.  
1 1  
+
2
$
Mansimp  
b
4 4  
4
.
2
1
Fac=2  
2
4
b
Simp  
Selects the Mansimp Simplification mode setting.  
Requires user to simplify fractional results manually  
4
using the B key.  
296 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference  
Manual-Fit [Y ]  
Ü
{1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9} L  
3 b  
Done  
Done  
Ü
4 b  
{1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9} L  
-vCALC  
Allows you to fit manually a line to plotted data. The  
Set up Plot1 as a scatter plot  
and graph using ZStat:  
regression equation is stored to Y , if specified.  
Return to the Home screen and  
select Manual-Fit.  
Select beginning and ending  
points of line by moving the  
cursor and then pressing b.  
max(valueA,valueB)  
1NUM  
b
b
max(2.3,1.4)  
2.3  
6
-vMATH  
or –  
max({1,3,6})  
Returns the larger of two values or the largest  
element in one list. value can be a real number,  
expression or a list.  
b
max({1,10},{2,9})  
2 3  
{2 10}  
3
4
If both values are lists, they must have the same  
number of elements. If one value is a list and the  
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each  
element of the list, and a list is returned.  
max( ,  
3 4  
)
mean(list[,freq])  
-vMATH  
Returns the mean (mathematical average) of list. If a  
b
mean({1,2,3,4})  
2.5  
b
mean({1,2,3,4},{4,5,4,6})  
2.631578947  
second list, freq, is specified, it is interpreted as the  
frequency of the elements in the first list. list and freq  
must have the same number of elements.  
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 297  
median(list[,freq])  
-vMATH  
Returns the median (the middle element) of list. If a  
b
median({1,2,3,4})  
2.5  
2
b
median({1,2,6},{4,5,4})  
second list, freq, is specified, it is interpreted as the  
frequency of the elements in the first list. list and freq  
must have the same number of elements.  
Med-Med [XList,YList,freq,Y ]  
Decimal mode set to 2:  
Ü
3 b  
4 b  
b
-vCALC  
{1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9} L  
Done  
Done  
Ü
{1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9} L  
Fits a median-median model equation, y=ax+b, to  
XList and YList with frequency list, freq, and stores  
the regression equation to Y . XList, YList, and freq  
(if specified) must have the same number of elements.  
3
Med-Med L ,L ,Y  
4
freq is the frequency of occurrence for each  
corresponding data point in XList. If freq is omitted,  
all values are used once.  
(
6
Defaults for XList and YList are L1 and L2.  
Menu("title","item1",label1[,"item2",label2ꢀ])  
:PROGRAM:FRIENDS  
8CTL  
:Menu("FRIENDS","JULIE",A,  
"XIAODAN",B,"LETICIA",C,  
"ROBERTO",D,"DOUGLAS",E,  
"ANSIK",F,"DETER",G)  
Programming command; generates a menu of up to  
seven items during program execution. When you  
select a menu item, the calculator branches to the  
label corresponding with that item.  
min(valueA,valueB)  
min(list)  
L
min(3, 5)  
min( 5.2, L5.3)  
b
L5  
L5.3  
4
L
b
b
1NUM  
-vMATH  
min(5,2+2)  
or –  
min( (minimum) returns the smaller of two values or  
the smallest element in one list. value can be a real  
number, expression or a list.  
2 3  
2
3
min( ,  
)
3 4  
If both values are lists, they must have the same  
number of elements. If one value is a list and the  
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each  
element of the list, and a list is returned.  
ModBoxPlot  
See Plot1: Modified Box Plot  
298 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference  
mode(list[,freq])  
b
mode({1,2,4,3,1,8})  
-vMATH  
{1}  
Returns the mode (element which occurs most  
frequently) of list. If a second list, freq, is specified, it  
is interpreted as the frequency of the elements in the  
first list. list and freq must have the same number of  
elements.  
MultiConst  
-†  
Selects the Multiple mode (affects the Set Constant  
editor). Allows the user to access all defined  
constants (as opposed to only one).  
items nCr number  
b
5 nCr 2  
10  
1PRB  
b
5 nCr {2,4,6,8}  
Returns the number of combinations of n items taken  
{10 5 0 0}  
r number at a time. The order in which you select the  
items DOES NOT matter. items and number can be  
non-negative integers or lists.  
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same  
number of elements. If one argument is a list and the  
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each  
element in the list, and list of combinations is  
returned.  
Normal  
©M  
2
b
123  
1.23  
.
Selects the Normal Decimal Notation mode setting;  
Displays results with digits to the left and right of the  
decimal (as opposed to scientific notation).  
items nPr number  
b
5 nPr 2  
20  
1PRB  
b
{20 120 0 0}  
5 nPr {2,4,6,8}  
Returns the number of permutations of n items taken  
r number at a time. The order in which you select the  
items DOES matter. items and number can be  
nonnegative integers or lists.  
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same  
number of elements. If one argument is a list and the  
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each  
element in the list, and list of permutations is  
returned.  
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 299  
conditionA or conditionB  
-t  
Logic (boolean) operator; returns 1 if either  
PROGRAM:OR  
Ü
:1 A  
Ü
:2 B  
:A>0 or B<0  
conditionA or conditionB is true (non-zero). Returns  
0 if both conditionA or conditionB are false (zero).  
conditionA and conditionB can be real numbers,  
expressions, or lists  
If both conditions are lists, they must have the same  
number of elements. If one condition is a list and the  
other a non-list, the non-list is compared with each  
element of the list, and a list is returned.  
Test operations are frequently used in programs.  
Output(row,column,"text")  
Output(row,column,value)  
PROGRAM:OUTPUT  
Ü
:3+5 B  
8I/0  
:ClrScreen  
:Output(5,4,"ANSWER")  
:Output(5,12,B)  
:Pause  
Programming command; displays text or value at the  
beginning of specified row and column. You must  
surround text with quotation marks (- t).  
Pause [value]  
8CTL  
PROGRAM:PAUSE  
Ü
:10 X  
Ü
:"X+2" Y  
:ZStandard  
:Pause  
Programming command; suspends program execution  
until you press b or displays value and suspends  
program execution until you press b.  
PictoPlot  
See Plot1: Pictograph  
PiePlot  
See Plot1: Pie Chart  
Plot1(type,argument1,argument2,ꢀ)  
Plot2(type,argument1,argument2,ꢀ)  
Plot3(type,argument1,argument2,ꢀ)  
-ePLOTS  
Selects and defines Statistical Plot 1,2, or 3 ( Plot1,  
Plot2, Plot3), according to one of eight stat plot types.  
All types and corresponding arguments are listed  
next. Select type from the - e TYPE menu.  
(continued)  
300 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference  
Scatter Plot Ô  
xyLine Plot Ó  
Ü
{1,2,3,4,5,6} L  
1 b  
{1 2 3 4 5 6}  
Plotn(Scatter,Xlist,Ylist[,mark])  
Plotn(xyLine,Xlist,Ylist[,mark])  
Ü
2 b  
{1,2,3,4,5,6} L  
{1 2 3 4 5 6}  
The optional mark (, +, or ¦) specifies the character  
used to plot the points. If omitted, default mark is  
box. Access mark from 8 - e MARK or  
- |.  
PROGRAM:SCATTER  
:PlotsOff  
1
2
:Plot2(Scatter,L,L )  
Pictograph Î  
:ZStat  
:Trace  
Plotn(PictoPlot,CategList,DataList,scale,  
orientation,typeIcon)  
orientation=0 (vertical) or 1 (horizontal).  
typeIcon choices: PersonIcon (Î); TreeIcon (Ç);  
DollarIcon (È); FaceIcon (É); PieIcon (Ï); DiamondIcon  
(Ë); StarIcon (Ì). Access typeIcons from  
8 - e MARK or - |.  
Bar Graph Ð  
Plotn(BarPlot,CategList, orientation,  
DataList1[,DataList2,DataList3])  
orientation=0 (vertical) or 1 (horizontal). Specify  
between 1 and 4 DataLists.  
Pie Chart Ï  
Ü
1 b  
{1,2,3,4,5,6} L  
Plotn(PiePlot,CategList,DataList,type)  
{1 2 3 4 5 6}  
type=0 (Number Pie Chart) or 1 (Percent Pie Chart).  
Ü
{1,2,3,4,5,6} L  
2 b  
Histogram Ò  
Box Plot Õ  
Modified Box Plot Ö  
{1 2 3 4 5 6}  
PROGRAM:HISTOGRM  
:PlotsOff  
Plotn(Histogram,Xlist[,freq])  
Plotn(BoxPlot,Xlist[,freq])  
1
:Plot1(Histogram,L,L )  
2
Plotn(ModBoxPlot,Xlist[,freq,mark])  
:ZStat  
:Trace  
freq=1 (default) or a list name. The optional mark  
(;+;¦) specifies the character used to plot the points.  
If omitted, default mark is box. Access mark from  
8 - e MARK or - |.  
PlotsOff [1,2,3]  
PlotsOn [1,2,3]  
b
PlotsOff 1,3  
Done  
-e  
Turns off (deselects) or on (selects) all stat plots if no  
arguments are specified, or turns off or on specified  
stat plots using 1, 2, or 3, (for Plot1, Plot2, or Plot3).  
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 301  
prgmname  
PROGRAM:VOLUME  
:Input "DIAMETER=",D  
:Input "HEIGHT=",H  
8CTRL  
Programming command; calls  
as a  
prgmname  
:prgmAREA  
:A¦HÜV  
subroutine in an existing program.  
program not yet created.  
can be a  
name  
:Disp "VOLUME=",V  
:Pause  
PROGRAM:AREA  
:D/2ÜR  
:p¦R ÜA  
:Return  
[
ꢀ]  
Prompt variableA ,variableB,  
PROGRAM:PROMPT  
:Prompt Xmin  
:Prompt Xmax  
:Prompt Ymin  
8I/O  
Programming command; displays specified  
variable  
followed by . During program execution, at each  
=?  
prompt, the user enters a value or expression for each  
:Prompt Ymax  
, and then presses  
.
n functions are  
variable  
not valid with  
b Y  
The calculator adjustsWINDOW  
variable values according to  
user’s input.  
.
Prompt  
Pt-Change(X,Y)  
Pt-Change(L6,2) b  
2POINTS  
Changes a point’s status (on or off) at ( , ).  
X Y  
[
[
]
]
Pt-Off(X,Y ,mark )  
Pt-Off(3,5,2)b  
Pt-On(X,Y ,mark )  
Pt-On(3,5,2)b  
2POINTS  
Erases or draws a point at ( , ) using  
X Y  
(
1
= ¦;  
mark,  
= ;  
=
). If  
is omitted, the default  
is  
2
3
+
mark  
box. If you specified  
mark  
to turn on a point with  
mark  
, you must specify the same  
when turning  
mark  
Pt-On(  
it off.  
,
Pxl-Change(row column)  
PxlChange(10,75)b  
2POINTS  
Changes a pixel’s status (on or off) at (  
,
row column  
);  
0 62, and 0 94.  
row column  
,
,
Pxl-Off(row column)  
Pxl-Off(10,75)b  
Pxl-On(row column)  
Pxl-On(10,75)b  
2POINTS  
Erases or draws a pixel at (  
,
row column  
); 0 62,  
row  
and 0 94.  
column  
302 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference  
pxl-Test(row,column)  
b
Pxl-On(10,75)  
2POINTS  
Returns 1 if pixel at (row, column) is on; returns 0 if it  
Done  
1
b
pxl-Test(10,75)  
is off; 0row62, and 0column94.  
QuadReg [XList,YList,freq,Y ]  
-vCALC  
Decimal mode set to 2:  
Ü
3 b  
4 b  
b
{1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9} L  
Done  
Done  
Ü
{1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9} L  
Fits the second-degree polynomial (y=ax +bx+c) to  
XList and YList with frequency list, freq, and stores  
the regression equation to Y . XList, YList, and freq  
(if specified) must have the same number of elements.  
3
4
QuadReg L ,L ,Y  
freq is the frequency of occurrence for each  
corresponding data point in XList. If freq is omitted,  
all values are used once.  
Select ZStandard.  
Defaults for XList and YList are L1 and L2.  
Radian  
In Radian mode:  
b
.
sin(90)  
.8939966636  
1
b
sin(2)  
Sets the Radian Angle mode setting. Interprets angles  
as radians.  
rand  
seed Xrand  
Ü
0 rand  
b
0
.9435974025  
.908318861  
b
rand  
rand  
b
1PRB  
Generates a random number between 0 and 1. By  
storing an integer seed value (default=0) to rand, you  
can control a random number sequence.  
Ü
1 rand  
b
1
.7455607728  
.8559005971  
b
rand  
rand  
b
randInt(lower,upper[,#ofIntegers])  
(Results may vary.)  
1PRB  
b
randInt(1,10)  
3
Generates a random integer between lower and upper  
(both integers) boundaries. To generate more than  
one random integer, specify #ofIntegers, a positive  
whole number>0.  
b
randInt(1,10,3)  
{3 5 7}  
RecallPic number  
b
Line(0,0,6,6)  
b
2STO  
StorePic 2  
Done  
Displays the current graph and superimposes  
Picnumber on it. number can be 1 (Pic1), 2 (Pic2), or  
3 (Pic3).  
b
RecallPic 2  
(Pic2 displayed)  
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 303  
remainder(dividend,divisor)  
b
remainder(10,4)  
2
remainder(list,divisor)  
remainder(dividend,list)  
remainder(list,list)  
Ü
{5,5,5,5,5} L  
1 b  
{5 5 5 5 5}  
{1 2 3 4 5}  
1NUM  
Ü
2 b  
{1,2,3,4,5} L  
Returns the remainder resulting from the division of  
two positive whole numbers, dividend and divisor,  
each of which can be a list.  
1
remainder(L,L )  
2
b
{0 1 2 1 0}  
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same  
number of elements. If one argument is a list and the  
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each  
element of the list, and a list is returned.  
:Repeat condition  
:block  
:End  
:command  
PROGRAM:REPEAT  
Ü
:0 I:0 J  
Ü
:Repeat I 6  
Ü
Ü
: I+1 I:J+1 J  
:Disp "J=",J  
:Pause  
8CTL  
Programming command; executes block until  
condition is true.  
Return  
8CTL  
:End  
PROGRAM:AREA  
Ü
:D/2 R  
p¦ Ü  
A
:
R
Programming command; returns to the calling  
program.  
:Return  
PROGRAM:RETURN  
:Input "DIAMETER=",D  
:Input "HEIGHT=",H  
:prgmAREA  
¦
:A H V  
Ü
:Disp "VOLUME=",V  
round(value[,#decimal_places])  
1NUM  
In Float mode:  
p
round( ,4)  
b
3.1416  
Returns a number, expression, or each element in a  

list rounded to 10 digits or #decimal_places ( 9), if  
p
round( )  
b
3.141592654  
specified.  
Scatter  
See Plot1: Scatter Plot  
Sci  
b
©
123  
1.23  
2
.
Selects the Sci Numeric Notation mode setting.  
Displays results in scientific notation.  
304 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference  
Select(XList,YList)  
{1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9}ÜL3 b Done  
{1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}ÜL4 b Done  
-vOPS  
Select L5,L6 b  
Selects one or more specific data points from a  
Scatter or xyLine stat plot, and updates the lists in  
memory as specified by XList and YList.  
Select bounds by moving " and !,  
and then pressing b.  
X values for selected points are stored in L5;  
Y values for selected points are stored in L6.  
Send(variable)  
8I/O  
Programming command; sends contents of variable  
PROGRAM:SEND  
:{1,2,3,4,5}ÜL1  
:Send(L1)  
to the CBL 2/CBL System.  
seq(expression,variable,begin,end [,increment])  
-vOPS  
seq(X2,X,1,8,2) b  
{1 9 25 49}  
Returns a list that fulfills the requirements of the five  
arguments, which you specify. increment is 1 if not  
specified.  
SetConst(expression,Cn)  
PROGRAM:SETCONST  
:MultiConst  
-–or– -|  
:SetConst(+2,1)  
:SetConst(N4,2)  
:SetConst(¦2+3,3)  
:SetConst(+3¦2,4)  
Programming command equivalent of the Set Constant  
editor. expression defines the constant to be recalled,  
and Cn is 1, 2, 3, or 4 (for C1, C2, C3, or C4).  
prgmSETCONST b Done  
All constants are  
defined in the Set  
Constant editor.  
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 305  
SetMenu("title","item1",variable1[,"item2",variable2ꢀ])  
8CTL  
PROGRAM:SETMENU  
:SetMenu("MATHGRADES",  
"TEST1",A,"TEST2",B,"TEST3",  
C,"TEST4",D,"TEST5",E  
Sets up a menu with title (1characters16) and of up  
to seven items (1characters10). During program  
execution, the user inputs (and edits, as necessary)  
numerical values, called variables, to each item.  
SetUpEditor [list1,list2,list3ꢀ]  
Ü
{1,2,3,4} L  
1 b  
{1 2 3 4}  
{5 6 7 8}  
Ü
2 b  
{5,6,7,8} L  
-|  
1
SetUpEditor L,L  
2 b  
Done  
Removes all list names from the List editor, and then  
sets it up to display lists in the specified order,  
starting with column 1. If no lists are specified, the  
calculator sets up L1-L6 in order and includes one blank  
list to the right of L6.  
3
Press  
to view List editor.  
Shade(lower,upper[,left,right,pattern,res])  
Shade(XN2,X N8X,L5,1,2,3)  
b
2DRAW  
Draws both functions, lower and upper, shading  
above lower and below upper. You can limit shading  
by defining up to four optional arguments. Specify left  
and right X boundaries, pattern, which can equal 1-4  
(descriptions shown below), and res, which equals  
1-8 (1=highest resolution; 8=lowest resolution).  
b
ClrDrw  
Done  
Pattern:  
Shade(XN8X,XN2)  
b
1 = vertical (default)  
2 = horizontal  
3 = diagonal upper left to lower right  
4 = diagonal lower left to upper right  
4
Simp [simplification_factor]  
In Mansimp mode:  
24  
4Simp  
B
12  
b
Fac=2$  
In Mansimp Simplification mode, Simp simplifies a  
fraction by its lowest common factor (default) or by  
simplification_factor.  
36  
18  
24  
36  
2
3
b
4Simp 12  
sin(value)  
In Degree mode:  
b
-uTRIG  
sin(30)  
.5  
b
sin({0,30,90})  
Returns the sine of a real number, expression, or each  
{0 .5 1}  
element of a list. Results are determined by the Angle  
mode setting (Degree or Radian).  
In Radian mode:  
b
sin(p/2)  
1
b
sin({0,p/2,p})  
{0 1 0}  
306 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference  
sinL1(value)  
In Degree mode:  
b
-uTRIG  
Returns the arcsine of a real number, expression, or  
sin (1)  
90  
b
sin ({1,.5,0))  
{90 30 60}  
each element of a list. M1value 1. Results are  
determined by the Angle mode setting (Degree or  
Radian).  
In Radian mode:  
b
sin (1)  
sin ({1,.5,0))  
{.5235987756 0 1.570796327}  
1.570796327  
b
SingleConst  
-†  
Selects the Single mode (affects the Set Constant  
editor). Allows the user to access only one defined  
constant at a time.  
SortA(list)  
Ü
{5,8,M4,0, M6} L  
1 b  
SortA(indpntlist,dependlist1,dependlist2,ꢀ)  
{5 8 M4 0 M6}  
1) b  
SortA (L  
-vOPS  
Done  
1 b  
L
{M6 M4 0 5 8}  
Sorts list elements from lowest to highest value  
(ascending order) and categorical lists alphabetically.  
Ü
2 b  
{"E","A","Z"} L  
When using dependent lists, dependlist, the calculator  
sorts indpndtlist first, and then sorts all dependlists  
by placing their elements in the same order as their  
corresponding elements in the independent list.  
{"E" "A" " Z"}  
Done  
2) b  
SortA (L  
2 b  
L
{"A" "E" "Z"}  
SortD(list)  
Ü
{5,8,L4,0d,L6} L  
1 b  
SortD(indpntlist,dependlist1,dependlist2,ꢀ)  
{5 8 L4 0 L6}  
Done  
1) b  
SortD (L  
-vOPS  
1 b  
L
{8 5 0 L4 L6}  
Sorts list elements from highest to lowest value  
(descending order) and categorical lists in reverse  
alphabetical order.  
Ü
{"E","A","Z"} L  
2 b  
{"E" "A" " Z"}  
Done  
When using dependent lists, dependlist, the calculator  
sorts indpndtlist first, and then sorts all dependlists  
by placing their elements in the same order as their  
corresponding elements in the independent list.  
2) b  
SortD(L  
2 b  
L
{"Z" "E" "A"}  
stdDev(list[,freq,type])  
Ü
1 b  
{1,2,8,10,11,21} L  
-vMATH  
{1 2 8 10 11 21}  
Returns the standard deviation of list. If a second list,  
freq, is specified, it is interpreted as the frequency of  
the elements in the first list. list and freq must have  
the same number of elements.  
1
stdDev(L )  
b
7.250287351  
type=0 (population standard deviation) or 1 (sample  
population deviation). If type is not specified, the  
calculator returns sample population deviation.  
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 307  
Stop  
8CTL  
PROGRAM:STOP  
:Input "T=",T  
:If T20  
Programming command; ends program execution and  
returns to Home screen.  
:Then  
:Disp "T20"  
:Pause  
:Else  
:Stop  
StorePic number  
Line(0,0,6,6)b  
StorePic 2b  
Done  
2STO  
Stores the current graph display in one of three  
picture variables. is , or (for variable  
,
number 1 2  
3
).  
Pic1, Pic2, or Pic3  
[,start,end])  
sum(list  
-vMATH  
Returns the sum of all elements in  
sum({1,2,4,8})b  
sum({1,2,4,8},2,4)b  
sum({1,2,4,8},3)b  
15  
14  
12  
. Specify the  
list  
additional optional arguments to return the sum of the  
range of elements between and  
.
end  
start  
tan(value)  
-uTRIG  
In Degree mode:  
tan(0)b  
0
tan({0,1,30})b  
Returns the tangent of a real number, expression, or  
all elements in a list. Results are determined by the  
{0 .0174550649 .5773502692}  
Angle mode setting (  
or  
).  
Radian  
Degree  
In Radian mode:  
tan(p/4) b  
1
tan({p/2,p/4,0}) b  
{1 0 0}  
tanL1(value)  
-uTRIG  
In Degree mode:  
tan (1) b  
45  
tan ({.5,1,0))b  
Returns the arctangent of a real number, expression,  
or each element in a list.  
{26.56505118 45 0}  
Since tan=sinàcos, tan is undefined when cos=0.  
In Radian mode:  
tan (.5) b  
.463647609  
Results are determined by the Angle mode setting  
tan ({.5,1,0))b  
(
or  
).  
Radian  
Degree  
{.463647609 .7853981634 0}  
308 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference  
Text(row,column,["]text["])  
Select AxesOff.  
¦
Text(15,45,"2+3 4")  
b
2DRAW  
Draws text (functions, variables, or text instructions)  
on the Graph screen when a graph is displayed.  
0  row  57, and 0  column  94.  
If text is surrounded by quotation marks, the text  
characters are displayed. If the quotation marks are  
omitted, the TIN73 calculates and displays the result  
(up to 10 characters).  
Return to the Home screen  
b
ClrDraw  
Done  
¦
Text(15,45,2+3 4)  
b
Then  
See If-Then-End  
Trace  
PROGRAM:TRACE  
Ü
:"X " Y  
)
:DispGraph  
:Trace  
Selects the ) mode when displaying a graph.  
1-Var Stats [XList,freq]  
Ü
{1,2,3} L  
2 b  
{1 2 3}  
{3 2 1}  
ܨ  
{3,2,1} FREQ  
b
-vCALC  
2,¨  
1-Var Stats L FREQ  
b
Analyzes and returns data for one list, XList, with one  
measured variable (X). The frequency list, freq, is the  
frequency of occurrence for each corresponding data  
point in XList. Default XList is L1.  
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 309  
2-Var Stats [XList,YList,freq]  
Ü
{1,2,3} L  
2 b  
{1 2 3}  
{4 5 6}  
{2 4 2}  
b
Ü
3 b  
{4,5,6} L  
-vCALC  
ܨ  
{2,4,2} FREQ  
b
Analyzes and returns data for two lists, XList and  
YList, with two measured variables, X, the  
2, 3,¨  
2-Var Stats L L FREQ  
independent variable, and Y, the dependent variable.  
The frequency list, freq, is the frequency of  
occurrence for each corresponding data point in  
XList and YList. Defaults for XList and YList are L1  
and L2.  
Vertical x  
b
Vertical 4.5  
2DRAW  
Draws a vertical line on the current graph at X=x. x  
can be an expression but not a list.  
:While condition  
:block (while condition is true)  
:End  
PROGRAM:WHILE  
Ü
:0 I:0 J  
Ü
:While I<6  
:command  
Ü
Ü
:I+1 I:J+1 J  
:Disp "J=",J  
:Pause  
8CTL  
Programming command; tests condition before  
:End  
commands in loop are executed. While block of  
commands WHILE condition is true.  
xyLine  
See Plot1: xyLine Plot  
310 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference  
ZBox  
DefineY =Xsin(X).  
(ZOOM  
Displays a graph, lets you (interactively) draw a box  
Set the following WINDOW  
values:  
M
M
Xmin= 1000, Ymin= 1000,  
Xmax=1000, Ymax=1000,  
Xscl=90, Yscl=90  
that defines a new viewing WINDOW, and then updates  
the WINDOW.  
GraphY .  
Select ZBox.  
Move the cursor, and press  
b to select upper left and bottom  
right corners of the box.  
Selected portion (the box) is  
automatically displayed.  
ZDecimal  
(ZOOM  
Adjusts the viewing WINDOW so that @X=0.1 and  
Define Y=X, graph using  
ZStandard, and trace the graph  
@Y=0.1, and displays the graph screen with the origin  
centered on the screen.  
X and Y values  
increment by .212466.  
Select ZDecimal and trace the  
graph.  
X and Y values now  
increment by .1.  
 
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 311  
ZInteger  
Define Y =X, graph using  
(ZOOM  
ZStandard, and trace the graph  
Lets you select a new center point, and then sets  
@X=1, @Y=1, Xscl=10,Yscl=10. Replots the graph  
immediately.  
Select ZInteger, choose a new  
center point, and trace the  
graph.  
Move the cursor, and press  
b to select new center point.  
X and Y values now  
increment by 1.  
Zoom In  
(ZOOM  
Lets you select a new center point, if desired, and then  
DefineY =X and graph using  
ZStandard.  
magnifies the part of the graph that surrounds the  
cursor location.  
Select Zoom In. Move the  
cursor to the upper right  
section of the graph. Press  
b
to select a new center  
point and magnify the upper  
right side of the graphed  
function.  
 
312 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference  
Zoom Out  
DefineY =Xcos(X) and graph  
using ZStandard.  
(ZOOM  
Displays a greater portion of the graph, centered on  
Set the following WINDOW  
values:  
the cursor location. Move the cursor keys, and press  
b to select new center point.  
M
M
Xmin= 1000, Ymin= 1000,  
Xmax=1000, Ymax=1000,  
Xscl=90, Yscl=90  
Zoom Out from the origin.  
Select Zoom Out, and then press  
b (since cursor automatically  
starts from the origin).  
ZoomFit  
(ZOOM  
Recalculates Ymin and Ymax to include the minimum  
N
DefineY =X 20 graph using  
using standard WINDOW value  
(
(
6).  
and maximum y values, between Xmin and Xmax, of  
the selected functions and replots the functions.  
Adjust the graph with ZoomFit.  
 
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 313  
ZoomStat  
Ü
1 b  
{1,2,3,4,5,6} L  
(ZOOM  
{1 2 3 4 5 6}  
Redefines the viewing WINDOW so that all statistical  
data points are displayed.  
Ü
{1,2,3,4,5,6} L  
2 b  
{1 2 3 4 5 6}  
ZoomStat also selects an appropriate scale, if one  
exists, for a Pictograph plot.  
Graph and trace a Scatter stat  
1
plot using L and L (  
2
- e  
)
and ZoomStat.  
ZPrevious  
(MEMORY  
Replots the graph using the WINDOW variable values  
of the graph that was displayed before you executed  
the last ZOOM instruction.  
ZQuadrant1  
(ZOOM  
Replots the graph using WINDOW variable values for  
Define Y =X  
(
using ZStandard (  
6).  
Quadrant I (Xmin=0, Xmax=9.4, Xscl=1, Ymin=0,  
Ymax=9.4, Yscl=1).  
Select ZQuadrant1.  
ZSquare  
(ZOOM  
Adjusts the X or Y WINDOW settings so that each pixel  
Select ZStandard. Return to the  
Home screen.  
b
Circle(0,0,7)  
represents an equal width and height in the  
coordinate system and updates the viewing WINDOW.  
Circle is oval shaped  
instead of perfectly round.  
Continued  
(
)
 
314 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference  
Select ZSquare. Return to the  
Home screen.  
Or, press - £ b.  
Circle(0,0,7) b  
ZStandard  
Define Y =X  
Select ZStandard.  
(ZOOM  
Replots the functions immediately, setting the  
variables to the default values (  
WINDOW  
,
,
Xmin=M10 Xmax=10  
,
,
,
).  
Xscl=1 Ymin=M10 Ymax=10 Yscl=1  
ZTrig  
Define Y =sin(X) (&).  
Select ZTrig.  
(ZOOM  
Replots the functions immediately, updating the  
variables that are often appropriate for  
WINDOW  
graphing trig functions.  
value!  
5! b  
120  
1PRB  
Returns the factorial of  
.
value value  
can be an integer  
or list of integers between 0 and 69.  
angle¡  
-uANGLE  
Designates  
In Radian mode:  
50¡ b  
.872664626  
50¡4DMS b  
50¡0'0"  
as degrees, regardless of the current  
angle  
Angle mode setting or DMS notation.  
In Degree mode:  
50¡ b  
50  
50¡4DMS b  
50¡0'0"  
 
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 315  
r
angle  
In Radian mode:  
b
-uANGLE  
50  
50  
4
50 DMS  
b
Specifies an angle as radians, regardless of the  
current Angle mode setting.  
¡
2864 47'20.312"  
2864.788976  
In Degree mode:  
b
50  
4
50 DMS  
b
¡
2864 47'20.312"  
x
x
value  
b
4
2
256  
4
8
2
1MATH  
Calculates the x root of value, which is equivalent to  
n where n =value. value can be a real number,  
expression, or list.  
3
n
b
1MATH  
Calculates the cube of n, which is equivalent to  
Q
Q
n
n
n of any real number, expression, or each  
element in a list.  
(value)  
1MATH  
Calculates the cube root of value, which is equivalent  
3
b
(8)  
to n where n =value. value can be a real number,  
expression, or list.  
real_number%  
In Float mode:  
M
b
M
C
30.6%  
.306  
¦
20 % 30  
b
6
Changes real_number to percent. Results display  
according to the Decimal mode setting.  
conditionA = conditionB (equal)  
conditionA ƒ conditionB (not equal)  
conditionA < conditionB (less than)  
conditionA > conditionB (greater than)  
conditionA  conditionB (less than or equal to)  
conditionA conditionA (greater than or equal to)  
In Degree mode:  
b
sin(30)=cos(60)  
1
1
0
1
1
1
ƒ
sin(30) cos(90)  
b
b
b
b
b
sin(30)<cos(90)  
sin(30)>cos(90)  

sin(30) cos(60)  
sin(30) cos(90)  
-t  
Relational operators; return 1 if the conditional  
statement is true. Return 0 if the conditional  
statement is false. conditionA and conditionB can be  
real numbers, expressions, or lists.  
If both conditions are lists, they must have the same  
number of elements. If one condition is a list and the  
other a non-list, the non-list is compared with each  
element of the list, and a list is returned.  
316 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference  
+
¦
See Plot1: xyLine, Scatter, and Modified Box Plot: mark  
PersonIcon (Î)  
TreeIcon (Ç)  
DollarIcon (È)  
FaceIcon (É)  
PieIcon (Ï)  
DiamondIcon (Ë)  
StarIcon (Ì)  
See Plot1: Pictograph: typeIcons  
value-1  
In b/c mode:  
-ƒ  
Returns the inverse, x , of value, which is the  
2
3
3
2
M
1
b
1
equivalent of its reciprocal, / , of a real number,  
x
expression, or each element in a list.  
value2  
Ü
{1,2,3} L  
1 b  
{1 2 3}  
{1 4 9}  
1
L
b
6
Finds the square of value. value can be a real number,  
expression, or list.  
value^power  
b
4^4  
256  
7
Raises value to any power. value and power can be  
real numbers, expressions, or lists. power is limited  
by mathematical rules.  
M
M
M
b
M
M
14-68  
82  
16  
16  
b
b
a
(4 )  
M
( 4 )  
Negates a number, expression, or each element in a  
list. Note: This is different from the subtraction key  
(T).  
M
b
M
{ 1  
M
2
M
3}  
{1,2,3}  
10^(x)  
10^(list)  
b
b
10^(4)  
1000  
©M  
M
10^( 4)  
1
4
b
10^({1,2,3})  
1
LOG  
{10 100 1000  
Raises 10 to the power of x, where x is an integer or a  
M ‚  
list of integers. If x 4 and 10 , then the result is  
displayed in scientific notation.  
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 317  
(value)  
b
(16)  
4
-z  
Calculates the square root of value, which can be a  
positive real number, an expression that results in a  
positive real number, or a list of positive numbers.  
valueA¦valueB  
Ü
1 b  
{1,4,8} L  
{1 4 8}  
valueAàvalueB  
valueA+valueB  
valueANvalueB  
¦
4 L  
1 b  
{4 16 32}  
à
{2,4,8} {2,2,2}  
b
{1 2 4}  
MF\T  
M N  
456 123  
b
M
579  
Returns the product (I), quotient (F), sum (\) or  
difference (T) of valueA and valueB, which can be  
real numbers, expressions, or lists.  
In Autosimp mode:  
2
3
3
4
1
2
¦
b
If both values are lists, they must have the same  
number of elements. If one argument is a list and the  
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each  
element of the list, and a list is returned.  
§
In A b/c mode:  
1
1
4
b
4 +  
2
2
{
Ü
{"A","B","C"} L  
3
-t  
{"A" "B" "C"}  
Signifies the beginning of a list.  
(
b
4(3)  
12  
D
P
(4+4)6 8  
b
b
6
7
Designates a 1st priority calculation or implies  
multiplication.  
P
4+4(6 8)  
}
)
Ü
{"A","B","C"} L  
3
-t  
Signifies the end of a list.  
{"A" "B" "C"}  
b
4(3)  
12  
E
P
(4+4)6 8  
b
b
6
7
Designates a 1st priority calculation, implies  
multiplication, or completes functions and  
instructions.  
P
4+4(6 8)  
b
log(10)  
{"A","B","C"} L  
1
,
'
Ü
3
¡
{"A" "B" "C"}  
Separates list elements when entering them outside of  
the List editor, and separates function/programming  
command arguments.  
b
Circle(0,0,7)  
In Radian mode:  
¡
50 0'0"  
b
-uANGLE  
.872664626  
Specifies the minutes in DMS angle notation.  
318 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference  
"
Ü
3 b  
{"A","B","C"} L  
-t  
{"A" "B" "C"}  
-uANGLE  
PROGRAM:TEXT  
:AxesOff  
Surrounds categorical list elements and list formulas  
that are attached to a list name. Surrounds text  
displayed on the Graph display using the Text(  
command (from the Home screen or in a Program).  
:Text(15,45,"TEXT")  
:DispGraph  
PROGRAM:FUNCTION  
In a programming command, they surround text to be  
displayed with Disp, text which designates an Input  
prompt, and functions that are assigned to a Yn  
variable.  
Ü
:"2X+5" Y1  
:ZStandard  
PROGRAM:INPUT  
Specifies seconds in DMS angle notation.  
¨
:Input "NEW LIST=", NEW  
¨
:Disp " NEW=", NEW  
¨
:Pause  
In Radian mode:  
¡
50 0'0"  
b
.872664626  
:
PROGRAM:GREETING  
-|  
:Disp "HI, TERESA":Pause  
Precedes all programming commands (automatically  
displayed by the calculator in the Program editor).  
Separates two programming commands listed on one  
line or two entries on the Home screen.  
p
In Float mode:  
p b  
-„  
2
6.283185307  
p
Represents the value for the constant, , in  
p
calculations. The calculator uses =3.1415926535898.  
?
PROGRAM:QUESTION  
:Disp "WHAT TIME IS IT?"  
:Pause  
-|  
Displays a question mark, which acts like a text  
character.  
Reference  
B
Information  
The TIN73 Menu Map......................................................... 320  
The VARS Menu - } ............................................... 329  
Equation Operating System (EOS é) ................................ 330  
In Case of Difficulty............................................................ 331  
Correcting an Error ............................................................ 332  
Error Messages ................................................................... 332  
 
320 Appendix B: Reference Information  
The TIN73 Menu Map  
The TIN73 menu map begins at the top-left corner of the  
keyboard and follows the keyboard layout from left to right.  
Default values and settings are shown.  
&
Plot1 Plot2 Plot3  
çY1=  
çY2=  
çY3=  
çY4=  
- e  
- e (in Program editor)  
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿  
STAT PLOTS  
1:Plot1…Off  
Ô L1 L2  
2:Plot2…Off  
Ô L1 L2 ›  
3:Plot3…Off  
Ô L1 L2 ›  
4:PlotsOff  
PLOTS  
TYPE  
MARK  
1:Plot1(  
1:Scatter  
2:xyLine  
1:›  
2:Plot2(  
2:+  
3:Plot3(  
3:PictoPlot  
4:BarPlot  
5:PiePlot  
6:Histogram  
7:BoxPlot  
8:ModBoxPlot  
3:¦  
4:PlotsOff  
5:PlotsOn  
4:PersonIcon  
5:TreeIcon  
6:DollarIcon  
7:FaceIcon  
8:PieIcon  
9:DiamondIcon  
0:StarIcon  
5:PlotsOn  
'
WINDOW  
Xmin=-10  
Xmax=10  
@X=.2127659574…  
Xscl=1  
Ymin=-10  
Ymax=10  
Yscl=1  
 
Appendix B: Reference Information 321  
- f  
- f (in Program editor)  
TABLE SETUP  
TblStart=0  
TABLE SETUP  
Indpnt:Auto Ask  
Depend:Auto Ask  
@Tbl=1  
Indpnt:Auto Ask  
Depend:Auto Ask  
(
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿  
MEMORY  
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿  
ZOOM  
1:ZBox  
1:ZPrevious  
2:SetFactors…  
2:Zoom In  
3:Zoom Out  
4:ZQuadrant1  
5:ZSquare  
6:ZStandard  
7:ZoomStat  
8:ZDecimal  
9:ZoomFit  
0:ZInteger  
A:ZTrig  
ZOOM FACTORS  
XFact=4  
YFact=4  
- g  
.
CoordOn CoordOff  
GridOff GridOn  
AxesOn AxesOff  
LabelOff LabelOn  
ExprOn ExprOff  
Normal Sci  
Float 0123456789  
Degree Radian  
A§b/c b/c  
Autosimp Mansimp  
322 Appendix B: Reference Information  
1
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿  
MATH  
1:lcm(  
2:gcd(  
NUM  
PRB  
LOG  
1:abs(  
1:rand  
2:randInt(  
3:nPr  
1:log(  
2:10^(  
3:ln(  
2:round(  
3:iPart(  
4:fPart(  
5:min(  
3
3:  
3
4: (  
4:nCr  
5:!  
4:e^(  
x
5: ‡  
6:Solver…  
6:max(  
6:coin(  
7:dice(  
7:remainder(  
2
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿  
- u  
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿  
TRIG  
1:sin(  
DRAW  
POINTS  
1:Pt-On(  
2:Pt-Off(  
STO  
ANGLE  
1:¡  
1:ClrDraw  
2:Line(  
1:StorePic  
2:RecallPic  
2:sin 1(  
3:cos(  
4:cos 1(  
5:tan(  
2:'  
3:Horizontal 3:Pt-Change(  
3:"  
4:Vertical  
5:Shade(  
6:Circle(  
7:Text(  
4:Pxl-On(  
4:r  
6:tan 1(  
5:Pxl-Off(  
5:8DMS  
6:Pxl-Change(  
7:pxl-Test(  
8:Pen  
- v  
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿  
Ls  
OPS  
MATH  
CALC  
1:L1  
1:SortA(  
2:SortD(  
3:ClrList  
4:dim(  
1:min(  
1:1-Var Stats  
2:2-Var Stats  
3:Manual-Fit  
4:Med-Med  
5:LinReg(ax+b)  
6:QuadReg  
7:ExpReg  
2:L2  
2:max(  
3:L3  
3:mean(  
4:median(  
5:mode(  
6:stdDev(  
7:sum(  
4:L4  
5:L5  
5:@List(  
6:Select(  
7:seq(  
6:L6  
7:name1  
8:name2  
8:augment(  
9:¨  
Appendix B: Reference Information 323  
8
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿  
EXEC  
EDIT  
NEW  
1:Create New  
1:name1  
1:name1  
2:name2  
2:name2  
8 (in Program editor)  
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿  
CTL  
I/O  
EXEC  
1:If  
1:Input  
1:name1  
2:name2  
2:Then  
3:Else  
2:Prompt  
3:Disp  
4:For(  
4:DispGraph  
5:DispTable  
6:Output(  
7:getKey  
8:ClrScreen  
9:ClrTable  
0:GetCalc(  
A:Get(  
5:While  
6:Repeat  
7:End  
8:Pause  
9:Lbl  
0:Goto  
A:IS>(  
B:DS<(  
C:Menu(  
D:SetMenu(  
E:prgm  
F:Return  
G:Stop  
H:DelVar  
I:GraphStyle(  
B:Send(  
324 Appendix B: Reference Information  
- |  
CATALOG  
A§b/c  
4Abàc/dàe  
abs(  
sin(  
L
sin 1(  
SingleConst  
SortA(  
p
?
9
APPLICATIONS  
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿  
1:Link  
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿  
2:CBLàCBR  
SEND  
RECEIVE  
1:Receive  
1:GAUGE  
2:DATA LOGGER  
3:CBR  
1:All+…  
2:AllN…  
3:Prgm…  
4:QUIT  
4:List…  
5:Pic…  
6:Real…  
7:Y-Vars…  
8:Consts…  
9:Vars to TI82…  
0:Vars to TI83…  
A:Apps…  
B.AppVars…  
C:SendId  
D:Back Up…  
Appendix B: Reference Information 325  
- }  
VARS  
1:Window…  
2:Y-Vars…  
3:Statistics…  
4:Picture…  
5:Table…  
6:Factor  
- } 1:Window  
- } 2:Y-Vars  
WINDOW  
1:Xmin  
2:Xmax  
3:Xscl  
FUNCTION  
1:Y1  
2:Y2  
3:Y3  
4:Ymin  
5:Ymax  
6:Yscl  
4:Y4  
5:FnOn  
6:FnOff  
7:Xres  
8:@X  
9:@Y  
0:XFact  
A:YFact  
- } 3:Statistics  
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿  
XY  
G
EQ  
PTS  
1:x1  
2:y1  
3:x2  
4:y2  
5:x3  
6:y3  
7:Q1  
8:Med  
9:Q3  
1:n  
1:Gx  
2:Gx2  
3:Gy  
4:Gy2  
5:Gxy  
1:RegEQ  
2:a  
2:v  
3:Sx  
4:sx  
3:b  
4:c  
5:w  
5:r  
6:r2  
7:R2  
6:Sy  
7:sy  
8:minX  
9:maxX  
0:minY  
A:maxY  
326 Appendix B: Reference Information  
- } 4:Picture  
- } 5:Table  
1:Pic1 (Empty)  
2:Pic2 (Empty)  
3:Pic3 (Empty)  
TABLE  
1:TblStart  
2:@Tbl  
- ‚  
CONVERSIONS  
1:Length…  
2:Area…  
3:Volume…  
4:Time…  
5:Temp…  
6:MassàWeight…  
7:Speed…  
- ‚  
1:Length  
- ‚  
2:Area  
- ‚  
3:Volume  
LENGTH  
1:mm  
2:cm  
AREA  
1:ft2  
2:m2  
VOLUME  
1:liter  
2:gal  
3:m  
3:mi2  
4:km2  
5:acre  
6:in2  
7:cm2  
8:yd2  
9:ha  
3:qt  
4:inch  
5:ft  
4:pt  
5:oz  
6:yard  
7:km  
6:cm3  
7:in3  
8:ft3  
8:mile  
9:m3  
0:galUK  
A:ozUK  
- ‚  
5:Temp  
- ‚  
6:MassàWeight…  
- ‚  
7:Speed…  
TEMP  
MASSàWT.  
1:g  
SPEED  
1:ft/s  
1:degC  
2:degF  
3:degK  
2:kg  
2:m/s  
3:lb  
3:mi/hr  
4:km/hr  
5:knot  
4:ton  
5:mton  
Appendix B: Reference Information 327  
- †  
- † (in Program editor)  
Set Constant:  
SET CONSTANTS  
1:SetConst(  
Single Multiple  
C1=  
C2=  
C3=  
C4=  
2:SingleConst  
3:MultiConst  
- Ÿ  
MEMORY  
1:About  
2:Check RAM…  
3:Check APPs…  
4:Delete…  
5:Clear Home  
6:ClrAllLists  
7:Reset…  
- Ÿ 2:Check RAM  
- Ÿ 3:Check APPs  
MEM FREE 25002  
SPACES FREE 3  
Real  
15  
54  
32  
32  
15  
0
CBLàCBR  
1
List  
Y-Vars  
Consts  
Prgm  
Pic  
328 Appendix B: Reference Information  
- ‚ 4:Delete  
DELETE FROM…  
1:All…  
2:Real…  
3:List…  
4:Y-Vars…  
5:Consts…  
6:Prgm…  
7:Pic…  
8:Apps…  
9:AppVars…  
- ‚ 7:Reset  
RESET  
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿  
1:All RAM  
RESET RAM  
2:Defaults  
RESET DEFAULTS  
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿  
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿  
1:No  
2:Reset  
1:No  
2:Reset  
Resetting RAM  
erases all data  
and programs.  
Appendix B: Reference Information 329  
The VARS Menu - }  
Access system variables through the VARS menu (- }).  
You can enter the names of functions and system variables in  
an expression or store values to them directly. For more  
information about storing values to a variable, see Chapter 1:  
Operating the TIN73.  
All VARS menu items, except 6:Factor, display secondary menus.  
For specific information about the individual menu items, see  
their respective chapter in this manual. When you select a  
variable from a menu, it is inserted at the cursor location.  
- }  
1:Window  
2:Y-Vars  
Accesses WINDOW screen (') variables  
(Chapter 9: Function Graphing).  
Accesses Y= editor (&) variables (Chapter  
9: Function Graphing).  
3:Statistics  
Accesses 1-Var Stats and 2-Var Stats  
(- v CALC) variables (Chapter 7:  
Statistical Analyses).  
4:Picture  
5:Table  
Accesses picture (2 STO) variables  
(Chapter 10: Draw).  
Accesses TABLE SETUP (- f)  
variables (Chapter 8: Tables).  
6:Factor  
Returns the simplification factor of a  
fraction after you simplify it using B  
(Chapter 3: Fractions).  
 
330 Appendix B: Reference Information  
Equation Operating System (EOS é)  
The Equation Operating System (EOS) defines the order in  
which functions and expressions are entered and evaluated on  
the TIN73. Within a priority level, EOS evaluates functions from  
left to right and in the following order.  
1
2
Calculations within parentheses.  
Single-argument functions that precede the argument,  
such as (, sin(, or log(.  
Multi-argument functions, such as min(2,3), are  
evaluated as they are encountered.  
3
Functions that are entered after the argument, such as !,  
¡, r, and conversions.  
4
Powers and roots, such as 25 or 532.  
Permutations (nPr) and combinations (nCr).  
Multiplication, implied multiplication, and division.  
Addition and subtraction.  
5
6
7
8
Relational functions, such as > or {.  
Logic operator and.  
9
10  
Logic operator or.  
 
Appendix B: Reference Information 331  
In Case of Difficulty  
If  
Suggested Action  
You cannot see  
anything on the  
display.  
Press - $ to darken or - # to lighten  
the display contrast.  
The LOW BATTERY  
Replace the batteries as described in  
message is displayed Appendix C: BatteryàService and Warranty  
on the Home screen. Information.  
A checkerboard  
cursor (Ø) is  
displayed.  
Either you have entered the maximum  
number of characters in a prompt or  
memory is full. If memory is full, press  
- Ÿ 4:Delete, and then delete some  
items from memory (See Chapter 13:  
Memory Management).  
The busy indicator  
A calculation, graph, or program has been  
( © ) is displayed in the paused; the TIN73 is waiting for input. Press  
top right corner.  
b to continue, or press ^ to break.  
An error message is  
displayed.  
Refer to the section in this chapter entitled  
“Error Messages.” Press b to clear.  
The TIN73 does not  
Press - l as many times as needed to  
appear to be working exit any menu and to return to the Home  
properly.  
screen.  
– or –  
Be sure that the batteries are installed  
properly and that they are fresh.  
The difficulty  
persists.  
Refer to Appendix C: BatteryàService and  
Warranty Information for information on  
how to contact Customer Support to  
discuss the problem or to obtain service.  
 
332 Appendix B: Reference Information  
Correcting an Error  
When the TIN73 detects an error, it returns an error message as  
a menu title, such as ERR:SYNTAX or ERR:DIM MISMATCH.  
To correct an error, follow these steps:  
1. Note the error type (ERR:error type).  
2. Select 2:Goto, if it is available. The previous screen is  
displayed with the cursor at or near the error location.  
3. If you select 1:Quit (or press - l or :), the  
Home screen is displayed.  
4. Determine the cause of the error. If you cannot recognize  
the error, use the Error Messages table below which  
describes error messages in detail.  
5. Correct the expression.  
If a syntax error occurs in the contents of a Yn function  
during program execution, selecting 2:Goto returns you to  
the Y= editor, not to the program.  
Error Messages  
When the TIN73 detects an error, it displays ERR:TYPE and an  
error menu. This table contains each error type, possible  
causes, and suggestions for correction.  
The TIN73 detects errors while performing the following tasks:  
Evaluating an expression  
Executing an instruction  
Plotting a graph or stat plot  
Storing a value  
 
Appendix B: Reference Information 333  
Error Type  
Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies  
ARGUMENT  
A function or instruction does not have the correct  
number of arguments. See Appendix A and the  
appropriate chapter.  
BAD GUESS  
You specified a guess in the Equation Solver that is  
not between the lower and upper bounds.  
Your guess and several points around it are  
undefined.  
Examine a graph of the function. If the equation has  
a solution, change the bounds and/or initial guess.  
BOUND  
BREAK  
With Select(, you defined Left Bound>Right Bound.  
In the Equation Solver, you entered lowerupper.  
You pressed the ^ key to break execution of a  
program, to halt a DRAW instruction, or to stop  
evaluation of an expression.  
DATA TYPE  
You entered a value or variable that is the wrong  
data type.  
For a function (including implied  
multiplication) or an instruction, you entered  
an argument that is an invalid data type, such  
as a real number where a list is required.  
In an editor, you entered a type that is not  
allowed.  
You attempted to store to an incorrect data  
type, such as a real number to a list.  
DIM MISMATCH You attempted to perform an operation that  
references more than one list, but the lists do not  
have the same dimension (number of elements).  
334 Appendix B: Reference Information  
Error Type  
Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies  
DIVIDE BY 0  
You attempted to divide by 0. This error is not  
returned during graphing. The TIN73 allows for  
undefined values on a graph.  
You attempted a linear regression with a vertical  
line.  
DOMAIN  
You specified an argument to a function or  
instruction outside the valid range, such as using a  
negative frequency in box plots. This error is not  
returned during graphing because the TIN73 allows  
for undefined values on a graph. See Chapter 6:  
Statistical Plots or Chapter 9: Function Graphing.  
In a Pictograph, an element in Data List is too large  
so that the maximum scale (99999) can’t make all  
icons fit in one screen.  
You attempted an exponential regression with a MY.  
Duplicate Name A variable you attempted to transmit cannot be  
transmitted because a variable with that name  
already exists in the receiving unit.  
Error in Xmit  
The TIN73 was unable to transmit an item. Check to  
see that the cable is firmly connected to both units  
and that the receiving unit is in receive mode.  
You pressed ^ to break during transmission.  
You attempted to perform a backup from a TI-83 to a  
TIN73.  
You attempted to transfer data (other than L1-L6)  
from a TIN73 to a TI-83 without using the Lists to TI83  
command.  
You attempted to use Get( with another calculator.  
Appendix B: Reference Information 335  
Error Type  
Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies  
ILLEGAL NEST You attempted to use an invalid function in an  
argument to a function, such as seq( within  
expression for seq(.  
Can occur when combinations of nesting of function  
evaluation exceeds five levels.  
INCREMENT  
INVALID  
The increment in seq( is 0 or has the wrong sign. This  
error is not returned during graphing. The TIN73  
allows for undefined values on a graph.  
The increment in a For( loop is 0.  
You attempted to reference a variable or use a  
function where it is not valid. For example, Yn  
cannot reference Y, Xmin, @X, or TblStart.  
Defining and graphing a Yn equation using the  
variable Ans.  
You attempted to use Select( without having selected  
(turned on) at least one xyLine or Scatter plot.  
INVALID DIM  
ITERATIONS  
You specified dimensions for an argument that are  
not appropriate for the operation.  
You specified a list dimension as something other  
than an integer between 1 and 999.  
The Equation Solver has exceeded the maximum  
number of permitted iterations.  
Examine a graph of the function. If the equation has  
a solution, change the bounds, the initial guess, or  
both.  
LABEL  
The label in the Goto instruction is not defined with a  
Lbl instruction in the program.  
336 Appendix B: Reference Information  
Error Type  
Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies  
MEMORY  
Memory is insufficient to perform the instruction or  
function. You must delete items from memory  
(Chapter 13: Memory Management) before executing  
the instruction or function.  
Recursive problems return this error; for example,  
graphing the equation Y1=Y1.  
Branching out of an If/Then, For(, While, or Repeat  
loop with a Goto also can return this error because  
the End statement that terminates the loop is never  
reached.  
MemoryFull  
You are unable to transmit an item because the  
receiving unit’s available memory is insufficient. You  
may skip the item or exit receive mode.  
During a memory backup, the receiving unit’s  
available memory is insufficient to receive all items  
in the sending unit’s memory. A message indicates  
the number of bytes that the sending unit must  
delete to do the memory backup. Delete items and  
try again.  
MODE  
You attempt to simplify a fraction with B while in  
Autosimp Simplification mode.  
NO SIGN  
CHANGE  
The Equation Solver did not detect a sign change.  
OVERFLOW  
You attempted to enter, or you have calculated, a  
number that is beyond the range of the calculator.  
This error is not returned during graphing. The TIN73  
allows for undefined values on a graph.  
RESERVED  
SCALE  
You attempted to use a system variable  
inappropriately. See Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73.  
The Pictograph scale is invalid. Scale must be an  
integer between 1 and 99,999.  
Appendix B: Reference Information 337  
Error Type  
Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies  
SINGULARITY  
expression in the Equation Solver contains a  
singularity (a point at which the function is not  
defined). Examine a graph of the function. If the  
equation has a solution, change the bounds or the  
initial guess or both.  
STAT  
You attempted a stat calculation with lists that are  
not appropriate.  
Statistical analyses must have at least two data  
points.  
Med-Med must have at least three data points in  
each partition.  
When you use a frequency list, its elements  
must be 0.  
(Xmax-Xmin)/Xscl must be 47 for a Histogram.  
STAT PLOT  
SYNTAX  
You attempted to display a graph when a stat plot  
that uses an undefined list is turned on.  
The command contains a syntax error. Look for  
misplaced functions, arguments, parentheses, or  
commas. See the appropriate chapter.  
UNDEFINED  
You referenced a variable that is not currently  
defined. For example, you referenced a stat variable  
when there is no current calculation because a list  
has been edited, or you referenced a variable when  
the variable is not valid for the current calculation,  
such as c after Med-Med.  
VALIDATION  
Electrical interference caused a link to fail or this  
calculator is not authorized to run the application.  
338 Appendix B: Reference Information  
Error Type  
Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies  
A problem exists with the WINDOW variables.  
WINDOW  
RANGE  
You defined XmaxXmin or YmaxYmin.  
WINDOW variables are too small or too large to  
graph correctly. You may have attempted to  
zoom in or zoom out to a point that exceeds the  
TIN73’s numerical range.  
ZOOM  
A point or a line, instead of a box, is defined in ZBox.  
A ZOOM operation returned a math error.  
Batteryà  
Service and  
Warranty  
C
Information  
Battery Information.........................................................339  
When to Replace Batteries........................................339  
Effects of Replacing the Batteries.............................340  
Replacing the Batteries.............................................341  
Battery Precautions...................................................341  
Texas Instruments (TI) Support and Service ....................342  
Australia & New Zealand Customers only.......................343  
All Other Customers ........................................................344  
Battery Information  
The TIN73 uses four AAA alkaline batteries and has a user-  
replaceable backup lithium battery (CR1616 or CR1620).  
When to Replace Batteries  
When the battery voltage level drops below a usable level, the  
TIN73 displays the following message when you turn on the  
unit.  
 
340 Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information  
Battery Information  
The TIN73 uses four AAA alkaline batteries and has a user-  
replaceable backup lithium battery (CR1616 or CR1620).  
When to Replace Batteries  
When the battery voltage level drops below a usable level, the  
TIN73 displays the following message when you turn on the  
unit.  
Generally, the calculator continues to operate for one week  
after the low-battery message is first displayed. After this  
period, the TIN73 will turn off automatically and the unit will  
not operate. Batteries must be replaced. All memory is  
retained.  
Note: The operating period following the first low-battery  
message could be longer if you use the calculator infrequently  
or shorter if you use the calculator frequently.  
Replace the lithium battery every three to four years.  
The calculator does not let you install new software or  
application programming if the batteries are too low.  
Effects of Replacing the Batteries  
Do not remove both types of batteries (AAA and lithium  
auxiliary) at the same time. Do not allow the batteries to lose  
power completely. If you follow these guidelines and the steps  
for replacing batteries on the next page, then you can replace  
either type of battery without losing any information in  
memory.  
 
Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information 341  
Replacing the Batteries  
1. Turn off the calculator. Replace the slide cover over the  
keyboard to avoid inadvertently turning on the calculator.  
Turn the back of the calculator toward you.  
2. Hold the calculator upright, push downward on the latch  
on the top of the battery cover with your finger, and then  
pull the cover toward you.  
Note: To avoid loss of information stored in memory, you  
must turn off the calculator. Do not remove the AAA  
batteries and the lithium battery simultaneously.  
3. Replace all four AAA alkaline batteries simultaneously.  
Or, replace the lithium battery.  
To replace the AAA alkaline batteries, remove all  
four discharged AAA batteries and install new ones  
according to the polarity (+ and -) diagram in the  
battery compartment.  
To replace the lithium battery, remove the screw  
from the lithium-battery cover, and then remove the  
cover. Install the new battery, + side up. Replace the  
cover and secure it with the screw. Use a CR1616 or  
CR1620 (or equivalent) lithium battery.  
4. Replace the battery compartment cover. Turn the  
calculator on and adjust the display contrast (- $ or  
- #), as necessary.  
Battery Precautions  
Take these precautions when replacing batteries:  
Do not mix new and used batteries. Do not mix brands or  
type within brands of batteries.  
Do not mix rechargeable and non-rechargeable batteries.  
Install batteries according to polarity (+ and -) diagrams.  
Do not place non-rechargeable batteries in a battery  
recharger.  
Do not incinerate batteries.  
 
342 Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information  
Texas Instruments (TI) Support and  
Service  
For General Information  
Home Page:  
education.ti.com  
KnowledgeBase and  
E-mail Inquiries:  
education.ti.com/support  
Phone:  
1.800.TI.CARES (1.800.842. 2737)  
For U.S., Canada, Mexico, Puerto  
Rico, and Virgin Islands only  
International  
Information:  
education.ti.com/support  
(Click the International  
Information link.)  
For Technical Support  
KnowledgeBase and  
Support by E-mail:  
education.ti.com/support  
1.972.917.8324  
Phone (not toll-free):  
For Product (hardware) Service  
Customers in the U.S., Canada, Mexico, Puerto Rico  
and Virgin Islands: Always contact TI Customer Support  
before returning a product for service.  
All other customers: Refer to the leaflet enclosed with this  
product (hardware) or contact your local TI  
retailer/distributor.  
 
Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information 343  
Customers in the U.S. and Canada Only  
One-Year Limited Warranty for Commercial Electronic  
Product  
This Texas Instruments electronic product warranty extends only to the  
original purchaser and user of the product.  
Warranty Duration. This Texas Instruments electronic product is warranted  
to the original purchaser for a period of one (1) year from the original  
purchase date.  
Warranty Coverage. This Texas Instruments electronic product is warranted  
against defective materials and construction. THIS WARRANTY IS VOID IF  
THE PRODUCT HAS BEEN DAMAGED BY ACCIDENT OR  
UNREASONABLE USE, NEGLECT, IMPROPER SERVICE, OR OTHER  
CAUSES NOT ARISING OUT OF DEFECTS IN MATERIALS OR  
CONSTRUCTION.  
Warranty Disclaimers. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARISING OUT OF  
THIS SALE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE ABOVE  
ONE-YEAR PERIOD. TEXAS INSTRUMENTS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR  
LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL COSTS, EXPENSES, OR DAMAGES INCURRED BY  
THE CONSUMER OR ANY OTHER USER.  
Some states/provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied  
warranties or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions  
may not apply to you.  
Legal Remedies. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may  
also have other rights that vary from state to state or province to province.  
Warranty Performance. During the above one (1) year warranty period,  
your defective product will be either repaired or replaced with a  
reconditioned model of an equivalent quality (at TI’s option) when the product  
is returned, postage prepaid, to Texas Instruments Service Facility. The  
warranty of the repaired or replacement unit will continue for the warranty of  
the original unit or six (6) months, whichever is longer. Other than the postage  
requirement, no charge will be made for such repair and/or replacement. TI  
strongly recommends that you insure the product for value prior to mailing.  
Software. Software is licensed, not sold. TI and its licensors do not warrant  
that the software will be free from errors or meet your specific requirements.  
All software is provided “AS IS.”  
Copyright. The software and any documentation supplied with this product  
are protected by copyright.  
344 Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information  
Australia & New Zealand Customers only  
One-Year Limited Warranty for Commercial Electronic  
Product  
This Texas Instruments electronic product warranty extends only to  
the original purchaser and user of the product.  
Warranty Duration. This Texas Instruments electronic product is  
warranted to the original purchaser for a period of one (1) year from  
the original purchase date.  
Warranty Coverage. This Texas Instruments electronic product is  
warranted against defective materials and construction. This  
warranty is void if the product has been damaged by accident or  
unreasonable use, neglect, improper service, or other causes not  
arising out of defects in materials or construction.  
Warranty Disclaimers. Any implied warranties arising out of  
this sale, including but not limited to the implied warranties  
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are  
limited in duration to the above one-year period. Texas  
Instruments shall not be liable for loss of use of the product  
or other incidental or consequential costs, expenses, or  
damages incurred by the consumer or any other user.  
Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied  
warranties or consequential damages, so the above limitations or  
exclusions may not apply to you.  
Legal Remedies. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and  
you may also have other rights that vary from jurisdiction to  
jurisdiction.  
Warranty Performance. During the above one (1) year warranty  
period, your defective product will be either repaired or replaced  
with a new or reconditioned model of an equivalent quality (at TI’s  
option) when the product is returned to the original point of  
purchase. The repaired or replacement unit will continue for the  
warranty of the original unit or six (6) months, whichever is longer.  
Other than your cost to return the product, no charge will be made  
for such repair and/or replacement. TI strongly recommends that you  
insure the product for value if you mail it.  
Software. Software is licensed, not sold. TI and its licensors do not  
warrant that the software will be free from errors or meet your  
specific requirements. All software is provided “AS IS.”  
Copyright. The software and any documentation supplied with this  
product are protected by copyright.  
All Customers outside the U.S. and Canada  
For information about the length and terms of the warranty, refer to your  
package and/or to the warranty statement enclosed with this product, or  
contact your local Texas Instruments retailer/distributor.  
 
345 Index  
Index  
! (factorial), 52  
" (seconds), 216  
¡ (degrees), 216  
¨ (list signifier), 101  
(relational operator), 32  
x (statistical result variable),  
136  
@List(, 97  
#SAMPLES  
DATA LOGGER, 270  
@Tbl  
definition, 153  
storing to, 161  
@X, 171, 179  
Gx, 136  
Gx2, 136  
Gxy, 136  
–A– (continued)  
angles  
converting to DMS, 220  
in DMS notation, 218  
Ans (Last Answer), 18  
continuing expressions, 18  
3
applications  
memory, 277  
Apps, 279  
Apps (SEND), 256  
AppVars, 279  
AppVars (SEND), 256  
Gy, 136  
Gy2, 136  
' (minutes), 216  
< (relational operator), 32  
= (relational operator), 32  
> (relational operator), 32  
0123456789 Decimal Notation  
mode, 24  
arctangent, 211  
Area (units), 68  
argument, 12  
augment(, 100  
Axesoff, 172  
stat plots, 114  
AxesOn, 172  
1 2 3 (Bar graph), 113, 118  
10^( (10 to the power of), 55  
1-Var Stats, 134  
results, 136  
2-Var Stats, 134  
results, 136  
3
( (cube), 37  
b/c Display Format mode, 60  
Back Up (SEND), 256  
Bar (GAUGE), 267  
Bar graph, 118  
base 10 logarithm, 54  
batteries, installing, 3  
Boolean operators, 32  
bound, 41  
–A–  
a (slope), 140, 142  
A§b/c Display Format mode, 60  
About (Memory Menu), 276  
abs( (absolute value), 44  
addition, 27  
All- (SEND), 256  
All+ (SEND), 256  
analyses, statistical, 128, 133  
and (Boolean operator), 33  
ANGLE (- u) menu, 215  
Angle mode  
branching  
DS>(, 235  
IS>(, 235  
LblàGoto, 234  
trig functions, 211  
 
346 Index  
–C–  
–C– (continued)  
constants (continued)  
Consts (SEND), 256  
contrast, display, 4  
CONVERSIONS  
(- ) menu, 68  
cable, unit-to-unit. See unit-to-  
unit cable  
CALC (- v) menu, 133  
CATALOG, 14  
CategList, 113  
Bar graph, 118  
Pictograph, 117  
Pie chart, 120  
categorical lists, 81  
signifier, c, 85  
degrees/radians (DMS), 217  
fractions, 64, 65  
units, 70  
CBL 2/CBL, 247, 254  
CBL/CBR App  
steps for running, 264  
CBR, 247, 254  
CoordOff, 172  
CoordOn, 172  
CBR (data collection method),  
266  
characters, editing, 11  
Check APPs, 277  
Check RAM, 277  
Circle(  
from Graph screen, 195  
from Home screen, 196  
circumference, 195  
Clear Home, 279  
ClrAllLists, 90, 280  
ClrDraw, 189  
correlation coefficient (r), 136  
ExpReg, 146  
LinReg(ax+b), 142  
QuadReg, 144  
counter, constant, 73  
Create New (program), 224  
CTL (8) Menu, 227  
ClrList, 95  
ClrScreen, 247  
ClrTable, 247  
coefficient of determination  
(r2), 136  
Full, 10  
ExpReg, 146  
LinReg (ax+b), 142  
QuadReg, 144  
Insert, 10  
–D–  
coin(, 53  
colon (:), 16  
column  
data collection methods, 265,  
266  
pixel, 205, 206  
table, 152  
Text(, 198  
combinations (nCr), 51  
commands, programming. See  
programming commands  
Constant Memory, 3  
constants, 71  
Data List, 113  
Bar graph, 118  
Pictograph, 117  
Pie chart, 120  
DATA LOGGER, 266  
counter, 73  
defining, 72, 75  
Multiple mode, 75  
recalling, 73, 75  
options, 270  
Decimal Notation mode, 24  
decimals  
converting to fractions, 64  
Index 347  
–D– (continued)  
defaults, resetting, 282  
–D– (continued)  
degrees  
DMS, 216  
trig, 211  
irregular shapes (Pen), 199  
Delete (Memory Menu), 278  
DelVar, 240  
denominator, 58  
Depend (tables)  
Ask, 156  
points, 202  
text, 197  
Auto, 155, 156, 157  
definition, 153  
DuplicateName menu, 259  
DependAsk, 161  
DependAuto, 161  
dependent list formula, 83  
deleting, 91  
dependent numerical lists, 83  
dependent variable (Y), 150  
DiagnosticOff  
ExpReg, 146  
LinReg(ax+b), 142  
QuadReg, 144  
DiagnosticOn  
ExpReg, 146  
LinReg(ax+b), 142  
QuadReg, 144  
dice(, 53  
difference (subtraction), 27  
difficulties, correcting, 331  
dim( (dimension), 95  
DIRECTNS  
e^( (e to the power of), 56  
edit keys, 11  
editing  
characters, 11  
programs, 225  
deleting, 89  
displaying, 103  
editing, 89  
DATA LOGGER, 271  
GAUGE, 268  
Disp, 244  
fractional, 82  
numerical, 81  
DispGraph, 245  
display contrast, 4  
Display Format mode, 60  
DispTable, 245  
dividend  
remainder(, 48  
division, 27  
integer, 28  
divisor  
remainder(, 48, 50  
DMS, 220  
converting to, 220  
notation, 218  
drawing  
editing, 159  
End, 233  
DATA LOGGER, 271  
For, 231  
If–Then, 229  
If–Then–Else, 230  
Repeat, 232  
While, 232  
entries, Home screen, 5  
Clear Home, 279  
Entry (Last Entry), 17  
multiple expressions, 16  
circles, 195  
horizontal lines, 191  
348 Index  
–E– (continued)  
Entry line  
–F– (continued)  
lists, 79  
tables, 154, 160  
Text editor, 8  
Simplification mode, 60  
simplifying manually, 62  
Equation Operating System  
(EOS), 15, 330  
Equation Solver, 38  
bound, 41  
Solve, 41  
error messages, 332  
transmission, 260  
errors, correcting, 332  
EXEC (8) Menu  
calling a subroutine, 250  
executing a program, 251  
ExpReg (exponential  
regression), 146  
Histogram, 121  
stat plots, 113  
with regressions, 133, 137  
graph styles, 169  
steps for, 164  
expressions, 15  
multiple on one line, 16  
ExprOff, 172  
ExprOn, 172  
tracing, 178  
–F–  
functions  
Factor, simplification, 63  
recalling, 64  
factorial (!), 52  
Float Decimal Notation mode,  
24  
For(, 231  
format, window, 171  
formula, dependent list, 83  
attaching, 83  
defining, 167  
definition of, 12  
editing, 168  
deleting, 91  
fPart (fractional part), 46  
fractions  
GAUGE, 266  
comments, 268  
converting mixed to simple,  
65  
converting to decimals, 64  
Display Format mode, 60  
entering, 58  
gcd( (greatest common  
divisor), 36  
Get(, 247  
factor, simplification, 63  
recalling, 64  
list elements, as, 82  
mixed numbers, 58  
negating, 59  
results in calculations, 59  
simple, 58  
simplification factor, 62  
GetCalc(, 247  
getKey, 246  
Goto, 234  
Graph Explorer Software, 262  
graph styles, 169  
graphing  
trig functions, 214  
Index 349  
–G– (continued)  
–I– (continued)  
graphing, function. See function  
graphing  
GraphStyle(, 240  
greatest common divisor  
(GCD), 36  
–L–  
L1-L6, 79, 80  
LabelOff, 172  
LabelOn, 172  
GridOff, 172  
Last Entry (Entry), 17  
latitude (DMS), 218  
lcm( (least common multiple),  
¨DIST  
DATA LOGGER, 272  
GAUGE, 269  
least common multiple (LCM),  
35  
letter keys, 8  
GridOn, 172  
–H–  
Histogram, 121  
Home screen, 5  
Hor (stat plot option), 113  
Bar graph, 118  
Pictograph, 117  
Horizontal (draw)  
from Graph screen, 191  
from Home screen, 192  
–I–  
Line(  
from Graph screen, 189  
from Home screen, 190  
to CBLàCBR, 255  
LINK SEND menu, 254  
LinReg(ax+b), 142  
List (IDList), 279  
List (SEND), 256  
list braces { }, 8  
IàO (8) Menu, 241  
icons  
graphstyle, 169  
pictograph, 113, 117  
Type (stat plots), 111  
ID number, 262  
IDList, 279  
If, 229  
If–Then, 229  
If–Then–Else, 230  
independent numerical lists, 83  
independent variable (X), 150,  
167  
Indpnt (tables)  
Ask, 157  
Auto, 155, 156, 157  
definition, 153  
editing elements, 89  
inserting elements, 89  
inserting lists, 87  
list signifier (¨), 91, 101  
list, elements. See elements, list  
lists  
IndpntAsk, 161  
IndpntAuto, 161  
Input, 242  
instructions, 12  
integer division, 28  
integer part (iPart), 46  
interquartile range, 124  
INTRVL (SEC)  
DATA LOGGER, 271  
inverse function, 29  
inverse trig functions, 211  
iPart (integer part), 46  
¨ (list signifier), 91, 101  
braces, 102  
clearing elements, 90  
ClrAllLists, 280  
combining two, 100  
copying, 103  
350 Index  
–L– (continued)  
lists (continued)  
creating, 102  
–L– (continued)  
¨VCMT, 269  
¨VOLT  
DATA LOGGER, 272  
GAUGE, 269  
deleting elements, 89  
deleting from memory, 88  
dependent numerical, 83  
editing elements, 89  
entering elements, 81  
formula, deleting, 91  
formula, dependent list, 83  
frequency. See frequency  
lists  
independent numerical, 83  
inserting elements, 89  
L1-L6, 79, 80  
¨DCMT, 269  
¨DIST, 269, 272  
List editor, 79  
list name notation, 80  
¨LCMT, 269  
¨LIGHT, 269, 272  
¨TCMT, 269  
¨TEMP, 269, 272  
¨VCMT, 269  
¨VOLT, 269, 272  
math functions, with, 105  
names, accessing, 91  
naming, 79  
–M–  
Manual-Fit, 138  
MassàWeight (units), 69  
MATH (- v) menu, 34  
MAX (GAUGE), 268  
max(  
- v MATH Menu, 128  
1 NUM Menu, 47  
mean(, 130  
median(, 130  
Med-Med (median-median),  
140  
Memory Full menu, 259  
memory, RAM. See RAM  
MEMORYBACKUP menu, 261  
Menu Map, 320  
notation, 79  
numerical elements, 81  
sorting, 93  
stat plot data, 109  
steps for creating, 78  
text elements, 81, 85  
transferring (LINK), 254  
Xlist, 114, 124  
Ylist, 114  
¨LCMT, 269  
¨LIGHT  
DATA LOGGER, 272  
GAUGE, 269  
displaying, 12  
exiting, 13  
scrolling items, 13  
secondary, 13  
ln( (natural log), 55  
LOG (1) Menu, 54  
log( (base 10 logarithm), 54  
logic (Boolean) operators, 32  
longitude (DMS), 218  
¨TCMT, 269  
Meter (GAUGE), 267  
MIN (GAUGE), 268  
min(  
- v MATH Menu, 128  
1 NUM Menu, 47  
¨TEMP  
DATA LOGGER, 272  
GAUGE, 269  
Index 351  
–M– (continued)  
–O–  
minutes  
conversions, 69  
DMS, 218  
off/on, 3  
Omit (LINK), 259  
minX, 136  
minY, 136  
mixed numbers, 58  
converting to fractions, 65  
mode settings  
OPS (- v) menu, 92, 95  
124  
Output(, 245  
Overwrite (LINK), 259  
0123456789, 24  
A§b/c, 60  
Autosimp, 61  
b/c, 60  
definition, 22  
Degree, 211  
Float, 24  
list element display, 81  
Mansimp, 62  
Multiple (constants), 75  
Normal, 23  
Radian, 211  
parentheses  
implied multiplication, 16  
Pause, 233  
percent, 29  
Percent (Pie chart), 113, 120  
permutations (nCr), 51  
pi, 28  
Pic (SEND), 256  
Pic1, 2, 3  
Sci, 23  
Single (constants), 72  
table element display, 154  
mode(, 130  
Modified Box plot, 124  
Multiple mode (constants), 75  
multiplication, 27  
pixel, 205  
–N–  
n (number of data points), 136  
naming  
lists, 79  
DATA LOGGER, 271  
Plot1, 2, and 3, 109  
PlotsOff/On, 110  
POINTS (2) menu, 201  
131  
programs, 224  
natural log (ln), 55  
nCr (combinations), 51  
negative numbers, 6  
NEW (8) Menu, 224  
Normal mode setting, 23  
nPr (permutations), 51  
NUM (1) Menu, 44  
Number (Pie chart), 113, 120  
numbers  
entering, 6  
negative, 6  
numerator, 58  
Numeric Notation mode, 23  
numerical lists, 81  
dependent, 83  
PRB (1) Menu, 49  
Prgm (SEND), 256  
primary function, 6  
Probe-Time Graph, 270  
product (multiplication), 27  
Program editor, 225  
exiting, 227  
with 8 CTL Menu, 227  
programming commands  
ClrScreen, 247  
ClrTable, 247  
deleting, 249  
independent, 83  
352 Index  
–P– (continued)  
–P– (continued)  
Prompt, 244  
Programming Commands  
(continued)  
DelVar, 240  
Disp, 244  
DispGraph, 245  
DispTable, 245  
DS>(, 235  
editing, 248  
End, 233  
entering, 226  
For(, 231  
Get(, 247  
GetCalc(, 247  
getKey, 246  
Goto, 234  
from Graph screen, 202  
from Graph screen, 202  
Pxl-Change(, 205  
Pxl-Off(, 205  
GraphStyle(, 240  
If, 229  
Pxl-On(, 205  
pxl-Test(, 206  
If–Then, 229  
If–Then–Else, 230  
Input, 242  
inserting, 249  
IS>(, 235  
Lbl (Label), 234  
Menu(, 236  
Output(, 245  
Pause, 233  
prgm, 238  
Prompt, 244  
Repeat, 232  
Return, 239  
Return with subroutines,  
251  
–Q–  
Q1 (1st quartile median point)  
Modified Box plot, 124  
Q1 (statistical result variable),  
Q3 (3rd quartile median point)  
Q3 (statistical result variable),  
QuadReg (quadratic  
QuickZoom, 179  
Send(, 247  
SetMenu(, 237  
Stop, 239  
While, 232  
programs  
–R–  
branching, 234  
calling, 250  
r. See correlation coefficient  
r (radians), 216  
r2àR2. See coefficient of  
determination  
copying, 249  
creating new, 224  
debugging, 252  
definition, 223  
editing, 225  
entering commands, 226  
executing, 251  
naming, 224  
radians  
DMS, 216  
trig, 211  
radius, circle, 196  
renaming, 249  
steps for creating, 223  
Index 353  
–R– (continued)  
RAM memory, 254  
back up, 261, 263  
resetting, 281  
rand (random number), 49  
randInt( (random integer), 50  
RANGER program, 265, 273  
Rcl (Recall), 21  
–S– (continued)  
menu items, 13  
secondary (-) functions, 7  
secondary menus, 13  
seconds  
with programs, 250  
Real (SEND), 256  
RealTme  
DATA LOGGER, 271  
RecallPic, 208  
Receive (LINK), 257  
RECEIVE (9) menu, 257  
reciprocal, 29  
RegEQ (Regression Equation),  
137  
regression  
exponential (ExpReg), 146  
linear (LinReg(ax+b)), 142  
quadratic (QuadReg), 144  
regression models, 133  
relational operators, 32  
remainder  
seconds (DMS), 218  
49  
SELECT screen (LINK), 258  
Select(, 98  
CATALOG, 14  
send data (LINK), 255  
SEND menu, 255  
Send(, 247  
SendID (SEND), 256  
seq(, 99  
SetFactors, 186  
SetMenu(, 237  
Shade(, 193  
integer division, 28  
remainder(, 48  
Rename (LINK), 259  
Repeat, 232  
Reset  
Simplification mode, 60  
simplification signifier ($), 62  
sin( (sine), 210  
Single mode (constants), 72  
slope (a), 140, 142  
Smart Graph, 178  
software  
All RAM, 281  
Defaults, 282  
Reset (MEMORY Menu), 280  
Return, 239  
subroutines, 251  
right triangle, 210  
round, 44  
upgrade, 262  
Solve (Equation Solver), 41  
Solver, Equation. See Equation  
Sonic probe, 265  
sorting lists, 93  
row  
pixel, 206  
Text(, 198  
multiple, 94  
–S–  
space (in text), 8  
Spaces Free screen, 277  
Speed (units), 69  
square, 30  
sample standard deviation, 131,  
136  
Scale (pictograph), 113, 117  
Scatter plot, 114  
Select(, 98  
square root, 31  
standard deviation  
population, 131  
sample, 131  
Sci mode setting, 23  
scientific notation, 7  
354 Index  
–S– (continued)  
–T– (continued)  
stat plots  
adjusting viewing window,  
114  
editing Yn, 160  
Bar graph, 118  
defining plots, 109  
deselecting Yn functions, 109  
displaying, 114  
drawing on, 188  
editors, 111  
steps for creating, 151  
TABLE SETUP screen, 153  
tan( (tangent), 210  
Histogram, 121  
list data, 109  
main menu, 109  
Modified Box plot, 124  
options, defining, 112  
Pictograph, 117  
Pie chart, 120  
Temperature (units), 69  
Text editor, 7  
Plot1, 109  
Plot2, 109  
Plot3, 109  
PlotsOff, 110  
categorical list elements, 81  
naming a program, 224  
PlotsOn, 110  
TI Connect, 254  
Time (units), 69  
tracing a graph, 178  
controlling increments, 179  
transmission errors (LINK), 260  
TRANSMIT (9) screen, 258  
trig calculations, 212  
trig functions, 210  
Scatter plot, 114  
steps for defining, 108  
tracing, 114  
types, selecting, 111  
xyLine plot, 114  
statistical analyses, 128, 133  
stdDev(. See standard  
deviation  
Stop, 239  
store (variables), 20  
STORE (2) menu, 206  
StorePic, 207  
subroutines, 238, 250  
subtraction, 27  
sum (addition), 27  
sum(, 132  
Angle mode, 211  
TRIG (- u) menu, 210  
summary points, 136  
Sx (statistical result variable),  
136  
–U–  
units  
angle, 215  
Area, 68  
Sy (statistical result variable),  
136  
converting, 70  
DATA LOGGER, 271  
GAUGE, 268  
Length, 68  
MassàWeight, 69  
Speed, 69  
system variables, 20, 329  
–T–  
TABLE SETUP screen, 153  
tables  
defining functions, 152  
definition, 150  
Temperature, 69  
Time, 69  
Index 355  
–U– (continued)  
units (continued)  
Volume, 69  
–X– (continued)  
unit-to-unit cable, 254  
upgrade software, 262  
installing, 262  
xth root, 38  
Select(, 98  
where to find, 262  
–Y–  
–V–  
Y= editor, 167  
variables  
recalling, 21  
VARS Menu, 329  
y=abx, 146  
y=ax+b, 142  
Manual-Fit, 138  
Med-Med, 140  
y=ax2+bx+c, 144  
Y1, 167  
Y2, 167  
Y3, 167  
variables, types of, 20  
VARS (- }) Menu, 329  
Vars to TI82 (SEND), 256  
Vars to TI83 (SEND), 256  
Vert (stat plot option), 113  
Bar graph, 118  
Pictograph, 117  
Vertical (draw)  
from Graph screen, 191  
from Home screen, 192  
Volt probe, 265  
Y4, 167  
YFact, 186  
Volume (units), 69  
y-intercept (b), 140, 142  
Ylist, 112  
–W–  
Ymax, 171  
DATA LOGGER, 271  
DATA LOGGER, 271  
Y-Vars (SEND), 256  
web site, TI, 262  
WeightàMass (units), 69  
While, 232  
window format, 171  
WINDOW values, 171  
defining, 173  
WINDOW Values Screen, 174  
–X–  
–Z–  
x1 (summary point), 136  
x2 (summary point), 136  
x3 (summary point), 136  
XFact, 186  
ZBox, 182, 310  
ZDecimal, 310  
ZInteger, 311  
zoom  
Xlist, 112  
function graph, 181  
ZOOM (() menu, 181  
ZoomFit, 312  
ZoomIn, 183, 311  
SetFactors, 186  
ZoomOut, 183, 312  
SetFactors, 186  
Histogram, 121  
Modified Box plot, 124  
Scatter plot, 114  
xyLine plot, 114  
Xmax, 171, 179  
356 Index  
–Z–(continued)  
ZoomStat, 114, 313  
ZPrevious, 185  
ZQuadrantI, 313  
ZSquare, 313  
ZStandard, 184, 314  
ZTrig, 314  

Weil McLain EGH Series 4 User Manual
Victor 1210 3A User Manual
Toshiba MA 215 User Manual
Sony HANDYCAM HDR FX1000E User Manual
Sony DCR TRV285E User Manual
Sony Cyber shot DSC W330 User Manual
Sony CFD 121 User Manual
Sony CCD TR2300E User Manual
Sharp XE A206 User Manual
Samsung SMX F43RN User Manual